back

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

Programming Guide 09.2001 Edition

Cycles

User Documentation
 General 1

Drilling Cycles and 2

Drilling Patterns

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Milling Cycles 3

Cycles Turning Cycles 4

Error Messages and 5

Programming Guide Error Handling

Appendix A

Valid for

Control Software Version

SINUMERIK 840D 6
SINUMERIK 840DE (export version) 6
SINUMERIK 840D powerline 6
SINUMERIK 840DE powerline 6
SINUMERIK 840Di 2
SINUMERIK 840DiE (export version) 2
SINUMERIK 810D 3
SINUMERIK 810DE (export version) 3
SINUMERIK 810D powerline 6
SINUMERIK 810DE powerline 6

09.2001 Edition
0 0
Contents 09.01

SINUMERIK® Documentation

Printing history

Brief details of this edition and previous editions are listed below.

The status of each edition is shown by the code in the "Remarks" column.

Status code in the "Remarks" column:

A .... New documentation.

B .... Unrevised edition with new Order No.
C .... Revised edition with new status.
If factual changes have been made on the page since the last edition, this is indicated by a
new edition coding in the header on that page.

Order No. Remarks

02.95 6FC5298-2AB40-0BP0 A
04.95 6FC5298-2AB40-0BP1 C
03.96 6FC5298-3AB40-0BP0 C
08.97 6FC5298-4AB40-0BP0 C
12.97 6FC5298-4AB40-0BP1 C
12.98 6FC5298-5AB40-0BP0 C
08.99 6FC5298-5AB40-0BP1 C
04.00 6FC5298-5AB40-0BP2 C
10.00 6FC5298-6AB40-0BP0 C
09.01 6FC5298-6AB40-0BP1 C
This manual is included in the documentation available on CD ROM (DOCONCD)
Edition Order No. Remarks
09.01 6FC5298-6CA00-0BG1 C

Trademarks
SIMATICâ, SIMATIC HMIâ, SIMATIC NETâ, SIROTECâ, SINUMERIKâ, SIMODRIVEâ and SIMODRIVE
POSMOâ are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. Other names mentioned in this publication might be
trademarks whose use by a third party for his purposes could violate the rights of the holder.

Further information is available on the Internet under: Other functions not described in this documentation might be executable in the
http:/www.ad.siemens.de/sinumerik control. This does not, however, represent an obligation to supply such functions
with a new control or when servicing.
This document was produced with WinWord V8.0
and Designer V7.0. We have checked that the contents of this document correspond to the hardware
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not and software described. Nonetheless, differences might exist and we, therefore,
permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be liable for damages. cannot guarantee that they are completely identical. The information contained in
All rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model this document is, however, reviewed regularly and any necessary changes will be
or design, are reserved. included in the next edition. We welcome suggestions for improvement.

© Siemens AG, 1995–2001. All rights reserved Subject to change without prior notice.

Order No. 6FC5298-6AB40-0BP1 Siemens Aktiengesellschaft

Printed in Germany
 0 0
09.01 Contents

Contents
General 1-15
1.1 General information ......................................................................................................... 1-16

1.2 Overview of cycles........................................................................................................... 1-16

1.2.1 Drilling cycles, drill pattern cycles, milling cycles and turning cycles ...........................1-17
1.2.2 Cycle auxiliary subroutines ..........................................................................................1-18

1.3 Programming cycles ........................................................................................................1-19

1.3.1 Call and return conditions ............................................................................................1-19
1.3.2 Machine data ...............................................................................................................1-20
1.3.3 Messages during execution of a cycle .........................................................................1-21
1.3.4 Cycle call and parameter list........................................................................................1-22
1.3.5 Simulation of cycles .....................................................................................................1-25

1.4 Cycle support in program editor (SW 4.3 and later) ........................................................1-26
1.4.1 Overview of important files...........................................................................................1-27
1.4.2 Configuring cycle selection ..........................................................................................1-28
1.4.3 Configuring input screen forms for parameter assignment..........................................1-30
1.4.4 Configuring help displays .............................................................................................1-33
1.4.5 Configuring tools (MMC 100 only)................................................................................1-34
1.4.6 Loading to the control ..................................................................................................1-35
1.4.7 Independence of language ..........................................................................................1-36
1.4.8 Operating the cycles support function..........................................................................1-37
1.4.9 Integrating user cycles into the MMC 103 simulation function.....................................1-38

1.5 Cycle support in the program editor (SW 5.1 and later)......................................................1-39
1.5.1 Menus, cycle selection .................................................................................................1-39
1.5.2 New functions in input screen forms ............................................................................1-40

Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns 2-47

2.1 Drilling cycles ......................................................................................................................2-48
2.1.1 Preconditions ...............................................................................................................2-50
2.1.2 Drilling, centering – CYCLE81 .....................................................................................2-52
2.1.3 Drilling, counterboring – CYCLE82 ..............................................................................2-55
2.1.4 Deep-hole drilling – CYCLE83 .....................................................................................2-57
2.1.5 Rigid tapping – CYCLE84 ............................................................................................2-65
2.1.6 Tapping with compensating chuck – CYCLE840.........................................................2-71
2.1.7 Boring 1 – CYCLE85....................................................................................................2-79
2.1.8 Boring 2 – CYCLE86....................................................................................................2-82
2.1.9 Boring 3 – CYCLE87....................................................................................................2-86
2.1.10 Boring 4 – CYCLE88....................................................................................................2-89
2.1.11 Boring 5 – CYCLE89....................................................................................................2-91

2.2 Modal call of drilling cycles..................................................................................................2-93

ã Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 0-5
 0 0
Contents 09.01

2.3 Drill pattern cycles ............................................................................................................... 2-96

2.3.1 Preconditions................................................................................................................ 2-96
2.3.2 Row of holes – HOLES1 .............................................................................................. 2-97
2.3.3 Hole circle – HOLES2 ................................................................................................ 2-101
2.3.4 Dot matrix – CYCLE801 (SW 5.3 and later) .............................................................. 2-104

Milling Cycles 3-107

3.1 General information........................................................................................................... 3-108

3.2 Preconditions..................................................................................................................... 3-109

3.3 Thread cutting – CYCLE90................................................................................................ 3-111

3.4 Elongated holes on a circle – LONGHOLE ....................................................................... 3-117

3.5 Slots on a circle – SLOT1.................................................................................................. 3-123

3.6 Circumferential slot – SLOT2 ............................................................................................ 3-131

3.7 Milling rectangular pockets – POCKET1 ........................................................................... 3-136

3.8 Milling circular pockets – POCKET2 ................................................................................. 3-140

3.9 Milling rectangular pockets – POCKET3 ........................................................................... 3-144

3.10 Milling circular pockets – POCKET4............................................................................. 3-154

3.11 Face milling – CYCLE71............................................................................................... 3-160

3.12 Path milling – CYCLE72 ............................................................................................... 3-166

3.13 Milling rectangular spigots – CYCLE76 (SW 5.3 and later) .......................................... 3-176

3.14 Milling circular spigots – CYCLE77 (SW 5.3 and later) ................................................ 3-181

3.15 Pocket milling with islands – CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75 (SW 5.2 and later) .... 3-185
3.15.1 Transfer pocket edge contour – CYCLE74 ................................................................ 3-186
3.15.2 Transfer island contour – CYCLE75 .......................................................................... 3-188
3.15.3 Contour programming ................................................................................................ 3-189
3.15.4 Pocket milling with islands – CYCLE73...................................................................... 3-192

3.16 Swiveling - CYCLE800 (from SW 6.2) .......................................................................... 3-215

3.16.1 Operation, parameter assignment.............................................................................. 3-218
3.16.2 Starting up CYCLE800 ............................................................................................... 3-227
3.16.3 User cycle TOOLCARR.spf........................................................................................ 3-240

Turning cycles 4-243

4.1 General information........................................................................................................... 4-244

4.2 Preconditions..................................................................................................................... 4-245

4.3 Grooving cycle – CYCLE93 ............................................................................................... 4-249

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

0-6 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 0 0
09.01 Contents

4.4 Undercut cycle – CYCLE94...............................................................................................4-259

4.5 Stock removal cycle – CYCLE95 ......................................................................................4-263

4.6 Thread undercut – CYCLE96............................................................................................4-276

4.7 Thread cutting – CYCLE97 ...............................................................................................4-280

4.8 Thread chaining – CYCLE98.............................................................................................4-288

4.9 Thread recutting (SW 5.3 and later)..................................................................................4-295

4.10 Extended stock removal cycle – CYCLE950 (SW 5.3 and later)..................................4-297

Error Messages and Error Handling 5-319

5.1 General information...........................................................................................................5-320

5.2 Troubleshooting in the cycles............................................................................................5-320

5.3 Overview of cycle alarms ..................................................................................................5-321

5.4 Messages in the cycles .....................................................................................................5-327

Appendix A-329
A Abbreviations ....................................................................................................................... A-330
B Terms................................................................................................................................... A-339
C References .......................................................................................................................... A-347
D Index .................................................................................................................................... A-361
E Identifiers ............................................................................................................................. A-365

ã Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 0-7
 0 0
Preface 09.01
Structure of the manual

Structure of the manual

The SINUMERIK documentation is organized in 3 parts:
• General Documentation
• User Documentation
• Manufacturer/Service Documentation

Target group
This documentation is intended for users of machine
tools. This publication provides detailed information
that the user requires for operating the SINUMERIK
810D and 840D controls.

Standard scope
This programming guide describes the standard
functions. Differences and additions implemented by
the machine-tool manufacturer are documented by
the machine manufacturer.

More detailed information about other publications

concerning SINUMERIK 810D and 840D and
publications that apply to all SINUMERIK controls
(e.g. Universal Interface, Measuring Cycles...) can
be obtained from your local Siemens branch office.

Other functions not described in this documentation

might be executable in the control. This does not,
however, represent an obligation to supply such
functions with a new control or when servicing.

Applicability
This Programming Guide applies to: SINUMERIK
810D, 840D, 840Di control systems with MMC 100
and MMC 102/103.
Details of software versions in the Programming Guide
refer to the 840D system, but apply correspondingly to
the 810D, e.g. SW 6 on a SINUMERIK 840D
corresponds to SW 3 on a SINUMERIK 810D.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

0-8 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 0 0
09.01 Preface
Structure of the manual

SINUMERIK 840D powerline

From 09.2001 onwards, higher-performance
versions of
• SINUMERIK 840D powerline and
• SINUMERIK 840DE powerline
will be available. For a list of the available
powerline modules, please refer to Section 1.1
of the Hardware Description /PHD/.
SINUMERIK 810D powerline
From 12.2001 onwards, higher-performance
versions of
SINUMERIK 810D powerline and
SINUMERIK 810DE powerline
will be available. For a list of the available
powerline modules, please refer to Section 1.1 of
the Hardware Description /PHC/.
Structure of descriptions
All cycles and program functions were laid out
according to the same structure, as far as possible
and practicable. The various levels of information
have been structured so that you can find the
information you are looking for quickly.
1. The function at a glance Drilling cycles and drilling patterns 03.96
2 2.1 Drilling cycles 2
If you need to look up a cycle that is rarely used or
the meaning of a parameter, you will see at a glance
how the function is programmed together with an
2.1.2 Drilling, centering – CYCLE81
Programming
CYCLE81 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP)

explanation of the cycles and parameters. RTP real Retraction plane (absolute)
RFP real Reference plane (absolute)
SDIS real Safety clearance (enter without sign)
DP real Final drilling depth (absolute)

This information always appears at the beginning of

DPR real Final drilling depth relative to reference plane (enter without sign)

the page.
Function Z

The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and

feedrate to the programmed final drilling depth.

Note: X

In order to keep the documentation succinct we have

not provided all the methods or representation of the
individual cycles and parameters that are possible in Operating sequence

the programming language. Cycles have been Position reached before the beginning of the
cycle:
The drilling position is the position in the two axes of

programmed in the form in which they most the selected plane.

The cycle implements the following motion

frequently arise on the shop floor. sequence:

• Approach of the reference plane brought forward
by the safety clearance with G0
• Travel to the final drilling depth at the feedrate
programmed in the calling program (G1)
• Retraction to retraction plane with G0

 Siemens AG 1997 All rights reserved.

2-36 SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC Programming Guide, Cycles (PGZ) - 08.97 Edition.

ã Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 0-9
 0 0
Preface 09.01
Structure of the manual

2. Detailed explanations 03.96 Drilling cycles and drilling patterns

2 2.1 Drilling cycles 2
In the theoretical sections, you are provided with a
detailed description of the following:
Explanation of parameters
Z
G1
RFP and RTP
G0
Generally, the reference plane (RFP) and the

What is the cycle used for? retraction plane (RTP) have different values. In the
cycle it is assumed that the retraction plane lies in
front of the reference plane. The distance between RTP
the retraction plane and the final drilling depth is RFP+SDIS
RFP
therefore greater than the distance between the X
reference plane and the final drilling depth.

What does the cycle do? SDIS

The safety clearance (SDIS) refers to the reference DP=RFP-DPR
plane. which is brought forward by the safety
clearance. The direction in which the safety
clearance is active is automatically determined by

What is the sequence of operations? the cycle.

DP and DPR
The drilling depth can be defined either absolute
(DP) or relative (DPR) to the reference plane.
If it is entered as an absolute value, the value is

What do the parameters do? traversed directly in the cycle.

Additional notes
If a value is entered both for the DP and the DPR,

What else do you have to look out for? the final drilling depth is derived from the DPR. If the
DPR deviates from the absolute depth programmed
via the DP, the message "Depth: Corresponds to
value for relative depth" is output in the dialog line.

The theoretical sections provide learning material for

the NC beginner. You should work through the
manual at least once to get an idea of the scope of
the functions and capability of your SINUMERIK
 Siemens AG 1997 All rights reserved.

control.
SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC Programming Guide, Cycles (PGZ) - 08.97 Edition. 2-37

3. From theory to practice Drilling cycles and drilling patterns 03.96

08.97
2 2.1 Drilling cycles 2
The programming example shows you how to
include the cycles in an operating sequence.
If the values for the reference plane and the
retraction plane are identical, a relative depth must
not be programmed. The error message

An application example of almost all the cycles is

61101 "Reference plane incorrectly defined" is
output and the cycle is not executed. This error
message is also output if the retraction plane lies

provided after the theoretical section.

behind the reference plane, i.e. the distance to the
final drilling depth is smaller.

Programming example
Drilling_centering Y Y A-B
You can use this program to make 3 holes using the
A
drilling cycle CYCLE81, whereby this cycle is called
with different parameter settings. The drilling axis is 120
always the Z axis.

30

0
B X Z

40 90 35 100 108

N10 G0 G90 F200 S300 M3 Specification of the technology values

N20 D3 T3 Z110 Traverse to retraction plane
N30 X40 Y120 Traverse to first drilling position
N40 CYCLE81 (110, 100, 2, 35) Cycle call with absolute final drilling
depth, safety clearance and incomplete
parameter list
N50 Y30 Traverse to next drilling position
N60 CYCLE81 (110, 102, , 35) Cycle call without safety clearance
N70 G0 G90 F180 S300 M03 Specification of the technology values
N80 X90 Traverse to next position
N90 CYCLE81 (110, 100, 2, , 65) Cycle call with relative final drilling depth
and safety clearance
N100 M30 End of program

 Siemens AG 1997 All rights reserved.

2-38 SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC Programming Guide, Cycles (PGZ) - 08.97 Edition.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

0-10 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 0 0
09.01 Preface
Structure of the manual

Explanation of symbols

Sequence of operations

Explanation

Function

Parameters

Programming example

Programming

Additional notes

Cross-reference to other documentation or sections

Danger notes and sources of error

Additional notes or background information

ã Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 0-11
 0 0
Preface 09.01
Proper use

Warning notes
The following warning notes with graded degrees of
importance are used in this documentation.

Danger
This warning appears whenever death, serious
personal injury or substantial material damage will
occur if the appropriate precautions are not taken.

Warning
This warning appears whenever death, serious
personal injury or substantial material damage may
occur if the appropriate precautions are not taken.

Caution
This warning (with warning triangle) appears
whenever slight personal injury may occur if the
appropriate precautions are not taken.

Caution
This warning (with warning triangle) appears
whenever material damage may occur if the
appropriate precautions are not taken.

Notice
This warning appears whenever an undesirable
result or an undesirable state may occur if the
appropriate precautions are not taken.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

0-12 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 0 0
09.01 Preface
Proper use

Principle
Your SIEMENS 810D and 840D have been designed
and constructed to the latest standards of echnology
and recognized safety rules, standards and
regulations.

Additional equipment
The applications of SIEMENS controls can be
expanded by adding special additional devices,
equipment and expansion units supplied by
SIEMENS.

Personnel
Only authorized and reliable personnel who have
been trained in the use of the equipment may be
allowed to handle the control. Nobody without the
necessary training must be allowed to operate the
control, even temporarily.

The corresponding responsibilities of personnel

who set up, operate and maintain the equipment
must be clearly defined and adherence to these
responsibilities monitored.

Behavior
Before the control is started up, the personnel who
are to work on the control must be thoroughly
acquainted with the Operator's Guides. The
operating company is also responsible for
constantly monitoring the overall technical state of
the control (noticeable faults and damage, altered
service performance).

Servicing
Repairs must be carried out by personnel who are
specially trained and qualified in the relevant
technical subject according to the information
supplied in the service and maintenance guide. All
relevant safety regulations must be followed.

ã Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 0-13
 0 0
Preface 09.01
Proper use

Note
The following is deemed to be improper usage and
exempts the manufacturer from any liability:

Any application which does not comply with the rules

for proper usage described above.

If the control is not in technically perfect condition

or is operated without due regard for safety
regulations and accident prevention instructions
given in the Instruction Manual.

If faults that might affect the safety of the equipment

are not rectified before the control is started up.

Any modification, bypassing or disabling of items

of equipment on the control that are required to
ensure fault-free operation, unlimited use and active
and passive safety.

Improper usage may result in unforeseen dangers

to:
• life and limb of personnel
• the control, machine and other assets of the
owner and the user.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

0-14 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 1 1
12.97 General

General

1.1 General information .........................................................................................................1-16

1.2 Overview of cycles...........................................................................................................1-16

1.2.1 Drilling cycles, drill pattern cycles, milling cycles and turning cycles........................1-17
1.2.2 Cycle auxiliary subroutines.......................................................................................1-18

1.3 Programming cycles ........................................................................................................1-19

1.3.1 Call and return conditions.........................................................................................1-19
1.3.2 Machine data............................................................................................................1-20
1.3.3 Messages during execution of a cycle .....................................................................1-21
1.3.4 Cycle call and parameter list ....................................................................................1-22
1.3.5 Simulation of cycles..................................................................................................1-25

1.4 Cycle support in program editor (SW 4.3 and later) ........................................................1-26
1.4.1 Overview of important files .......................................................................................1-27
1.4.2 Configuring cycle selection.......................................................................................1-28
1.4.3 Configuring input screen forms for parameter assignment ......................................1-30
1.4.4 Configuring help displays .........................................................................................1-33
1.4.5 Configuring tools (MMC 100 only) ............................................................................1-34
1.4.6 Loading to the control...............................................................................................1-35
1.4.7 Independence of language.......................................................................................1-36
1.4.8 Operating the cycles support function ......................................................................1-37
1.4.9 Integrating user cycles into the MMC 103 simulation function .................................1-38

1.5 Cycle support in the program editor (SW 5.1 and later) ..................................................1-39
1.5.1 Menus, cycle selection .............................................................................................1-39
1.5.2 New functions in input screen forms ........................................................................1-40

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 1-15
 1 1
General 12.97
1.1 General information

1.1 General information

The first section provides you with an overview of the
available cycles. The following sections describe the
general conditions that apply to all cycles regarding
• Programming the cycles and
• Operator guidance for calling the cycles

1.2 Overview of cycles

Cycles are generally applicable technology
subroutines with which you can implement specific
machining processes such as tapping a thread or
milling a pocket. These cycles are adapted to
individual tasks by defining parameters.
The system provides you with various standard
cycles for the technologies
• Drilling
• Milling
• Turning.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

1-16 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 1 1
12.97
04.00 General
1.2 Overview of cycles

1.2.1 Drilling cycles, drill pattern cycles, milling cycles and turning cycles
You can perform the following cycles with the
SINUMERIK 810D and 840D controls:

Drilling cycles
CYCLE81 Drilling, centering
CYCLE82 Drilling, counterboring
CYCLE83 Deep hole drilling
CYCLE84 Rigid tapping
CYCLE840 Tapping with compensating chuck
CYCLE85 Boring 1
CYCLE86 Boring 2
CYCLE87 Boring 3
CYCLE88 Boring 4
CYCLE89 Boring 5

Drill pattern cycles

HOLES1 Machining a row of holes
HOLES2 Machining a circle of holes

New in SW 5.3 and higher:

CYCLE801 Grid of holes

Milling cycles
LONGHOLE Milling pattern of elongated holes on a circle
SLOT1 Groove milling pattern arranged on a circle
SLOT2 Circumferential groove milling pattern
POCKET1 Rectangular pocket milling (with face cutter)
POCKET2 Circular pocket milling (with face cutter)
CYCLE90 Thread milling

New in SW 4 and higher:

POCKET3 Rectangular pocket milling (with any milling tool)
POCKET4 Circular pocket milling (with any milling tool)
CYCLE71 Face milling
CYCLE72 Contour milling

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 1-17
 1 1
General 12.97
04.00
1.2 Overview of cycles

New in SW 5.2 and higher:

CYCLE73 Pocket milling with islands
CYCLE74 Transfer of pocket edge contour
CYCLE75 Transfer of isolated contour

New in SW 5.3 and higher:

CYCLE76 Mill a rectangular spigot
CYCLE77 Mill a circular spigot

Turning cycles
CYCLE93 Groove
CYCLE94 Undercut (shape E and F according to DIN)
CYCLE95 Stock removal with relief cut
CYCLE96 Thread undercut (shapes A, B, C and D according to
DIN)
CYCLE97 Thread cutting
CYCLE98 Chaining of threads

New in SW 5.1 and higher:

CYCLE950 Extended stock removal

1.2.2 Cycle auxiliary subroutines

The following auxiliary routines are part of the cycles
package
• PITCH and
• MESSAGE.
These must always be loaded in the control.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

1-18 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 1 1
12.97 General
1.3 Programming cycles

1.3 Programming cycles

A standard cycle is defined as a subroutine with a
name and a parameter list. The conditions described
in "SINUMERIK Programming Guide Part 1:
Fundamentals" apply when calling a cycle.

The cycles are supplied on diskette or, for the

MMC102, with the corresponding software release.
They are loaded into the part program memory of
the control via the RS-232 interface (see Operator's
Guide).

1.3.1 Call and return conditions

The G functions active before the cycle is called and
Z
the programmable frame remain active beyond the
cycle. te Y
Applicate

a
din
G1
9 Or
Define the machining plane (G17, G18, G19) before
calling the cycle. A cycle operates in the current
plane with
• Abscissa (1st geometry axis)
• Ordinate (2nd geometry axis)
• Applicate (3rd geometry axis of the plane in G1
7
space).
In drilling cycles, the hole is machined in the axis G1
8
that corresponds to the applicate of the current
Ab
plane. The depth infeed is performed in this axis with sc
is sa
milling applications. X

Plane and axis assignments

Command Plane Perpendicular infeed axis

G17 X/Y Z
G18 Z/X Y
G19 Y/Z X

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 1-19
 1 1
General 12.97
05.98
1.3 Programming cycles

1.3.2 Machine data

The following machine data are used for the cycles.
The minimum values for these machine data are
given in the table below.

Relevant machine data

MD No. MD name Minimum value

18118 MM_NUM_GUD_MODULES 7
18130 MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_CHAN 10
18150 MM_GUD_VALUES_MEM 10
18170 MM_NUM_MAX_FUNC_NAMES 40
18180 MM_NUM_MAX_FUNC_PARAM 450
28020 MM_NUM_LUD_NAMES_TOTAL 200
28040 MM_NUM_LUD_VALUES_MEM 25

The machine data files are delivered with these

defaults by the machine manufacturer.
It is important to remember that a power ON must be
performed if these machine data are changed.

Axis-specific machine data MD 30200: NUM_ENCS

must also be noted with respect to cycle CYCLE840
(tapping with compensating chuck).

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

1-20 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 1 1
12.97 General
1.3 Programming cycles

1.3.3 Messages during execution of a cycle

For some cycles, messages that refer to the state of
machining are displayed on the control screen during
execution.
These messages do not interrupt program
processing and continue to be displayed on the
screen until the next message appears.
The message texts and their meanings are listed
together with the cycle to which they refer.

You will find a summary of all the relevant messages

in Appendix A of this Programming Guide.

Block display during execution of a cycle

The cycle call is displayed in the current block
display for the duration of the cycle.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 1-21
 1 1
General 12.97
1.3 Programming cycles

1.3.4 Cycle call and parameter list

The standard cycles use user-defined variables. You
can transfer the defining parameters for the cycles
via the parameter list when the cycle is called.

Cycle calls must always be programmed in a

separate block.
Basic instructions regarding assignment of
standard cycle parameters
The Programming Guide describes the parameter
list of every cycle together with the
• sequence and
• type.
The sequence of the defining parameters must be
observed.

Each defining parameter of a cycle is of a specific

data type. The parameter type in use must be
specified when the cycle is called. In the parameter
list, you can transfer
• variables or
• constants.

If variables are transferred to the parameter list, they

must first be defined as such and assigned values in
the calling program. Cycles can be called
• with an incomplete parameter list or
• by leaving out parameters.
.

If you want to exclude the last transfer parameters

that have to be written in a call, you can prematurely
terminate the parameter list with ")". If you wish to
leave out parameters in between, a comma, "...,
,..." is used as placeholder.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

1-22 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 1 1
12.97 General
1.3 Programming cycles

No plausibility checks are made of parameter values

with a discrete or limited value range unless an error
response has been specifically described for a cycle.

If the parameter list contains more entries than defined

as parameters in the cycle when the cycle is called, the
general NC alarm 12340 "Too many parameters" is
generated. The cycle is not executed in this case.

Cycle call
The various methods for writing a cycle call are shown
in the following example, CYCLE100, which requires the
following input parameters.

Example
FORM Definition of the machined shape
Values: E and F
MID Infeed depth (to be entered without a sign)
FFR Feedrate
VARI Machining type
Values: 0, 1 or 2
FAL Final machining allowance

The cycle is called with command

CYCLE100 (FORM, MID, FFR, VARI, FAL).

1. Parameter list with constant values

Rather than input individual parameters, you can
directly enter the concrete values to be used in the
cycle.

Example
CYCLE100 ("E", 5, 0.1, 1, 0) Cycle call

2. Parameter list with variables as transfer

parameters
You can transfer the parameters as arithmetic
variables that you define and assign values before
you call the cycle.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 1-23
 1 1
General 12.97
1.3 Programming cycles

Example
DEF CHAR FORM="E" Definition of a parameter, value assignment
DEF REAL MID=5, FFR, FAL Definition of parameters with or without
DEF INT VARI=1 value assignments
N10 FFR=0.1 FAL=0 Value assignments
N20 CYCLE100 (FORM, MID, FFR, -> Cycle call
-> VARI, FAL)

3. Use of predefined variables as transfer

parameters
For defining cycles with parameters you may use
variables such as R parameters.

Example
DEF CHAR FORM="E" Definition of a parameter, value
assignment
N10 R1=5 R2=0.1 R3=1 R4=0 Value assignments
N20 CYCLE100 (FORM, R1, -> Cycle call
-> R2, R3, R4)

As R parameters are predefined as real, it is

important to ensure that the type of the target
parameter in the cycle is compatible with the type
real.

More detailed information about data types and type

conversion and compatibility is given in the
Programming Guide. If the types are incompatible,
alarm
12330 "Parameter type ... incorrect" is issued.

4. Incomplete parameter list and omission of

parameters
If a defining parameter is not required for a cycle call
or it is to be assigned the value zero, it can be
omitted from the parameter list. A comma, "..., ,... "
must be written in its place to ensure the correct
assignment of the following parameters or the
parameter list must be concluded prematurely with
")".

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

1-24 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 1 1
12.97
05.98 General
1.3 Programming cycles

Example
CYCLE100 ("F", 3, 0.3, , 1) Cycle call,
omit 4th parameter (i.e. zero setting)
CYCLE100 ("F", 3, 0.3) Cycle call
the value zero is assigned to the last two
parameters (i.e. they have been left out)
5. Expressions in the parameter list
Expressions, the result of which is assigned to the
corresponding parameter in the cycle are also
permitted in the parameter list.

Example
DEF REAL MID=7, FFR=200 Definition of the parameters, value
assignments
CYCLE100 ("E", MID*0.5, FFR+100,1) Cycle call
Infeed depth 3.5, feedrate 300

1.3.5 Simulation of cycles

Programs with cycle calls can be tested initially by
the simulation function.

Function
In configurations with an MMC 100.2, the program is
executed normally in the NC and the traversing motion
is recorded on the screen during the simulation run.

In configurations with an MMC 103, the program is

simulated solely in the MMC. For this reason, it is
possible to execute cycles without tool data or without
prior selection of a tool offset in the MMC with SW 4.4
and later.
The finished contour is then traversed in the case of
cycles which have to include tool offset data in the
calculation of their traversing motion (e.g. milling
pockets and grooves, turning with recess) and a
message is output that simulation without tool is active.
This function can be used, for example, to check the
position of the pocket.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 1-25
 1 1
General 12.97
12.97
1.4 Cycle support in program editor (SW 4.3 and later)

1.4 Cycle support in program editor (SW 4.3 and later)

The program editor in the control provides you with
programming support to add cycle calls to the program
and enter parameters.

In this way, support is provided both for Siemens

cycles and user cycles.

Function
The cycle support consists of the three components:
1. Cycle selection
2. Input screen forms for parameter setting
3. Help display per cycle.

It is not absolutely necessary to create help displays

when incorporating separate cycles; then, only the input
screen forms are displayed for the cycles.

If is also possible to configure the text files of the

cycle support as language-independent. In this case,
the corresponding text files, located in the MMC, are
also required.

A detailed description of the program editor is given in

References: /BA/, "Operator's Guide"

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

1-26 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 1 1
12.97 General
1.4 Cycle support in program editor (SW 4.3 and later)

1.4.1 Overview of important files

The following files form the basis for cycle support:

Assignment File Application File type

Cycle selection cov.com Standard and user Text file
cycles
Input screen form for parameter sc.com Standard cycles Text file
setting
Input screen form for parameter uc.com User cycles Text file
setting
Help displays *.bmp Standard or user Bitmap
cycles

For MMC 100, the help displays must be converted

into another format (*.pcx) and linked to produce a
loadable file (cst.arj).

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 1-27
 1 1
General 12.97
1.4 Cycle support in program editor (SW 4.3 and later)

1.4.2 Configuring cycle selection

Function
The cycle selection is configured in the cov.com file:
• The cycle selection is assigned directly to
softkeys that are configured in the cov.com file.
• Up to three softkey levels with up to 18 softkeys
are supported; this enables the cycles to be
classified in subsets, e.g. of one technology.
• If a maximum of 6 cycles are configured on one
of the softkey levels, they all lie on a vertical
softkey tree. The 7th and 8th softkeys are
reserved for operator functions such as "Back"
or "Abort" or "Ok".
If the corresponding level contains more than 6
cycles, then the program labels the 7th softkey
with ">>" and switches the vertical softkey over
to the 2nd level.
• Only 4 softkeys are available on the first level, the
first softkey is reserved.

Example for cycle selection

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

1-28 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 1 1
12.97 General
1.4 Cycle support in program editor (SW 4.3 and later)

Programming
Syntax of the cov.com file (example)
%_N_COV_COM
;$PATH=/_N_CUS_DIR
;V04.03.01/10.09.97
S2.0.0\Turning\
S3.0.0\Drilling\
S4.0.0\Milling\
S5.0.0\Threads\
S6.0.0\Users\
S3.1.0\Deep hole %ndrilling\C3(CYCLE83) Deep hole drilling
S3.2.0\Boring\
S3.2.1\Boring%n1\C6(CYCLE85) Boring 1
...
M17

Explanation of syntax
Sx.y.z Softkey number and level, the decimal point is used to separate the three numbers
x denotes the softkey of the 1st level (2 to 18 are possible)
y denotes the softkey of the 2nd level (1 to 18 are possible).
z denotes the softkey of the 3rd level (1 to 18)
\text\ Softkey text, maximum 2 ⋅ 9 characters
The separator character is "%n"
Cxx Help display name, a "p" is added to the name of the help display file for cycle
support, e.g. Cxxp.bmp
(Name) Cycle name that is written to the program and is present in the input screen form
for parameter setting.
After the cycle name, you can write a comment separated
from the name by at least one blank.

Special points relating to MMC 102/103

If this file is language-independent, i.e. configured in
plain text, the file name must include a language code,
e.g.:
• COV_GR.COM for German,
• COV_UK.COM for English,
• COV_ES.COM for Spanish,
• COV_FR.COM for French,
• COV_IT.COM for Italian,
or other codes for different languages.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 1-29
 1 1
General 12.97
1.4 Cycle support in program editor (SW 4.3 and later)

1.4.3 Configuring input screen forms for parameter assignment

The SC.COM (Siemens cycles) and UC.COM (user
cycles) files provide the basis for configuring the
input screen form for parameter setting.
The syntax is identical for both files.

Explanation
The following is an example of the cycle header:
Name of help display
Cycle name
Comments

//C6 (CYCLE85) Boring 1

// Header detection for a cycle description

C6 Name of the help display with a p added (C1-28 Siemens Cycles)
(CYCLE85) Name of the cycle. This name is also written to the NC program.
Boring 1 Comments (is not evaluated)

Cycle parameterization
(R/0 2/1/Return plane, absolute)[return plane/RTP]
Start (
Variable type R REAL
I INTEGER
C CHARACTER
S STRING
Separator /
Value range Lower limit, blank, upper limit (e.g. 0 2)
Separator /
Default value one value (e.g. 1)
Separator /
Long text is output in the dialog line
End )
Start option [
Short text appears in the parameterization screen form
Separator /
Text in bitmap Parameter name
End option ]
Instead of limiting a value range, it is possible to define
individual values by enumeration. These are then
selected for input using the toggle button.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

1-30 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 1 1
12.97 General
1.4 Cycle support in program editor (SW 4.3 and later)

(I/* 1 2 3 4 11 12 13 14/11/Selecting the

operating mode)[Operating mode / VARI]

In order to achieve compatibility with the states of

the cycle support for interactive programming of the
MMC 102/103, only the section in round brackets is
mandatory. The section in square brackets is
optional.

Explanation
If the section in square brackets is missing, proceed
as follows:

Short text= the first 19 characters of the long text but only up to the first blank from the
right or up to the first comma from the left.
Shortened texts are marked with an asterisk " * "
Text in bitmap= is read from the Cxx.awb file

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 1-31
 1 1
General 12.97
1.4 Cycle support in program editor (SW 4.3 and later)

Programming example
Cycle support for the cycle:
corresponds to the COM files SW4 MMC100 and
cycle support ASCII Editor MMC 102/103

//C6(CYCLE85) Boring 1
(R///Retraction plane, absolute)[Retraction plane/RTP]
(R///Reference plane, absolute)[Reference plane/RFP]
(R/0 99999//Safety distance, without sign)
[safety distance/SDIS]
(R///Final drilling depth, absolute)[Final drilling depth/DP]
(R/0 99999/0/Final drilling depth relative to reference plane)[Final
drilling depth rel./,DPR]
(R/0 99999//Dwell at drilling depth)[Dwell BT/DTB]
(R/0.001 999999//Feedrate)[Feedrate/FFR]
(R/0.001 999999//Return feedrate)[Return feedrate/RFF]

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

1-32 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 1 1
12.97 General
1.4 Cycle support in program editor (SW 4.3 and later)

1.4.4 Configuring help displays

Explanation
Help displays for MMC100
If you wish to modify the standard graphics or create
additional graphics, you will need to have a graphic
program on your PC. The size of the graphic is
limited to max. 272 ⋅ 280 pixels. It is recommended
that you make all graphics the same size.

The MMC uses the PCX format of Zsoft Paintbrush

as graphic format. If you do not have a graphic
program that can create this format, you can use the
Paint Shop Pro program to convert your graphics. Example of cycle parameterization graphics

The Paint Shop Pro application is not included

on the diskette supplied by Siemens.

Help displays for MMC 102/103

The help displays of the MMC 102/103 are located in
the file system under the directory
DH\DP.DIR\HLP.DIR.
You can use the "Copy" function in the Services
menu to read data from a floppy disk. To do this,
select the destination directory via "Interactive
programming" and "DP Help".

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 1-33
 1 1
General 12.97
1.4 Cycle support in program editor (SW 4.3 and later)

1.4.5 Configuring tools (MMC 100 only)

Explanation
For MMC 100, you also require a conversion tool to
convert the file format from *.bmp to *.pcx.

These tools are located on the delivery diskette

under the path MMC 100\TOOLS.

This enables you to carry out conversion and

compression to produce a loadable file for MMC
100.

The PCX files are converted and subsequently

compressed into an archive file by means of the
tools PCX_CON.EXE and ARJ.EXE. These tool are
contained on the diskette.

The files to be converted must all reside on one

path, multiple paths are not supported.

Conversion routine call:

makepcx.bat

All parameters required have already been stored in

this file.

The conversion produces the files *.b00 and *.b01.

Prior to compression, copy both these files (*.b00
and *.b01), as well as the arj.exe tool into a path and
start the following call:

arj a cst.arj *.*

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

1-34 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 1 1
12.97 General
1.4 Cycle support in program editor (SW 4.3 and later)

1.4.6 Loading to the control

Loading to MMC 100
Precondition
The application diskette has already been installed
on your PC.

Sequence of operations
• Change to directory "INSTUTIL" in your
application path and start "APP_INST.EXE". The
selection menu for software installation is
displayed.
• Select menu option "Modify configuration". A
further selection menu appears. In this menu
select the option "Add *.* Files ...". As the file
name enter your graphics file path and file name
"CST.ARJ" in the input screen form.
• Press the Return key to confirm your input.
• Press Esc to return to the main menu where you
can transfer your software to the hardware.

Loading to MMC 102/103

Sequence of operations
The help displays for cycle support are located in the
directory
Interactive programming\DP help.

They are entered from the diskette in long format

using the operations
• "Data Management" and
• "Copy".

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 1-35
 1 1
General 12.97
05.98
1.4 Cycle support in program editor (SW 4.3 and later)

1.4.7 Independence of language

Explanation
Cycle support files can also be configured as
language-independent.

This is done by replacing all the texts in the cov.com

and sc.com files by text numbers. In addition, a text
file is also required in the control.

The aluc.txt file with text number range

85000...89899 is reserved for user cycles.

This file is named aluc_(language).com in the MMC

103 and stored in directory DA\MB.DIR (MBDDE
alarm texts) in the file system.

Example:
//C60 (DRILLING CYCLE)
(R///$85000)[$85001/PAR1]
(R///$85002 $85003)[$85002/PAR2]
...

Relevant text file:

85000 0 0 "Retraction plane as absolute value"
85001 0 0 "Retraction plane"
85002 0 0 "Drilling depth"
85003 0 0 "Relative to return plane"

Explanation of the syntax:

$ Identifier for text numbers
85000...89899 Text number for user cycles
$85000... $... Several texts are concatenated

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

1-36 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 1 1
12.97 General
1.4 Cycle support in program editor (SW 4.3 and later)

1.4.8 Operating the cycles support function

Explanation
Carry out the steps below to add a cycle call to a
program:
• Softkey "Support" in the horizontal softkey bar.
• Softkey "Cycle" (MMC 102/103 only).
• Select the cycle via the vertical softkey bar until
the corresponding input screen form appears (the
help display appears on the MMC 100 when you
press the Info key).
• Enter the parameter value.
• With the MMC 103, it is also possible to input the
name of a variable instead of a value in the
screen form; the variable name always starts with
a letter or an underscore.
• Hit "OK" to confirm (or "Abort" if the input is
incorrect).

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 1-37
 1 1
General 12.97
05.98
1.4 Cycle support in program editor (SW 4.3 and later)

1.4.9 Integrating user cycles into the MMC 103 simulation function
Explanation
If you wish to simulate user cycles in the MMC 103,
the call line for each cycle must be entered in file
dpcuscyc.com in directory DA\DP.DIR\SIM.DIR. The
call line must be entered there for each cycle.

Programming example
A user cycle named POSITION1 with 3 transfer
parameters is loaded to the control for simulation.

%_N_POSITION1_SPF
;$PATH=/_N_CUS_DIR
PROC POSITION1 (REAL XWERT, REAL YWERT, REAL ZWERT)
...
M17

The following line

PROC POSITION1 (REAL XWERT, REAL YWERT, REAL ZWERT)
must then be entered in file dpcuscyc.com.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

1-38 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 1 1
12.97
08.99 General
1.5 Cycle support in the program editor (SW 5.1 and later)

1.5 Cycle support in the program editor (SW 5.1 and later)
As from SW 5.1, the program editor offers an
extended cycle support for Siemens and user cycles.

Function
The cycle support offers the following functions:
• Cycle selection via softkeys
• Input screen forms for parameter assignment
with help displays
• Online help for each parameter (with MMC 103
only)
• Support of contour input
Retranslatable code is generated from the individual
screen forms.

1.5.1 Menus, cycle selection

Explanation
The cycle selection is carried out technology-oriented
via softkeys:

Geometry input via the geometry

Contour
processor or contour definition screen
forms.
Input screen forms for drilling cycles
Drilling
and drilling patterns.
Input screen form for milling cycles.
Milling

Input screen forms for turning cycles.

Turning

After confirming the screen form input by clicking OK,

the technology selection bar is still visible.
Similar cycles are supplied from shared screen forms.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 1-39
 1 1
General 12.97
08.99
1.5 Cycle support in the program editor (SW 5.1 and later)

Within one screen form, the user may

switch between cycles via softkey, e.g. with tapping or
undercut.

The editor cycle support also contains screen forms

that insert a multi-line DIN code in the program
instead of a cycle call, e.g. contour definition screen
forms and the input of any drilling position.

1.5.2 New functions in input screen forms

Function
• In many cycles, the processing type may be
influenced by means of the VARI parameter. It
contains several settings composing one code.
These individual settings are divided up into several
input fields in the screen forms of the new cycle
support. You can switch between the input field with
the Toggle key.
• The input screen forms are changed dynamically.
Only those input fields are displayed that are
required for the selected processing type.
Unrequired input fields are not displayed. In the
example, this is the case with the parameter for the
dressing feedrate.
• One input may therefore automatically assign
several depending parameters. This is the case with
threading which presently supports metric thread
tables. With the threading cycle CYCLE97, for
example, entering 12 in the thread size input field
(MPIT parameter) automatically assigns 1.75 to the
thread pitch input field and 1.137 to the thread depth
input field (TDEP parameter). This function is not
active if the metric thread table has not been
selected.
• If a screen form is displayed a second time, the last
entered values are assigned to all fields.
When cycles are called up several times in a row in
the same program (e.g. pocket milling when
roughing and dressing), only few parameters then
have to be changed.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

1-40 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 1 1
12.97
08.99 General
1.5 Cycle support in the program editor (SW 5.1 and later)

• In screen forms of drilling and milling cycles, certain Alter-

native
parameters may be input as absolute or incremental
values. The abbreviation ABS for absolute and INC
for incremental values is displayed behind the input
field. You may switch between them with the
"Alternative" softkey. This setting will remain with the
next call of these screen forms.

• With the MMC 103 you may display additional

information on the individual cycle parameters by
means of the online help. If the cursor is placed
i
on a parameter and the help icon is
displayed on the bottom right-hand side of the
screen, the help function can be activated.

By pressing the info key the

parameter explanation is
displayed from the Cycle
Programming Guide.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 1-41
 1 1
General 12.97
08.99
1.5 Cycle support in the program editor (SW 5.1 and later)

Operator commands in the help display

Paging Paging backward in the documentation.

backward

Paging Paging forward in the documentation.

forward

Next Enables the jump to another piece of text

entry included in the help display.

Jump to Enables the jump to a selected piece of

text.

Zoom + Zoom the text in the help window.

Zoom - Reduce the text in help window.

Abort Return to the cycle screen form.

help

Contour input support

Free contour programming

Generate
contour Starts free contour
programming for entering
assembled contour sections
(refer to References: /OG/,
Chapter 6).

Blueprint programming
Contour
1st line
Contour
2nd line
Contur
3rd line These softkeys
support blueprints that are
possible with SW 5 or
higher.
It consists of one or several straight lines with contour
transition elements in-between (radii, chamfers). Each
contour element may be preassigned by means of end
points or point and angle and supplemented by a free
DIN code.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

1-42 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 1 1
12.97
08.99 General
1.5 Cycle support in the program editor (SW 5.1 and later)

Example
The following DIN code is
created from the following
input screen form for a 2-
straight-line contour
definition
creates the following DIN
code:

X=AC(20) ANG=87.3 RND=2.5 F2000 S500 M3

X=IC(10) Y=IC(-20)

Drilling support
The drilling support includes a selection of drilling
cycles and drilling patterns.
Center
drilling

Deep hole
drilling

Drilling out

Thread
holing
Selection of drilling
patterns
Drilling
pattern pos.

Modal
deselection

Drilling patterns may be repeated if, for example,

drilling and tapping are to be executed in
succession. Thus, a name is assigned to the drilling
pattern which will later be entered in the screen form
"Repeat position".

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 1-43
 1 1
General 12.97
1.5 Cycle support in the program editor (SW 5.1 and later)

Programming example generated by cycle

support
N100 G17 G0 G90 Z20 F2000 S500 M3 Main block
N110 T7 M6 Change drilling machine
N120 G0 G90 X50 Y50 Initial drilling position
N130 MCALL CYCLE82(10,0,2,0,30,5) Modal drilling cycle call
N140 Circle of holes 1: Marker – Name of drilling pattern
N150 HOLES2(50,50,37,20,20,9) Call drilling pattern cycle
N160 ENDLABEL:
N170 MCALL Deselect modal call
N180 T8 M6 Change tap
N190 S400 M3
N200 MCALL Modal call of tapping cycle
CYCLE84(10,0,2,0,30,,3,5,0.8,180,300,500)
N210 REPEAT Circle of holes 1 Repeat drilling pattern
N220 MCALL Deselect modal call

Moreover, any drilling position

may be entered as repeatable
drilling pattern by means of
screen forms.

Thus, up to five positions may be programmed in the

plane, all values either absolute or incremental
(alternate with "Alternat." softkey). The "Delete all"
softkey creates an empty screen form.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

1-44 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 1 1
12.97
09.01 General
1.5 Cycle support in the program editor (SW 5.1 and later)

Milling support
The milling support includes the following selection possibilities:

Face Thread
milling milling

Path Schwenk-
milling Zyklen

Standard
pockets

Slots

Spigots

>> <<

The "Standard pockets" and

"Slots" softkeys each branch
into submenus offering a
selection of pocket and
groove milling cycles.

Turning support
The turning support includes the following selection possibilities:
Cutting

Thread

Groove

Undercut

The undercut cycles for the

E and F forms (CYCLE94)
as well as for the thread
undercuts of
the A to D forms (CYCLE96)
are all stored under the
"Undercut" softkey.

The "Thread" softkey contains a submenu for selecting

between single thread cutting or thread chaining.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 1-45
 1 1
General 12.97
08.99
1.5 Cycle support in the program editor (SW 5.1 and later)

Retranslation
The retranslation of program codes serves to change
an existing program with the help of the cycle support.
The cursor is set to the line to be changed and the
"Retranslation" softkey is pressed.

Thus, the corresponding input screen form which

created the program piece is reopened and values may
be modified.

Directly entering modifications in the created DIN code

may result in the fact that retranslation is no longer
possible. Therefore, consistent use of the cycle support
is required and modifications are to be carried out with
the help of retranslation.

Configuring support for user cycles

References: /IAM/, MMC Installation

Instructions
BE1 "Expand the Operator Interface"

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

1-46 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 2 2
03.96
09.01 Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns

Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns

2.1 Drilling cycles...................................................................................................................2-48

2.1.1 Preconditions ...................................................................................................................2-50
2.1.2 Drilling, centering – CYCLE81 ...................................................................................2-52
2.1.3 Drilling, counterboring – CYCLE82............................................................................2-55
2.1.4 Deep-hole drilling – CYCLE83...................................................................................2-57
2.1.5 Rigid tapping – CYCLE84..........................................................................................2-65
2.1.6 Tapping with compensating chuck – CYCLE840 ......................................................2-71
2.1.7 Boring 1 – CYCLE85 .................................................................................................2-79
2.1.8 Boring 2 – CYCLE86 .................................................................................................2-82
2.1.9 Boring 3 – CYCLE87 .................................................................................................2-86
2.1.10 Boring 4 – CYCLE88 .................................................................................................2-89
2.1.11 Boring 5 – CYCLE89 .................................................................................................2-91

2.2 Modal call of drilling cycles ..............................................................................................2-93

2.3 Drill pattern cycles ...........................................................................................................2-96

2.3.1 Preconditions.............................................................................................................2-96
2.3.2 Row of holes – HOLES1............................................................................................2-97
2.3.3 Hole circle – HOLES2..............................................................................................2-101
2.3.4 Dot matrix – CYCLE801 (SW 5.3 and later)............................................................2-104

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 2-47
 2 2
Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns 03.96
2.1 Drilling cycles

2.1 Drilling cycles

The following sections describe how
• drilling cycles and
• drilling pattern cycles
are programmed.
These Sections are intended to guide you in
selecting cycles and assigning them with
parameters. In addition to a detailed description of
the function of the individual cycles and the
corresponding parameters, you will also find a
programming example at the end of each section to
familiarize you with the use of cycles.

The sections are structured as follows:

• Programming
• Parameters
• Function
• Sequence of operations
• Explanation of parameters
• Additional notes
• Sample program
"Programming" and "Parameters" explain the use of
cycles sufficiently for the experienced user, whereas
beginners can find all the information they need for
programming cycles under "Function", "Sequence of
operations", "Explanation of parameters", "Additional
notes" and the "Programming example".

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

2-48 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 2 2
03.96 Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

Drilling cycles are motion sequences defined according

to DIN 66025 for drilling, boring, tapping, etc.
They are called in the form of a subroutine with a
defined name and a parameter list.

Five cycles are available for boring. They all follow a

different technological procedure and are therefore
parameterized differently:

Boring cycle Special parameterization features

Boring 1 - CYCLE85 Different feedrates for boring and

retraction
Boring 2 - CYCLE86 Oriented spindle stop, definition of retraction
path, retraction in rapid traverse, definition of
spindle direction of rotation
Boring 3 - CYCLE87 Spindle stop M5 and program stop M0 at
drilling depth, continued machining after NC
Start, retraction in rapid traverse, definition
of spindle direction of rotation
Boring 4 - CYCLE88 As for CYCLE87 plus dwell time at drilling
depth
Boring 5 - CYCLE89 Boring and retraction at the same
feedrate

Drilling cycles can be modal, i.e. they are executed

at the end of each block that contains motion
commands. Other cycles written by the user can
also be called modally (see Section 2.2).

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 2-49
 2 2
Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns 03.96
2.1 Drilling cycles

There are two types of parameter:

• Geometrical parameters and Geometrical parameters
• Machining parameters
Geometrical parameters are identical for all drilling
cycles, drilling pattern cycles and milling cycles.
Retraction plane
They define the reference and retraction planes, the
Safety clearance
safety distance and the absolute and relative final Reference plane
drilling depths. Geometrical parameters are written
once in the first drilling cycle CYCLE81.
The machining parameters have a different meaning
and effect in each cycle. They are therefore written
in each cycle. Final drilling
depth

2.1.1 Preconditions
Call and return conditions
Drilling cycles are programmed independently of the
actual axis names. The drilling position must be
approached in the higher-level program before the
cycle is called.
The required values for the feedrate, spindle speed
and spindle direction of rotation must be
programmed in the part program if there are no
assignment parameters for these values in the
drilling cycle.
The G function and current frame active before the
cycle was called remain active beyond the cycle.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

2-50 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 2 2
03.96 Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

Plane definition
In the case of drilling cycles, it is generally assumed
that the current workpiece coordinate system in
which the machining operation is to be performed is

compensation
Tool length
Applicate
defined by selecting plane G17, G18 or G19 and
activating a programmable frame. The drilling axis is
always the applicate of this coordinate system.
A tool length compensation must be selected before
the cycle is called. Its effect is always perpendicular
to the selected plane and remains active even after
the end of the cycle (see also Programming Guide).

Spindle programming
The drilling cycles are written in such a way that the
spindle commands always refer to the master
spindle control. If you want to use a drilling cycle on
a machine with several spindles, you must first
define the spindle that is to be used for the operation
as the master spindle (see also Programming
Guide).

Dwell time programming

The parameters for the dwell times in the drilling
cycles are always assigned to the F word and must
therefore be assigned with values in seconds. Any
deviations from this procedure must be expressly
stated.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 2-51
 2 2
Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns 03.96
2.1 Drilling cycles

2.1.2 Drilling, centering – CYCLE81

Programming
CYCLE81 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR)

RTP Real Retraction plane (absolute)

RFP Real Reference plane (absolute)
SDIS Real Safety distance (enter without sign)
DP Real Final drilling depth (absolute)
DPR Real Final drilling depth relative to reference plane (enter without sign)

Function Z

The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and

feedrate to the programmed final drilling depth.

Sequence of operations
Position reached prior to cycle start:
The drilling position is the position in the two axes of
the selected plane.

The cycle implements the following motion

sequence:
Approach of the reference plane brought forward by
the safety distance with G0
• Traverse to final drilling depth with the feedrate
(G1) programmed in the calling program
• Retraction to retraction plane with G0

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

2-52 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 2 2
03.96 Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

Description of parameters
Z
G1
RFP and RTP (reference plane and retraction plane)
G0
Generally, the reference plane (RFP) and the
retraction plane (RTP) have different values. In the
cycle it is assumed that the retraction plane lies in
front of the reference plane. The distance between RTP
the retraction plane and the final drilling depth is
RFP+SDIS
therefore greater than the distance between the RFP
X
reference plane and the final drilling depth.

SDIS (Safety distance)

The safety distance (SDIS) is effective with regard to
DP=RFP-DPR
the reference plane which is brought forward by the
safety distance. The direction in which the safety
distance is active is automatically determined by the
cycle.

DP and DPR (final drilling depth)

The final drilling depth can be defined as either
absolute (DP) or relative (DPR) to the reference
plane.
If it is entered as a relative value, the cycle
automatically calculates the correct depth on the
basis of the positions of the reference and retraction
planes.

Further notes
If a value is entered both for the DP and the DPR,
the final drilling depth is derived from the DPR. If the
DPR deviates from the absolute depth programmed
via the DP, the message "Depth: Corresponds to
value for relative depth" is output in the dialog line.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 2-53
 2 2
Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns 03.96
08.97
2.1 Drilling cycles

If the values for the reference plane and the

retraction plane are identical, a relative depth must
not be programmed. The error message
61101 "Reference plane incorrectly defined" is
output and the cycle is not executed. This error
message is also output if the retraction plane lies
behind the reference plane, i.e. the distance to the
final drilling depth is smaller.

Programming example
Drilling_centering Y Y A-B
You can use this program to make 3 holes using the
A
drilling cycle CYCLE81, whereby this cycle is called
with different parameter settings. The drilling axis is
120
always the Z axis.

30

0
B X Z

40 90 35 100 108

N10 G0 G90 F200 S300 M3 Specification of technology values

N20 D3 T3 Z110 Traverse to retraction plane
N30 X40 Y120 Traverse to first drilling position
N40 CYCLE81 (110, 100, 2, 35) Cycle call with absolute final drilling
depth, safety distance and incomplete
parameter list
N50 Y30 Traverse to next drilling position
N60 CYCLE81 (110, 102, , 35) Cycle call without safety distance
N70 G0 G90 F180 S300 M03 Specification of technology values
N80 X90 Approach next position
N90 CYCLE81 (110, 100, 2, , 65) Cycle call with relative final drilling depth
and safety distance
N100 M30 End of program

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

2-54 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 2 2
03.96 Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

2.1.3 Drilling, counterboring – CYCLE82

Programming
CYCLE82 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR, DTB)

Parameter

RTP real Retraction plane (absolute)

RFP real Reference plane (absolute)
SDIS real Safety distance (enter without sign)
DP real Final drilling depth (absolute)
DPR real Final drilling depth relative to reference plane (enter without sign)
DTB real Dwell time at final drilling depth (chip breaking)

Function
The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and
feedrate to the programmed final drilling depth. A
dwell time can be allowed to elapse when the final
drilling depth has been reached.

Sequence of operations Z

Position reached prior to cycle start:

The drilling position is the position in the two axes of
the selected plane.

The cycle implements the following motion

sequence:
• Approach of the reference plane brought forward X
by the safety distance with G0
• Traverse to final drilling depth with the feedrate
(G1) programmed in the calling program
• Dwell time at final drilling depth
• Retraction to retraction plane with G0

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 2-55
 2 2
Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns 03.96
08.97
2.1 Drilling cycles

Description of parameters
Z
G0
See Subsection 2.1.2. (Drilling, Centering – G1

CYCLE81) G4

for a description of parameters RTP, RFP, SDIS,

DP, DPR
RTP

DTB (dwell time) RFP+SDIS

RFP
Parameter DTB is the dwell time at the final drilling X
DP=RFP-DPR
depth (chip breaking) in seconds.

Programming example
Boring_counterboring Y Y A-B
This program machines a single hole to a depth of
27 mm at position X24, Y15 in the XY plane with
cycle CYCLE82.
The dwell time programmed is 2 s, the safety
distance in the drilling axis Z is 4 mm. A

B
15

24 X 75 Z
102

N10 G0 G90 F200 S300 M3 Specification of technology values

N20 D3 T3 Z110 Traverse to retraction plane
N30 X24 Y15 Traverse to drilling position
N40 CYCLE82 (110, 102, 4, 75, , 2) Cycle call with absolute final drilling depth
and safety distance
N50 M30 End of program

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

2-56 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 2 2
03.96
04.00 Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

2.1.4 Deep-hole drilling – CYCLE83

Programming
CYCLE83 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR, FDEP, FDPR, DAM, DTB, DTS, FRF, VARI,
_AXN, _MDEP, _VRT, _DTD, _DIS1)

Parameter

RTP real Retraction plane (absolute)

RFP real Reference plane (absolute)
SDIS real Safety distance (enter without sign)
DP real Final drilling depth (absolute)
DPR real Final drilling depth relative to reference plane (enter without sign)
FDEP real First drilling depth (absolute)
FDPR real First drilling depth relative to reference plane (enter without sign)
DAM real Degression: (enter without sign)
Values: > 0 degression as value
< 0 degression factor
= 0 no degression
DTB real Dwell time at drilling depth (chip breaking)
Values: > 0 in seconds
< 0 in revolutions
DTS real Dwell time at starting point and for swarf removal
Values: > 0 in seconds
< 0 in revolutions
FRF real Feedrate factor for first drilling depth (enter without sign)
Value range: 0.001 ... 1
VARI int Type of machining
Values: 0 chip breaking
1 swarf removal
_AXN int Tool axis:
Values: 1 = 1st geometry axis
2 = 2nd geometry axis
or else 3rd geometry axis
_MDEP real Minimum drilling depth
_VRT real Variable retraction distance for chip breaking (VARI=0):
Values: > 0 is retraction distance
0 = setting is 1 mm

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 2-57
 2 2
Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns 03.96
04.00
2.1 Drilling cycles

_DTD real Dwell time at final drilling depth

Values: > 0 in seconds
< 0 in revolutions
= 0 value as for DTB
_DIS1 real Programmable limit distance on re-insertion in hole (VARI=1 for swarf
removal)
Values: > 0 programmable value applies
= 0 automatic calculation

Function
The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and
feedrate to the programmed final drilling depth.
Deep hole drilling is performed with a depth infeed of a
maximum definable depth executed several times,
increasing gradually until the final drilling depth is
reached.
The drill can either be retracted to the reference
plane+safety distance after every infeed depth for swarf
removal or retracted in each case by 1 mm for chip
breaking.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

2-58 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 2 2
03.96
04.00 Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

Sequence of operations
Position reached prior to cycle start:
The drilling position is the position in the two axes of
the selected plane.

The cycle implements the following motion

sequence: Z

Deep hole drilling with swarf removal (VARI=1):

• Approach of the reference plane brought forward
by the safety distance with G0
• Traverse to the first drilling depth with G1, the
feedrate for which is derived from the feedrate
defined with the program call which is subject to X
parameter FRF (feedrate factor)
• Dwell time at final drilling depth (parameter DTB)
• Retraction to the reference plane brought forward
by the safety distance with G0 for swarf removal
• Dwell time at starting point (parameter DTS)
• Approach last drilling depth reached, reduced by
the calculated (by cycle) or programmable limit
distance with G0
Z
• Traverse to next drilling depth with G1 (sequence
of motions is continued until the final drilling G1
depth is reached) G0
G4
• Retraction to retraction plane with G0

RTP
RFP+SDIS
RFP
X
FDEP

FDEP

DP = RFP-DPR

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 2-59
 2 2
Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns 03.96
04.00
2.1 Drilling cycles

Deep hole drilling with chip breaking (VARI=0):

• Approach of the reference plane brought forward Z
by the safety distance with G0
G1
• Traverse to the first drilling depth with G1, the G0
feedrate for which is derived from the feedrate G4
defined with the program call which is subject to
parameter FRF (feedrate factor)
RTP
• Dwell time at final drilling depth (parameter DTB) RFP+SDIS
• Retraction by 1 mm from the current drilling depth X
RFP

with G1 and the feedrate programmed in the

FDEP
calling program (for chip breaking)
• Traverse to next drilling depth with G1 and the
DP = RFP-DPR
programmed feedrate (sequence of motions is
continued until the final drilling depth is reached)
• Retraction to retraction plane with G0

Description of parameters

See Subsection 2.1.2. (Drilling, Centering –

CYCLE81) for a description of parameters RTP,
RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR

FDEP and DAM (final drilling depth_1, abs and

degression value)
DAM=0 no degression
DAM>0 degression as value
The current depth is derived in the cycle as follows:
• In the first step, the depth parameterized with the
first drilling depth is traversed as long as it does not
exceed the total drilling depth.
• From the second drilling depth on, the drilling stroke
is obtained by subtracting the amount of degression
from the stroke of the last drilling depth, provided
that the latter is greater than the programmed
amount of degression.
• The next drilling strokes correspond to the amount of
degression, as long as the remaining depth is
greater than twice the amount of degression.
• The last two drilling strokes are divided equally and
traversed and are therefore always greater than half
of the amount of degression.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

2-60 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 2 2
03.96
04.00 Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

• If the value for the first drilling depth is

incompatible with the total depth, the error
message 61107 "First drilling depth incorrectly
defined" is output and the cycle is not executed.

DAM<0 (-0.001 to -1) degression factor

The current depth is derived in the cycle as follows:
• In the first step, the depth parameterized with the
first drilling depth is traversed as long as it does not
exceed the total drilling depth.
• From the second drilling depth on, the drilling stroke is
obtained from the stroke of the last drilling depth
minus the last drilling depth multiplied by the
degression factor, provided that the drilling stroke is
greater than the minimum drilling depth (MDEP).
• The next drilling strokes are calculated from the
last drilling stroke multiplied by the degression
factor for as long as the stroke remains larger or
equal to the minimum drilling depth.
• The last two drilling strokes are divided equally and
traversed and are therefore always greater than
half of the amount of degression.
• If the value for the first drilling depth is opposed to the
total depth, error message 61107 "First drilling depth
incorrectly defined" is generated and the cycle not
executed.

FDPR (final drilling depth_1)

The parameter FDPR has the same effect in the cycle as
parameter DPR. If the values for the reference and
retraction plane are identical, the first drilling depth can
be defined as a relative value.

DTB (dwell time)

The dwell time at final drilling depth (chip breaking) is
programmed in DTB in seconds or revolutions of the
main spindle.
Ø 0 in seconds
< 0 in revolutions

DTS (dwell time)

Ø The dwell time at the starting point is only
performed if VARI=1 (swarf removal).
Value > 0 in seconds
Value < 0 in revolutions

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 2-61
 2 2
Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns 03.96
04.00
2.1 Drilling cycles

FRF (feedrate factor)

With this parameter you can enter a reduction factor for
the active feedrate which only applies to the approach
to the first drilling depth in the cycle.

VARI (machining mode)

If parameter VARI=0 is set, the drill retracts 1mm after
reaching each drilling depth for chip breaking. When
VARI=1 (for swarf removal), the drill traverses in each
case to the reference plane moved forward by the
safety distance.

_AXN (tool axis)

By programming the drilling axis via _AXN, it is possible
to omit the switchover from plane G18 to G17 when the
deep hole drilling cycle is used on turning machines.

_MDEP (minimum drilling depth)

You can define a minimum drilling depth for drill stroke
calculations based on degression factor. If the
calculated drilling stroke becomes shorter than the
minimum drilling depth, the remaining depth is
machined in strokes equaling the length of the minimum
drilling depth.

_VRT (variable retraction value for

chip breaking with VARI=0)
You can program the retraction path for chip
breaking in seconds or revolutions.
Value > 0 retraction value
Value = 0 retraction value 1mm

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

2-62 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 2 2
03.96
04.00 Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

_DTD (dwell time at final drilling depth)

The dwell time at final drilling depth can be entered in
seconds or revolutions.
Value > 0 in seconds
Value < 0 in revolutions
Value = 0 dwell time as programmed in DTB

_DIS1 (programmable limit distance when

VARI=1)
The limit distance after re-insertion in the hole can
be programmed.
Value > 0 position at programmed value
Value = 0 automatic calculation

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 2-63
 2 2
Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns 03.96
04.00
2.1 Drilling cycles

Programming example
Deep hole drilling Y Y A-B
This program executes the cycle CYCLE83 at positions
X80 Y120 and X80 Y60 in the XY plane. The first hole is A
drilled with a dwell time zero and machining type chip
breaking.
The final drilling depth and the first drilling depth are

120
entered as absolute values. In the second cycle call, a B

60
dwell time of 1s is programmed. Machining type swarf
removal is selected, the final drilling depth is relative to
80 X 5 Z
the reference plane. The drilling axis in both cases is
the Z axis. 150
The drilling stroke is calculated on the basis of a
degression factor and must not become shorter than
the minimum drilling depth of 8mm.

DEF REAL RTP=155, RFP=150, SDIS=1, Definition of parameters

DP=5, DPR=145, FDEP=100, FDPR=50,
DAM=20, DTB=1, FRF=1, VARI=0,
_VRT=0.8, _MDEP=10, _DIS1=0.4
N10 G0 G17 G90 F50 S500 M4 Specification of technology values
N20 D1 T42 Z155 Traverse to retraction plane
N30 X80 Y120 Traverse to first drilling position
N40 CYCLE83 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, ,-> Cycle call, depth parameter with absolute
-> FDEP, , DAM, , , FRF, VARI, , , _VRT) values
N50 X80 Y60 Traverse to next drilling position
N55 DAM=-0.6 FRF=0.5 VARI=1 Assignment of value
N60 CYCLE83 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, , DPR, , -> Cycle call with relative data for final
-> FDPR, DAM, DTB, , FRF, VARI, , _MDEP, drilling depth and 1st final drilling depth;
-> , , _DIS1) the safety distance is 1mm; the feedrate
is 0.5
N70 M30 End of program

-> Must be programmed in a single block

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

2-64 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 2 2
03.96
09.01 Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

2.1.5 Rigid tapping – CYCLE84

Programming
CYCLE84 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR, DTB, SDAC, MPIT, PIT, POSS, SST, SST1,
_AXN, _PTAB, _TECHNO, _VARI, _DAM, _VRT)

Parameter

RTP real Retraction plane (absolute)

RFP real Reference plane (absolute)
SDIS real Safety distance (enter without sign)
DP real Final drilling depth (absolute)
DPR real Final drilling depth relative to reference plane (enter without sign)
DTB real Dwell time at thread depth (chip breaking)
SDAC int Direction of rotation after end of cycle
Values: 3, 4 or 5
MPIT real Pitch as thread size (with sign)
Value range: 3 (for M3) ... 48 (for M48), the sign determines the
direction of rotation in the thread
PIT real Pitch as value (with sign)
Value range: 0.001 ... 2000.000mm), the sign determines the direction
of rotation in the thread
SW 6.2 or higher:
If _PTAB=0 or 1: in mm (as earlier SW versions)
If _PTAB=2 in thread starts per inch
POSS real Spindle position for oriented spindle stop in the cycle (in degrees)
SST real Speed for tapping
SST1 real Speed for retraction
_AXN int Tool axis
(SW 6.2 or Values: 1 = 1st geometry axis
higher) 2 = 2nd geometry axis
or else 3rd geometry axis
_PTAB int Evaluation of thread pitch PIT
(SW 6.2 or Values: 0...according to programmed system of units inch/metric
higher) 1...pitch in mm
2...pitch in thread starts per inch
3...pitch in inches/revolution

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 2-65
 2 2
Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns 03.96
09.01
2.1 Drilling cycles

_TECHNO int Technological settings

(SW 6.2 or UNITS DIGIT: Exact stop behavior
higher) Values: 0...and as programmed before cycle call
1...(G601)
2...(G602)
3...(G603)
TENS DIGIT: Feedforward control
Values: 0...and as programmed before cycle call
1...with feedforward control (FFWON)
2...without feedforward control (FFWOF)
HUNDREDS DIGIT: Acceleration
Values: 0...and as programmed before cycle call
1...soft acceleration of axes (SOFT)
2...brisk acceleration of axes (BRISK)
3...reduced acceleration of axes (DRIVE)
THOUSANDS DIGIT:
Values: 0...activate spindle mode again (with MCALL)
1...stay in position-control mode (with MCALL)
_VARI int Type of machining
(SW 6.2 or Values: 0...tapping in one pass
higher) 1...deep hole tapping with chip breakage
2...deep hole tapping with stock removal
_DAM real Incremental drilling depth
(SW 6.2 or Value range: 0 <= max. value
higher)
_VRT real Variable retraction distance for chip breakage
(SW 6.2 or Value range: 0 <= max. value
higher)

Function
The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and
feedrate to the programmed thread depth. With
cycle CYCLE84 you can perform rigid tapping
operations. SW 6.2 or higher onwards, the cycle is
also capable of performing tapping operations in
several stages (deep hole drilling).
Cycle CYCLE84 can be used if the spindle to be used
for the boring operation is technically able to go into
position-controlled spindle operation.

A separate cycle CYCLE840 exists for tapping with

compensating chuck (see Subsection 2.1.6).

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

2-66 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 2 2
03.96
08.97 Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

Sequence of operations
Z
Position reached prior to cycle start:
The drilling position is the position in the two axes of
the selected plane.

The cycle implements the following motion

sequence:
• Approach of the reference plane brought forward
X
by the safety distance with G0
• Oriented spindle stop with SPOS (value in
parameter POSS) and conversion of spindle to
axis mode
• Tapping to final drilling depth with G331 and
speed SST
• Dwell time at thread depth (parameter DTB)
• Retraction to the reference plane brought forward
by the safety distance with G332, spindle speed
SST1 and reversal of direction of rotation
• Retraction to the retraction plane with G0, spindle
mode is reintroduced by reprogramming the
spindle speed active before the cycle was called
and the direction of rotation programmed under
SDAC.

Description of parameters
SDAC
Z
G0
See Subsection 2.1.2. (Drilling, Centering – G331
CYCLE81) for a description of parameters RTP, G332
RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR G4

DTB (dwell time) RTP

You program the dwell time in seconds. It is RFP+SDIS
recommended that the dwell time is omitted for the RFP
X
tapping of blind holes.

SDAC (direction of rotation after end of cycle)

Under SDAC you program the direction of rotation DP=RFP-DPR
after completion of the cycle. For tapping, the
direction is changed automatically by the cycle.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 2-67
 2 2
Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns 03.96
09.01
2.1 Drilling cycles

MPIT and PIT (as thread size and as value)

The value for the thread pitch can either be defined as
the thread size (for metric threads between M3 and M48
only) or as a value (distance from one thread turn to the
next as a numerical value). The parameter not required
in each case is omitted from the call or assigned the
value zero.

Right or left threads are specified by the sign of the

pitch parameter:
• Positive value → right (like M3)
• Negative value → left (like M4)

If the two thread pitch parameters have conflicting

values, alarm 61001 "Thread pitch wrong" is
generated by the cycle and cycle execution is
aborted.

POSS (spindle position)

Before tapping starts in the cycle, oriented spindle stop
is performed with command SPOS and the spindle is
brought into position control.
You program the spindle position for this spindle stop
under POSS.

SST (speed)
Parameter SST contains the spindle speed for the
tapping block with G331.

SST1 (retraction speed)

Under SST1 you program the speed for the retraction
out of the thread hole in the hole with G332. If this
parameter is assigned the value zero, the retraction
movement is performed with the speed programmed
under SST.

_AXN (tool axis)

By programming the drilling axis via _AXN, it is possible
to omit the switchover from plane G18 to G17 when the
deep hole tapping cycle is used on turning machines.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

2-68 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 2 2
03.96
09.01 Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

_PTAB (evaluation of thread pitch PIT)

Parameter _PTAB determines the unit of measurement of the thread
pitch.
• 0=according to programmed system of units inch/metric
• 1=pitch in mm
• 2=pitch in thread starts per inch
• 3=pitch in inches/revolution
This parameter is needed in connection with the option for selecting
different thread tables in the cycles support.

_TECHNO (technological settings)

Parameter _TECHNO can be set to select technological
characteristics for tapping operations.

Possible values are:

Ones digit (exact stop behavior):
• 0=as programmed before cycle call
• 1=(G601)
• 2=(G602)
• 3=(G603)
Tens digit (feedforward control):
• 0=as programmed before cycle call
• 1=with feedforward control (FFWON)
• 2=without feedforward control (FFWOF)
Hundreds digit (acceleration):
• 0=as programmed before cycle call
• 1=soft acceleration of axes (SOFT)
• 2=brisk acceleration of axes (BRISK)
• 3=reduced acceleration of axes (DRIVE)
Thousands digit:
• 0=activate spindle mode again (with MCALL)
• 1=stay in position-control mode (with MCALL)

Deep hole tapping _VARI, _DAM, _VRT

Parameter _VARI can be set to select between simple
tapping (_VARI = 0) and deep hole tapping (_VARI ≠ 0).
In conjunction with deep hole tapping, it is possible to
choose between chip breakage (retraction by variable
distance from current drilling depth, parameter _VRT,
_VARI = 1) and stock removal (withdrawal from
reference plane _VARI = 2). These functions work
analogously to the normal deep hole drilling cycle
CYCLE83.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 2-69
 2 2
Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns 03.96
09.01
2.1 Drilling cycles

The incremental drilling depth for one pass is

specified via parameter _DAM. The cycle internally
calculates the intermediate depth as follows:
• The programmed incremental depth is drilled in each
pass until the remaining distance to the final drilling
depth is < than 2 * _DAM
• The remaining depth is halved and drilled in 2
passes, thereby ensuring that the minimum
drilling depth is not less than _DAM/2.

Further notes
The direction of rotation is always reversed
automatically for tapping in cycle.

Programming example
Rigid tapping Y Y A-B
A thread is tapped without a compensating chuck at
position X30 and Y35 in the XY plane, the tapping
axis is the Z axis. No dwell time is programmed. The
depth is programmed as a relative value. The A

parameters for the direction of rotation and the pitch

must be assigned values. A metric thread M5 is
B
35

tapped.

30 X Z
6
36

N10 G0 G90 T4 D4 Specification of technology values

N20 G17 X30 Y35 Z40 Traverse to drilling position
N30 CYCLE84 (40, 36, 2, , 30, , 3, 5, -> Cycle call, parameter PIT has been
->, 90, 200, 500) omitted, no value is entered for the
absolute depth or the dwell time. Spindle
stop at 90 degrees, speed for tapping is
200, speed for retraction is 500
N40 M30 End of program
->Must be programmed in a single block

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

2-70 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 2 2
03.96
09.01 Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

2.1.6 Tapping with compensating chuck – CYCLE840

Programming
CYCLE840 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR, DTB, SDR, SDAC, ENC, MPIT, PIT- AXN,
_PTAB, _TECHNO)

Parameter

RTP real Retraction plane (absolute)

RFP real Reference plane (absolute)
SDIS real Safety distance (enter without sign)
DP real Final drilling depth (absolute)
DPR real Final drilling depth relative to reference plane (enter without sign)
DTB real Dwell time at thread depth
SW 6.2 or higher: Always operative now if >0 is programmed
Value range: 0<=DTB
SDR int Direction of rotation for retraction
Values: 0 (automatic reversal of direction of rotation)
3 or 4 (for M3 or M4)
SDAC int Direction of rotation after end of cycle
Values: 3, 4 or 5 (for M3, M4 or M5)
ENC int Tapping with/without encoder
Values: 0 = with encoder, without dwell time
1 = without encoder, first programs the cycle, then the feed
11 = without encoder, calculates the feed in the cycle
20 = with encoder, with dwell time
(all SW 6.2 or higher)
MPIT real Thread pitch as thread size
Value range: 3 (for M3) ... 48 (for M48)
PIT real Thread pitch as value
Value range: 0.001 ... 2000.000mm SW 6.2 or higher:
If _PTAB=0 or 1: in mm (as earlier SW versions)
If _PTAB=2 in thread starts per inch
_AXN int Tool axis:
(SW 6.2 or Values: 1 = 1st geometry axis
higher) 2 = 2nd geometry axis
or else 3rd geometry axis

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 2-71
 2 2
Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns 03.96
09.01
09.01
2.1 Drilling cycles

_PTAB int Evaluation of thread pitch PIT

(SW 6.2 or Values: 0...according to programmed system of units inch/metric
higher) 1...pitch in mm
2...pitch in thread starts per inch
3...pitch in inches/revolution
_TECHNO int Technological settings
(SW 6.2 or UNITS DIGIT: Exact stop behavior
higher) Values: 0...and as programmed before cycle call
1...(G601)
2...(G602)
3...(G603)
TENS DIGIT: Feedforward control
Values: 0...and as programmed before cycle call
1...with feedforward control (FFWON)
2...without feedforward control (FFWOF)
HUNDREDS DIGIT: Brake application point
Values: 0...without calculation
1...with calculation

Function
The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and
feedrate to the programmed thread depth.
With this cycle, tapping with compensating chuck
can be performed
• without encoder and
• with encoder.
.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

2-72 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 2 2
03.96
10.00 Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

Sequence of operations

Tapping with compensating chuck without SDAC

encoder (ENC=1) Z G0
G63
Position reached prior to cycle start:
The drilling position is the position in the two axes of
the selected plane.
RTP
RFP+SDIS
The cycle implements the following motion RFP
X
sequence:
• Approach of the reference plane brought forward
by the safety distance with G0
• Tapping to the final drilling depth with G63 DP=RFP-DPR

• Retraction to the reference plane brought forward SDR

by the safety distance with G63
• Retraction to retraction plane with G0

The spindle override must be set to 100%.

Tapping with compensating chuck without SDAC

encoder with encoder (ENC=0) Z G0
G33
Position reached prior to cycle start: G4

The drilling position is the position in the two axes of

the selected plane.
RTP
RFP+SDIS
The cycle implements the following motion RFP
X
sequence:
• Approach of the reference plane brought forward
by the safety distance with G0
DP=RFP-DPR
• Tapping to the final drilling depth with G33
• Dwell time at thread depth (parameter DTB) SDR
• Retraction to the reference plane brought forward
by the safety distance with G33
• Retraction to retraction plane with G0

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 2-73
 2 2
Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns 03.96
09.01
2.1 Drilling cycles

Description of parameters

See Subsection 2.1.2. (Drilling, Centering –

CYCLE81) for a description of parameters RTP,
RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR

DTB (dwell time)

You program the dwell time in seconds. It works in
parameter ENC depending on which technological
variant you selected.

SDR (direction of rotation for retraction)

SDR=0 must be set if the spindle direction is to reverse
automatically.
If the machine data are defined so that no encoder is
set (machine data NUM_ENCS then has the value 0),
the parameter must be assigned the value 3 or 4 for the
direction of rotation, otherwise alarm
61202 "No spindle direction programmed" is issued
and the cycle is aborted.

SDAC (direction of rotation)

As the cycle can also be called modally (see Section
2.2), it requires a direction of rotation for tapping further
threads. This is programmed in parameter SDAC and
corresponds to the direction of rotation programmed
before the first call in the higher-level program. If
SDR=0, the value assigned to SDAC is of no
significance in the cycle and can be omitted from the
parameterization.

ENC (tapping)
If tapping is to be performed without encoder although
an encoder exists, parameter ENC must be assigned
the value 1.
However, if no encoder exists and the parameter is
assigned the value 0, it is ignored in the cycle.
• Tapping without encoder with input of the lead (SW 6.2 or higher):
From SW 6.2 you can calculate the correlation
between feed and speed via the programmed lead
within the cycle for tapping without encoder (G63
thread). The speed must be programmed before the
cycle is called.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

2-74 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 2 2
03.96
09.01 Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

You can specify the lead either via MPIT (metric

thread unit) or via PIT (thread lead as value) just as
for tapping without encoder.
The feed is then calculated in the cycle from the lead
and the speed. After the cycle has ended, the last
programmed feed applies again.
Programming:
ENC=11, programming the lead in MPIT or PIT
• Tapping with encoder with dwell time (SW 6.2 or higher):
As an alternative, you can program a dwell time in
the parameter DTB for tapping with encoder (G33
thread) from SW 6.2. It applies after tapping and
before retraction to the retraction plane RTP, and is
required for machines with unfavorable spindle
dynamics.
Programming:
ENC=20, entering the dwell time in parameter DTB

MPIT and PIT (as thread size and as value)

The parameter for the spindle pitch only has a meaning
if tapping is performed with encoder. The cycle
calculates the feedrate from the spindle speed and the
pitch.
The value for the thread pitch can either be defined as
the thread size (for metric threads between M3 and M48
only) or as a value (distance from one thread turn to the
next as a numerical value). The parameter not required
in each case is omitted from the call or assigned the
value zero.
If the two thread pitch parameters have conflicting
values, alarm
61001 "Thread pitch wrong"
is generated by the cycle and cycle execution is
aborted.

_AXN (tool axis)

By programming the drilling axis via _AXN, it is possible
to omit the switchover from plane G18 to G17 when the
deep hole tapping cycle is used on turning machines.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 2-75
 2 2
Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns 03.96
09.01
2.1 Drilling cycles

_PTAB (evaluation of pitch PIT)

Parameter _PTAB determines the unit of measurement of the
pitch.

• 0=according to programmed system of units inch/metric

• 1=pitch in mm
• 2=pitch in thread starts per inch
• 3=pitch in inches/revolution
This parameter is needed in connection with the
option for selecting different thread tables
in the cycles support.

_TECHNO (technological settings)

Parameter _TECHNO can be set to select
technological characteristics for tapping operations.

Possible values are:

Ones digit (exact stop behavior):
• 0=as programmed before cycle call
• 1=(G601)
• 2=(G602)
• 3=(G603)
Tens digit (feedforward control):
• 0=as programmed before cycle call
• 1=with feedforward control (FFWON)
• 2=without feedforward control (FFWOF)
Hundreds digit (brake application point):
• 0=without calculation
• 1=with calculation

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

2-76 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 2 2
03.96
09.01 Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

Further notes
Depending on the setting in machine data
NUM_ENCS, the cycle selects whether tapping is to
performed with or without encoder.

The direction of rotation for the spindle must be

programmed with M3 or M4 before the cycle is
called.

In thread blocks with G63, the values of the feedrate

override switch and spindle speed override switch
are frozen at 100 percent.

A longer compensating chuck is usually required for

tapping without encoder.

Programming example
Thread without encoder Y Y A-B
In this program a thread is tapped without encoder at
position X35 Y35 in the XY plane, the drilling axis is
the Z axis. Parameters SDR and SDAC for the
direction of rotation must be assigned, parameter A

ENC is assigned the value 1, the value for the depth

is absolute. Pitch parameter PIT can be omitted. A
B
35

compensating chuck is used in machining.

35 X 15 Z
56

N10 G90 G0 D2 T2 S500 M3 Specification of technology values

N20 G17 X35 Y35 Z60 Traverse to drilling position
N30 G1 F200 Specification of path feedrate
N40 CYCLE840 (59, 56, , 15, , 1, 4, 3, 1) Cycle call, dwell time 1 s, SDR=4, SDAC=3,
no safety clearance,
parameters MPIT, PIT are not programmed,
i.e. the lead results from the correlation
between the freely programmable values F
and S.
N50 M30 End of program

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 2-77
 2 2
Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns 03.96
2.1 Drilling cycles

Thread with encoder

In this program a thread is tapped with encoder at
position X35 Y35 in the XY plane; the boring axis is Y Y A-B

the Z axis. The pitch parameter must be defined,

automatic reversal of the direction of rotation is
programmed. A compensating chuck is used in
A
machining.

35
35 X 15 Z
56

DEF INT SDR=0 Definition of parameters with value

DEF REAL PIT=3.5 assignments
N10 G90 G0 D2 T2 S500 M4 Specification of technology values
N20 G17 X35 Y35 Z60 Traverse to drilling position
N30 CYCLE840 (59, 56, , 15, , , , , , -> Cycle call, without safety distance, value
->, PIT) for depth programmed as an absolute
value, SDAC, ENC, MPIT are omitted
(i.e., are assigned the value zero)
N40 M30 End of program

->Must be programmed in a single block

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

2-78 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 2 2
03.96 Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

2.1.7 Boring 1 – CYCLE85

Programming
CYCLE85 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR, DTB, FFR, RFF)

Parameter

RTP real Retraction plane (absolute)

RFP real Reference plane (absolute)
SDIS real Safety distance (enter without sign)
DP real Final drilling depth (absolute)
DPR real Final drilling depth relative to reference plane (enter without sign)
DTB real Dwell time at final drilling depth (chip breaking)
FFR real Feedrate
RFF real Retraction feedrate

Function
The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and
feedrate to the programmed final drilling depth.
The inward and outward movement is performed at the
feedrate that is assigned to FFR and RFF respectively.

Sequence of operations
Z
Position reached prior to cycle start:
The drilling position is the position in the two axes of
the selected plane.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 2-79
 2 2
Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns 03.96
2.1 Drilling cycles

The cycle implements the following motion

sequence:
• Approach of the reference plane brought forward by
the safety distance with G0
• Traverse to final drilling depth with G1 and at the
feedrate programmed under parameter FFR
• Dwell time at final drilling depth
• Retraction to the reference plane brought forward by
the safety distance with G1 and the retraction
feedrate defined under parameter RFF
• Retraction to retraction plane with G0

Description of parameters Z
G0
G1
See Subsection 2.1.2. (Drilling, Centering –
G4
CYCLE81) for a description of parameters RTP,
RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR

RTP
DTB (dwell time)
RFP+SDIS
Parameter DTB is the dwell time at the final drilling RFP
X
depth (chip breaking) in seconds.

FFR (feedrate)
The feedrate value assigned to FFR is active for
DP=RFP-DPR
boring.

RFF (retraction feedrate)

The feedrate value assigned to RFF is active for
retraction from the plane.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

2-80 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 2 2
03.96 Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

Programming example
First boring pass X X A-B
Cycle CYCLE85 is called at position Z70 X50 in the
ZX plane. The boring axis is the Y axis. The value
for the final drilling depth in the cycle call is
programmed as a relative value, no dwell time is
programmed. The top edge of the workpiece is A
positioned at Y102.
B

50
70 Z 77 Y
102

DEF REAL FFR, RFF, RFP=102, DPR=25, Definition of parameters with value
SDIS=2 assignments
N10 FFR=300 RFF=1.5*FFR S500 M4 Specification of technology values
N20 G18 Z70 X50 Y105 Traverse to drilling position
N30 CYCLE85 (RFP+3, RFP, SDIS, , DPR, ,-> Cycle call, no dwell time programmed
-> FFR, RFF)
N40 M30 End of program

->Must be programmed in a single block

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 2-81
 2 2
Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns 03.96
2.1 Drilling cycles

2.1.8 Boring 2 – CYCLE86

Programming
CYCLE86 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR, DTB, SDIR, RPA, RPO, RPAP, POSS)

Parameter

RTP real Retraction plane (absolute)

RFP real Reference plane (absolute)
SDIS real Safety distance (enter without sign)
DP real Final drilling depth (absolute)
DPR real Final drilling depth relative to reference plane (enter without sign)
DTB real Dwell time at final drilling depth (chip breaking)
SDIR int Direction of rotation
Value: 3 (for M3)
4 (for M4)
RPA real Retraction path in abscissa of the active plane (incremental, enter with
sign)
RPO real Retraction path in ordinate of the active plane (incremental, enter with
sign)
RPAP real Retraction path in applicate of the active plane (incremental, enter with
sign)
POSS real Spindle position for oriented spindle stop in the cycle (in degrees)

Function
The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and
feedrate to the programmed final drilling depth.
With Boring 2, oriented spindle stop is activated with
the SPOS command once the drilling depth has
been reached. Then, the programmed retraction
positions are approached in rapid traverse and, from
there, the retraction plane.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

2-82 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 2 2
03.96 Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

Sequence of operations
Z
Position reached prior to cycle start:
The drilling position is the position in the two axes of the
selected plane.

The cycle implements the following motion

sequence:
• Approach of the reference plane brought forward
X
by the safety distance with G0
• Traverse to final drilling depth with G1 and the
feedrate programmed before the program call
• Dwell time at final drilling depth
• Oriented spindle stop at the spindle position
programmed under POSS
• Traverse retraction path in up to three axes with G0
• Retraction to the reference plane brought forward
by the safety distance with G0
• Retraction to the retraction plane with G0 (initial
drilling position in both axes on the plane)

Description of parameters
Z
G0
See Subsection 2.1.2. (Drilling, Centering –
G1
CYCLE81) for a description of parameters RTP, G4
RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR SPOS

DTB (dwell time) RTP

Parameter DTB is the dwell time at the final drilling RFP+SDIS
depth (chip breaking) in seconds. RFP
X

SDIR (direction of rotation) DP=

With this parameter you determine the direction of RFP-DPR

rotation with which boring is performed in the cycle. If

values other than 3 or 4 (M3/M4) are generated, alarm
61102 "No spindle direction programmed"
is output and the cycle is not executed.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 2-83
 2 2
Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns 03.96
09.01
2.1 Drilling cycles

RPA (retraction path, in abscissa)

Under this parameter you define a retraction movement
in the abscissa, which is executed after the final drilling
depth has been reached and oriented spindle stop has
been performed.

RPO (retraction path, in ordinate)

Under this parameter you define a retraction movement
in the ordinate which is executed after the final drilling
has been reached and oriented spindle stop has been
performed.

RPAP (retraction path, in applicate)

Under this parameter you define a retraction movement
in the boring axis which is executed after the final
drilling has been reached and oriented spindle stop has
been performed.

POSS (spindle position)

Under POSS the spindle position for the oriented
spindle stop which is performed after the final drilling
depth has been reached is programmed in degrees.

Further notes
With the SPOS command you can perform an oriented
spindle stop of the active master spindle. The angular
value is programmed with a transfer parameter.

Cycle CYCLE86 can be used if the spindle to be used

for the boring operation is technically able to go into
position-controlled spindle operation.

Turning machine without Y axis (SW 6.2 or

higher)
You can now use the cycle CYCLE86 for turning
machines without Y axis. Retraction to drilling depth is
then traversed in 2 axes only. If a retraction path was
programmed for the 3rd axis, it would be ignored.
If you call the cycle without Y axis in the G18 plane, the
following alarm appears: 61005 "3rd geometry axis not
available", as the Y axis would then be the boring axis.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

2-84 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 2 2
03.96 Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

Programming example
Second boring pass Y Y A-B
Cycle CYCLE86 is called at position X70 Y50 in the
ZX plane. The boring axis is the Z axis. The final
drilling depth is programmed as an absolute value, a
safety distance is not defined. The dwell time at the
final drilling depth is 2 s. The top edge of the A
workpiece is positioned at Z110. In the cycle, the
spindle is turned with M3 and stops at 45 degrees. B

50
70 X 77 Z
110

DEF REAL DP, DTB, POSS Definition of parameters

N10 DP=77 DTB=2 POSS=45 Value assignments
N20 G0 G17 G90 F200 S300 Specification of technology values
N30 D3 T3 Z112 Traverse to retraction plane
N40 X70 Y50 Traverse to drilling position
N50 CYCLE86 (112, 110, , DP, , DTB, 3,-> Cycle call with absolute drilling depth
-> –1, –1, +1, POSS)
N60 M30 End of program

->Must be programmed in a single block

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 2-85
 2 2
Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns 03.96
2.1 Drilling cycles

2.1.9 Boring 3 – CYCLE87

Programming
CYCLE87 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR, SDIR)

Parameter

RTP real Retraction plane (absolute)

RFP real Reference plane (absolute)
SDIS real Safety distance (enter without sign)
DP real Final drilling depth (absolute)
DPR real Final drilling depth relative to reference plane (enter without sign)
SDIR int Direction of rotation
Value: 3 (for M3)
4 (for M4)

Function
The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and
feedrate to the programmed final drilling depth.
With Boring 3, a spindle stop without orientation M5 and
then a programmed stop M0 are generated when the
final drilling depth is reached. The NC START key is
pressed to continue the retraction movement in rapid
traverse mode until the retraction plane is reached.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

2-86 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 2 2
03.96 Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

Sequence of operations
Z
Position reached prior to cycle start:
The drilling position is the position in the two axes of
the selected plane.

The cycle implements the following motion

sequence:
• Approach of the reference plane brought forward
X
by the safety distance with G0
• Traverse to final drilling depth with G1 and the
feedrate programmed before the program call
• Spindle stop with M5
• Press NC START key
• Retraction to retraction plane with G0

Description of parameters
Z
G0
See Subsection 2.1.2. (Drilling, Centering – G1
CYCLE81) M5/M0
for a description of parameters RTP, RFP, SDIS,
DP, DPR
RTP
SDIR (direction of rotation) RFP+SDIS
RFP
With this parameter you determine the direction of X
rotation with which boring is performed in the cycle.
If values other than 3 or 4 (M3/M4) are generated, DP=RFP-DPR
alarm 61102 "No spindle direction programmed" is
output and the cycle is aborted.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 2-87
 2 2
Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns 03.96
2.1 Drilling cycles

Programming example
Third boring pass Y Y A-B
Cycle CYCLE87 is called at position X70 Y50 in the ZX
plane. The boring axis is the Z axis. The final drilling
depth is programmed as an absolute value. The safety
distance is 2mm.
A

50
70 X 77 Z
110

DEF REAL DP, SDIS Definition of parameters

N10 DP=77 SDIS=2 Value assignments
N20 G0 G17 G90 F200 S300 Specification of technology values
N30 D3 T3 Z113 Traverse to retraction plane
N40 X70 Y50 Traverse to drilling position
N50 CYCLE87 (113, 110, SDIS, DP, , 3) Cycle call with programmed spindle
direction M3
N60 M30 End of program

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

2-88 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 2 2
03.96 Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

2.1.10 Boring 4 – CYCLE88

Programming
CYCLE88 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR, DTB, SDIR)

Parameter

RTP real Retraction plane (absolute)

RFP real Reference plane (absolute)
SDIS real Safety distance (enter without sign)
DP real Final drilling depth (absolute)
DPR real Final drilling depth relative to reference plane (enter without sign)
DTB real Dwell time at final drilling depth
SDIR int Direction of rotation Value: 3 (for M3) 4 (for M4)

Function
The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and
feedrate to the programmed final drilling depth. With
Boring 4, a dwell time, a spindle stop without orientation
M5 and a programmed stop M0 are generated when the
final drilling depth is reached. Pressing the NC START
key continues the retraction movement in rapid traverse
mode until the retraction plane is reached.

Sequence of operations
Z
Position reached prior to cycle start:
The drilling position is the position in the two axes of
the selected plane.
The cycle implements the following motion
sequence:
• Approach of the reference plane brought forward
by the safety distance with G0 X
• Traverse to final drilling depth with G1 and the
feedrate programmed before the program call
• Dwell time at final drilling depth
• Spindle stop with M5 (_ZSD[5]=1) or
• spindle and program stop with M5 M0 (_ZSD[5]=0).
Press the NC START key
after program stop.
• Retraction to retraction plane with G0

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 2-89
 2 2
Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns 03.96
2.1 Drilling cycles

Description of parameters
Z
G0
See Subsection 2.1.2. (Drilling, Centering – G1
CYCLE81) for a description of parameters RTP, G4
RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR Cycle setting data _ZSD[5] M5/M0

see Section 3.2.

RTP
DTB (dwell time) RFP+SDIS
RFP
Parameter DTB is the dwell time at the final drilling X
depth (chip breaking) in seconds.
DP=RFP-DPR
SDIR (direction of rotation)
The programmed direction of rotation is active for
the movement to the final drilling depth.
If values other than 3 or 4 (M3/M4) are programmed,
alarm 61102 "No spindle direction programmed".
is output and the cycle is aborted.

Programming example
Fourth boring pass Y Y A-B
Cycle CYCLE88 is called at position X80 Y90 in the
ZX plane. The boring axis is the Z axis. The safety
distance is programmed as 3mm. The final drilling
depth is defined as a value relative to the reference A

plane.
B
M4 is active in the cycle.
90

80 X Z
30
102

DEF REAL RFP, RTP, DPR, DTB, SDIS Definition of parameters

N10 RFP=102 RTP=105 DPR=72 DTB=3 SDIS=3 Value assignments
N20 G17 G90 F100 S450 Specification of technology values
N30 G0 X80 Y90 Z105 Traverse to drilling position
N40 CYCLE88 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, , DPR, -> Cycle call with programmed
-> DTB, 4) Spindle direction M4
N50 M30 End of program

->Must be programmed in a single block

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

2-90 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 2 2
03.96 Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns
2.1 Drilling cycles

2.1.11 Boring 5 – CYCLE89

Programming
CYCLE89 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR, DTB)

Parameter

RTP real Retraction plane (absolute)

RFP real Reference plane (absolute)
SDIS real Safety distance (enter without sign)
DP real Final drilling depth (absolute)
DPR real Final drilling depth relative to reference plane (enter without sign)
DTB real Dwell time at final drilling depth (chip breaking)

Function
The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed and
feedrate to the programmed final drilling depth. Once
the final drilling depth has been reached a dwell time
can be programmed.

Sequence of operations
Z
Position reached prior to cycle start:
The drilling position is the position in the two axes of
the selected plane.

The cycle implements the following motion

sequence:
• Approach of the reference plane brought forward
X
by the safety distance with G0
• Traverse to final drilling depth with G1 and the
feedrate programmed before the program call
• Dwell time at final drilling depth
• Retraction to the reference plane brought forward
by the safety distance with G1 and the same
feedrate value
• Retraction to retraction plane with G0

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 2-91
 2 2
Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns 03.96
2.1 Drilling cycles

Description of parameters
Z
G0
See Subsection 2.1.2. (Drilling, Centering – G1
CYCLE81) for a description of parameters RTP, G4
RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR

DTB (dwell time) RTP

Parameter DTB is the dwell time at the final drilling RFP+SDIS
RFP
depth (chip breaking) in seconds. X

DP=RFP-DPR

Programming example
Fifth boring pass Y Y A-B
Boring cycle CYCLE89 is called at position X80 Y90
in the XY plane with a safety distance of 5mm and
the final drilling depth specified as an absolute value.
A
The boring axis is the Z axis.
B
90

80 X 72 Z
102

DEF REAL RFP, RTP, DP, DTB Definition of parameters

RFP=102 RTP=107 DP=72 DTB=3 Value assignments
N10 G90 G17 F100 S450 M4 Specification of technology values
N20 G0 X80 Y90 Z107 Traverse to drilling position
N30 CYCLE89 (RTP, RFP, 5, DP, , DTB) Cycle call
N40 M30 End of program

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

2-92 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 2 2
03.96
08.97 Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns
2.2 Modal call of drilling cycles

2.2 Modal call of drilling cycles

With NC programming it is possible to call any
subroutine modally.
This feature is of special importance for drilling
cycles.

Programming
Modal call of a subroutine
MCALL

with drilling cycle (for example)

MCALL CYCLE81 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR)

Function
In NC programming, subroutines and cycles can be
called modally, also i.e. maintaining the parameters
MCALL MCALL MCALL
previous values.
You generate a modal subroutine call by programming
the keyword MCALL (modal subroutine call) in front of
the subroutine name. This function causes the
subroutine to be called and executed automatically after
each block that contains traversing movement.
The function is deactivated by programming MCALL
without a subroutine name or by a new modal call of
another subroutine.

Nesting of modal calls is not permissible, i.e.,

subroutines that are called modally cannot contain any
further modal subroutine calls.

Any number of modal drilling cycles can be

programmed, the number is not limited to a certain
number of G functions reserved for this purpose.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 2-93
 2 2
Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns 03.96
2.2 Modal call of drilling cycles

Programming example
Z Z
Row of holes_5 A A-B

With this program you can machine a row of 5 thread

holes positioned parallel to the Z axis in the ZX plane.

20
The distance between each of the holes is 20 mm. The

20
row of holes starts at Z20 and X30, the first hole in the

20
row being 10 mm from this point. In this example, the

20
geometry of the row of holes has been programmed

10
without using a cycle. First of all, drilling is performed
with cycle CYCLE81 and then with CYCLE84 tapping

20
B
(rigid). The holes are 80 mm deep. This is the 30 X Y
22
difference between the reference plane and the final 102
drilling depth.

DEF REAL RFP=102, DP=22, RTP=105, -> Definition of parameters with

-> PIT=4.2, SDIS value assignments
DEF INT COUNT=1
N10 SDIS=3 Value for safety distance
N20 G90 F300 S500 M3 D1 T1 Specification of technology values
N30 G18 G0 Y105 Z20 X30 Approach starting position
N40 MCALL CYCLE81 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP) Modal call of the drilling cycle
N50 MA1: G91 Z20 Traverse to next position (ZX plane)
Cycle is executed
N60 COUNT=COUNT+1 Loop for drilling positions along the row of
N70 IF COUNT<6 GOTOB MA1 holes
N80 MCALL Deselect modal call
N90 G90 Y105 Z20 Approach starting position again
N100 COUNT=1 Set counter to zero
N110 ... Tool change
N120 MCALL CYCLE84 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, -> Modal call of tapping cycle
-> DP , , , 3, , PIT, , 400)
N130 MA2: G91 Z20 Next drilling position
N140 COUNT=COUNT+1 Loop for drilling position of the row of
N150 IF COUNT<6 GOTOB MA2 holes
N160 MCALL Deselect modal call
N170 G90 X30 Y105 Z20 Approach starting position again
N180 M30 End of program

-> Must be programmed in a single block

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

2-94 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 2 2
03.96 Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns
2.2 Modal call of drilling cycles

Further notes
Explanation of this example
The modal call must be deselected in block N80
because in the next block the tool is traversed to a
position where no drilling is to be performed.
It is advisable to store the drilling positions for a
machining task of this type in a subroutine which is
then called at MA1 or MA2.

In the description of the drilling pattern cycles on the

following pages in Section 2.3, the program using
these cycles has been adapted and thus simplified.
The drilling pattern cycles are based on the call
principle MCALL DRILLING CYCLE (...)
DRILLING PATTERN (...).

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 2-95
 2 2
Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns 03.96
2.3 Drill pattern cycles

2.3 Drill pattern cycles

The drilling pattern cycles only describe the geometry of
an arrangement of holes on a plane. The link to a
drilling cycle is established via the modal call (see
Section 2.2) of this drilling cycle before the drilling
pattern cycle is programmed.

2.3.1 Preconditions
Drilling pattern cycles without drilling cycle call
Drilling pattern cycles can also be used for other
applications without the drilling cycle first being called
modally because the drilling pattern cycles can be
parameterized without reference to the drilling cycle
used.
If there was no modal call of the subroutine prior to
calling the drilling pattern cycle, error message 62100
"No drilling cycle active" appears.
You can acknowledge this error message with the error
acknowledgment key and continue program processing
by pressing the NC Start key. The drilling pattern cycle
then approaches each of the positions calculated from
the input data one after the other without calling a
subroutine at these points.

Behavior when quantity parameter is zero

The number of holes in a drilling pattern must be
parameterized. If the value of the quantity parameter
is zero when the cycle is called (or if this parameter
is omitted from the parameter list), alarm
61103 "Number of holes is zero" is output
and the cycle is aborted.

Checks in the case of limited ranges of input

parameter values
Generally there are no plausibility checks for defining
parameters in the drilling pattern cycles if they are
not expressly declared for a parameter with a
description of the response.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

2-96 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 2 2
03.96 Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns
2.3 Drill pattern cycles

2.3.2 Row of holes – HOLES1

Programming
HOLES1 (SPCA, SPCO, STA1, FDIS, DBH, NUM)

Parameter

SPCA real Abscissa of a reference point on the straight line (absolute)

SPCO real Ordinate of this reference point (absolute)
STA1 real Angle to abscissa
Value range –180<STA1<=180 degrees
FDIS real Distance between the first hole and the reference point (enter without
sign)
DBH real Distance between the holes (enter without sign)
NUM int Number of holes

Function
With this cycle you can program a row of holes, i.e. a
number of holes that lie along a straight line or a grid
of holes. The type of hole is determined by the
drilling cycle that has already been called modally.

Sequence of operations
To avoid unnecessary travel, the cycle calculates
whether the row of holes is machined starting from
the first hole or the last hole from the actual position
of the plane axes and the geometry of the row of
holes. The drilling positions are then approached
one after the other in rapid traverse.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 2-97
 2 2
Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns 03.96
2.3 Drill pattern cycles

Description of parameters
Y
SPCA and SPCO (reference point abscissa and
ordinate)
One point along the straight line of the row of holes SPCA

is defined as the reference point for determining the

distances between the holes. The distance to the
first hole FDIS is defined from this point.
H
DB

STA1 (angle) IS
FD
The straight line can be in any position on the plane. STA1
It is specified both by the point defined by SPCA and

SPCO
SPCO and by the angle contained by the straight line
and the abscissa of the workpiece coordinate X
system that is active when the cycle is called. The
angle is entered under STA1 in degrees.

FDIS and DBH (distance)

Under FDIS you enter the distance between the first
hole and the reference point defined under SPCA
and SPCO. The parameter DBH contains the
distance between any two holes.

NUM (number)
You determine the number of holes with the
parameter NUM.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

2-98 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 2 2
03.96 Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns
2.3 Drill pattern cycles

Programming example
Row of holes Z Z
A A-B
With this program you can machine a row of holes of
5 tapped holes positioned in parallel to the Z axis

20
on the ZX plane, with a distance between each hole of

20 20
20mm. The row of holes starts at Z20 and X30, the first
hole in the row being 10mm from this point. The
geometry of the row of holes is described by the cycle

20
HOLES1. First of all, drilling is performed with cycle

10
CYCLE81 and then with CYCLE84 tapping (rigid). The

20
B
holes are 80mm deep. This is the difference between
30 X Y
the reference plane and the final drilling depth. 22
102

DEF REAL RFP=102, DP=22, RTP=105 Definition of parameters with value

DEF REAL SDIS, FDIS assignments
DEF REAL SPCA=30, SPCO=20, STA1=0, ->
-> FDIS=20, DBH=20
DEF INT NUM=5
N10 SDIS=3 FDIS=10 Value for safety distance and distance of
the first hole to the reference point
N20 G90 F30 S500 M3 D1 T1 Specification of technology values for the
machining section
N30 G18 G0 Z20 Y105 X30 Approach starting position
N40 MCALL CYCLE81 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP) Modal call of drilling cycle
N50 HOLES1 (SPCA, SPCO, STA1, FDIS, -> Call of row of holes cycle, the cycle starts
-> DBH, NUM) with the first hole. Only the drilling
positions are approached in this cycle
N60 MCALL Deselect modal call
... Tool change
N70 G90 G0 Z30 Y75 X105 Traverse to position next to 5th hole
N80 MCALL CYCLE84 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, -> Modal call of tapping cycle
-> , , , 3, , 4.2)
N90 HOLES1 (SPCA, SPCO, STA, FDIS, -> Call of row of holes cycle started with
-> DBH, NUM) the 5th hole in the row
N100 MCALL Deselect modal call
N110 M30 End of program
->Must be programmed in a single block

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 2-99
 2 2
Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns 03.96
2.3 Drill pattern cycles

Programming example
Grid of holes Y

With this program you can machine a grid of holes

consisting of 5 rows of 5 holes each that lie in the XY
plane at a distance of 10mm from one another. The
starting point of the grid is X30 Y20.

10
20
10 10 X
30

DEF REAL RFP=102, DP=75, RTP=105, Definition of parameters with value

SDIS=3 assignments
DEF REAL SPCA=30, SPCO=20, STA1=0, ->
-> DBH=10, FDIS=10
DEF INT NUM=5, LINENUM=5, COUNT=0
DEF REAL LINEDIST
N10 LINEDIST=DBH Distance between rows = distance
between holes
N20 G90 F300 S500 M3 D1 T1 Specification of technology values
N30 G17 G0 X=SPCA-10 Y=SPCO Z105 Approach starting position
N40 MCALL CYCLE81 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP) Modal call of a drilling cycle
N50 MARK1: HOLES1 (SPCA, SPCO, STA1, -> - Call of row of holes cycle
> FDIS, DBH, NUM)
N60 SPCO=SPCO+LINEDIST Ordinate of reference point for the next
line
N70 COUNT=COUNT+1 Jump back to MARK1 if the condition is
N80 IF COUNT<LINENUM GOTOB MARK1 fulfilled
N90 MCALL Deselect modal call
N100 G90 G0 X=SPCA-10 Y=SPCO Z105 Approach starting position
N110 M30 End of program

->Must be programmed in a single block

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

2-100 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 2 2
03.96 Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns
2.3 Drill pattern cycles

2.3.3 Hole circle – HOLES2

Programming
HOLES2 (CPA, CPO, RAD, STA1, INDA, NUM)

Parameter

CPA real Center point of circle of holes, abscissa (absolute)

CPO real Center point of circle of holes, ordinate (absolute)
RAD real Radius of circle of holes (enter without sign)
STA1 real Initial angle
Value range –180<STA1<=180 degrees
INDA real Indexing angle
NUM int Number of holes

Function
A circle of holes can be machined with this cycle.
The machining plane must be defined before the
cycle is called.
The type of hole is determined by the drilling cycle
that has already been called modally.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 2-101
 2 2
Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns 03.96
2.3 Drill pattern cycles

Sequence of operations
In the cycle, the drilling positions are approached
one after the other on the plane with G0.

Description of parameters
CPA, CPO and RAD (center point and radius Y CPA
abscissa, ordinate)
The position of the circle of holes in the machining INDA
plane is defined by the center point (parameters
CPA and CPO) and the radius (parameter RAD). STA1
Only positive values are permissible for the radius.
RA

CPO
STA1 and INDA (start angle and indexing angle)
D

The arrangement of the holes in the circle is defined

by these parameters. X
Parameter STA1 defines the angle of rotation
between the positive direction of the abscissa in the
coordinate system active before the cycle was called
and the first hole. Parameter INDA contains the
angle of rotation from one hole to the next.
If parameter INDA is assigned the value zero, the
indexing angle is calculated internally from the
number of holes which are positioned equally in a
circle.

NUM (number)
You determine the number of holes with the parameter
NUM.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

2-102 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 2 2
03.96 Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns
2.3 Drill pattern cycles

Programming example
Hole circle
Y Y
The program uses CYCLE82 4 to produce holes with
a depth of 30mm. The final drilling depth is defined
as a value relative to the reference plane. The circle A
is defined by the center point X70 Y60 and the
radius 42mm in the XY plane. The initial angle is 45
45°
degrees. 42
The safety distance in the drilling axis Z is 2mm.

60
B
70 X 30 Z

DEF REAL CPA=70,CPO=60,RAD=42,STA1=45 Definition of parameters with value

DEF INT NUM=4 assignments
N10 G90 F140 S710 M3 D4 T40 Specification of technology values
N20 G17 G0 X50 Y45 Z2 Approach starting position
N30 MCALL CYCLE82 (2, 0,2, , 30) Modal call of drilling cycle, without dwell
time, DP is not programmed
N40 HOLES2 (CPA, CPO, RAD, STA1, , NUM) Call of circle of holes cycle, the indexing
angle is calculated internally by the cycle
as parameter INDA has been omitted
N50 MCALL Deselect modal call
N60 M30 End of program

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 2-103
 2 2
Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns 03.96
04.00
2.3 Drill pattern cycles

2.3.4 Dot matrix – CYCLE801 (SW 5.3 and later)

Programming
CYCLE801 (_SPCA, _SPCO, _STA, _DIS1,
_DIS2, _NUM1, _NUM2)

Parameter

_SPCA real Reference point for grid of holes in the 1st axis, abscissa (absolute)
_SPCO real Reference point for grid of holes in the 2nd axis, abscissa (absolute)
_STA real Angle to abscissa
_DIS1 real Distance between columns (without sign)
_DIS2 real Distance between rows (without sign)
_NUM1 int Number of columns
_NUM2 int Number of rows

Function
Cycle CYCLE801 can be used to machine a "grid of
holes". The type of hole is determined by the drilling
cycle that has already been called modally.

Sequence of operations
The cycle calculates the sequence of holes such that
the empty paths between them are kept as short as
possible. The starting position of the machining
operation is defined according to the last position
reached in the plane prior to the cycle call.
Starting positions are one of the four possible corner
positions in each case.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

2-104 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 2 2
03.96
04.00 Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns
2.3 Drill pattern cycles

Description of parameters
Y
_SPCA and _SPCO (reference point abscissa and
ordinate)
These two parameters determine the first point of the
hole grid. The row and column distances are specified
in relation to this point.
IS1
_D
_STA (angle)
The grid of holes can positioned at any angle in the
_DIS2
plane. This angle is programmed in degrees in _STA _STA

_SPCO
and refers to the abscissa of the workpiece coordinate
system active as the cycle is called.
_SPCA X

_DIS1 and _DIS2 (column and row distances)

The distances must be entered without sign. To avoid
unnecessary empty travel, the dot matrix is machined
line by line or column by column based on a
comparison of distance measurements.

_NUM1 and _NUM2 (number)

This parameter determines the number of columns
or lines.

Programming example Y

Cycle CYCLE801 is used to machine a dot matrix,

consisting of 15 holes in 3 lines
and 5 columns. The associated drilling program is
called modally beforehand.
15
20

30 10
X

N10 G90 G17 F900 S4000 M3 T2 D1 Specification of technology values

N15 MCALL CYCLE82(10,0,1,-22,0,0) Modal call of a drilling cycle
N20 CYCLE801(30,20,0,10,15,5,3) Call dot matrix
N25 M30 End of program

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 2-105
 2 2
Drilling Cycles and Drilling Patterns 03.96
2.3 Drill pattern cycles

Notes

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

2-106 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
09.01 Milling Cycles

Milling Cycles

3.1 General information .......................................................................................................3-108

3.2 Preconditions .................................................................................................................3-109

3.3 Thread cutting – CYCLE90............................................................................................3-111

3.4 Elongated holes on a circle – LONGHOLE ...................................................................3-117

3.5 Slots on a circle – SLOT1..............................................................................................3-123

3.6 Circumferential slot – SLOT2 ........................................................................................3-131

3.7 Milling rectangular pockets – POCKET1 .......................................................................3-136

3.8 Milling circular pockets – POCKET2..............................................................................3-140

3.9 Milling rectangular pockets – POCKET3 .......................................................................3-144

3.10 Milling circular pockets – POCKET4..............................................................................3-154

3.11 Face milling – CYCLE71................................................................................................3-160

3.12 Path milling – CYCLE72 ................................................................................................3-166

3.13 Milling rectangular spigots – CYCLE76 (SW 5.3 and later)...........................................3-176

3.14 Milling circular spigots – CYCLE77 (SW 5.3 and later) .................................................3-181

3.15 Pocket milling with islands – CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75 (SW 5.2 and later).....3-185
3.15.1 Transfer pocket edge contour – CYCLE74 .............................................................3-186
3.15.2 Transfer island contour – CYCLE75........................................................................3-188
3.15.3 Contour programming .............................................................................................3-189
3.15.4 Pocket milling with islands – CYCLE73...................................................................3-192

3.16 Swiveling - CYCLE800 (from SW 6.2)...........................................................................3-215

3.16.1 Operation, parameter assignment...........................................................................3-218
3.16.2 Starting up CYCLE800 ............................................................................................3-227
3.16.3 User cycle TOOLCARR.spf .....................................................................................3-240

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-107
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
3.1 General information

3.1 General information

The following sections describe how milling cycles are
programmed.

This section is intended to guide you in selecting cycles

and assigning them with parameters. In addition to a
detailed description of the function of the individual
cycles and the corresponding parameters, you will also
find a sample program at the end of each section to
familiarize you with the use of cycles.

The Sections are structured as follows:

• Programming
• Parameters
• Function
• Sequence of operations
• Explanation of parameters
• Additional notes
• Sample program
"Programming" and "Parameters" explain the use of
cycles sufficiently for the experienced user, whereas
beginners can find all the information they need for
programming cycles under "Function", "Sequence of
operations", "Explanation of parameters", "Additional
notes" and the "Sample program".

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-108 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96 Milling Cycles
3.2 Preconditions

3.2 Preconditions
Programs required in the control
The milling cycles call the programs
• MESSAGE.SPF and
• PITCH.SPF
internally as subroutines. Moreover, you need the
data block GUD7.DEF and the macro definition file
SMAC.DEF.
Load them in the part program memory of the
control unit before executing the milling cycles.

Call and return conditions

Milling cycles are programmed independently of the
actual axis names. You must activate a tool offset
before you call the milling cycles.
The required values for the feedrate, spindle speed and
spindle direction of rotation must be programmed in the
part program if no parameters are available for these in
the milling cycle.
The center point coordinates of the milling pattern or the
pocket to be machined are programmed in the right-
handed coordinate system.
The G functions and current programmable frame
active before the cycle was called remain active beyond
the cycle.

Plane definition
Z
In milling cycles, it is generally assumed that the
Applicate

ate Y
current workpiece coordinate system is defined by rdin
G1
9 O
selecting plane G17, G18 or G19 and activating a
programmable frame (if necessary). The infeed axis
is always the 3rd axis of the coordinate system
(see also Programming Guide).

G1
7

G 18
Ab
sci
ssa

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-109
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
12.98
3.2 Preconditions

Spindle programming
The spindle commands in the cycles always refer to the
active master spindle of the control.
If you want to use a cycle on a machine with several
spindles, you must first define the spindle that is to be
used as the master spindle with the command SETMS
(see also Programming Guide).

Machining status messages

Status messages are displayed on the control
monitor during the processing of milling cycles.
The following messages might be displayed:
• "Elongated hole <No.>(first figure) is being
machined"
• "Slot <No.>(other figure) is being machined"
• "Circumferential slot <No.>(last figure) is being
machined"
In each case <No.> stands for the number of the
figure that is currently being machined.
These messages do not interrupt program processing
and continue to be displayed until the next message is
displayed or the cycle is completed.

Cycle setting data

A few parameters of milling cycles (SW 4 and later) and
their behavior can be modified by cycle settings.
The cycle setting data are defined in data block
GUD7.DEF.

The following new cycle setting data are introduced:

_ZSD[x] Value Meaning Cycles affected
_ZSD[1] 0 Depth computation in the new cycles is made between POCKET1 to
the reference plane + safety distance and depth POCKET4,
(_RFP + _SDIS - _DP) LONGHOLE,
1 Depth computation is made without including safety CYCLE71, SLOT1,
distance CYCLE72, SLOT2
_ZSD[2] 0 Dimension of rectangular pocket or rectangular spigot POCKET3
from the center point CYCLE76
1 Dimension of rectangular pocket or rectangular spigot
from a corner
_ZSD[5] 0 Execute at drilling depth M5 M0 CYCLE88
1 Execute at drilling depth M5

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-110 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
08.97 Milling Cycles
3.3 Thread cutting – CYCLE90

3.3 Thread cutting – CYCLE90

Programming
CYCLE90 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR, DIATH, KDIAM, PIT, FFR, CDIR, TYPTH,
CPA, CPO)

Parameters

RTP Real Retraction plane (absolute)

RFP Real Reference plane (absolute)
SDIS Real Safety distance (enter without sign)
DP Real Final drilling depth (absolute)
DPR Real Final drilling depth relative to reference plane (enter without sign)
DIATH Real Nominal diameter, outside diameter of thread
KDIAM Real Core diameter, inside diameter of thread
PIT Real Thread pitch; Value range: 0.001 ... 2000.000mm
FFR Real Feedrate for thread milling (enter without sign)
CDIR Int Direction of rotation for thread milling
Value: 2 (for thread milling with G2)
3 (for thread milling with G3)
TYPTH Int Thread type: Values: 0= inside thread
1= outside thread
CPA Real Center point of circle, abscissa (absolute)
CPO real Center point of circle, ordinate (absolute)

Function
You can produce inside and outside threads with
cycle CYCLE90. The path in thread milling is based
on helical interpolation. All three geometrical axes of
the current plane which you define before calling the
cycle are involved in this movement.

The programmed feedrate F depends on the axis

grouping defined in the FGROUP instruction before
the cycle call
(see Programming Guide).

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-111
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
3.3 Thread cutting – CYCLE90

Sequence of operations
Outside threads

Position reached prior to cycle start:

This can be any position from which the starting
position on the outside diameter of the thread at the Z
Y
retraction plane level can be reached without
collision. CPA
This start position for thread milling with G2 lies
between the positive abscissa and the positive
ordinate in the current level (i.e. in the 1st quadrant
of the coordinate system). For thread milling with
G3, the start position lies between the positive O
CP
abscissa and the negative ordinate (i.e. in the 4th X
quadrant of the coordinate system). Start position for
Start position for thread milling
The distance from the thread diameter depends on with G2
thread milling
the thread size and the tool radius used. with G3

The cycle implements the following motion

sequence:
• Travel to the starting point with G0 at the retraction
plane level in the applicate of the current plane
• Infeed to the reference plane brought forward by
the safety distance with G0
• Movement to the thread diameter along a
circular path in the direction G2/G3 opposite to
that defined in CDIR
• Thread milling along a helical path with G2/G3
and feedrate FFR
• Travel-out movement along a circular path in the
opposite direction G2/G3 and the reduced
feedrate FFR
• Retraction to retraction plane in the applicate
with G0

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-112 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
08.97 Milling Cycles
3.3 Thread cutting – CYCLE90

Inside threads

Position reached prior to cycle start:

This can be any position from which the starting
position on the center point of the thread at the
retraction plane level can be approached without
collision.

The cycle implements the following motion

sequence:
• Travel to the center point of the thread with G0 at
the retraction plane level in the applicate of the
current plane
• Infeed to the reference plane brought forward by
the safety distance with G0
• Approach with G1 and the reduced feedrate FFR
along an approach circle calculated in the cycle
• Movement to the thread diameter along a
circular path in the direction G2/G3 defined in
CDIR
• Thread milling along a helical path with G2/G3
and feedrate FFR
• Travel-out movement along a circular path with the
same direction of rotation and the reduced feedrate
FFR
• Retraction to the center point of the thread with G0
• Retraction to retraction plane in the applicate
with G0

Thread from bottom to top

For technological reasons, it may be preferable to
machine the thread from the bottom to the top. The
return plane RTP is then below the thread depth DP.
This machining operation is possible, the depth data
must be programmed as absolute values and before
cycle start, the machine must be positioned on the
retraction plane or one position behind the retraction
plane.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-113
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
08.97
3.3 Thread cutting – CYCLE90

Programming example
(thread from bottom to top)

A thread must be cut starting from –20 up to 0 with a

3mm pitch. The return plane is at 8.

N10 G17 X100 Y100 S300 M3 T1 D1 F1000

N20 Z8
N30 CYCLE90 (8,-20,0,-
60,0,46,40,3,800,3,0,50,50)
N40 M2

The hole must have at least a depth of –21.5 (half

pitch in excess).

Overshoot in the thread longitudinal direction

For thread milling, the travel-in and travel-out

movements occur along all three axes concerned.
This means that the travel-out movement includes a
further step in the vertical axis, beyond the
programmed thread depth.
The overshoot is calculated:

p 2 *WR + RDIFF
∆z = *
4 DIATH

∆z Overshoot, internal
p Thread pitch
WR Tool radius
DIATH Outside diameter of the thread
RDIFF Radius difference for travel-out

For inside threads RDIFF = DIATH/2 - WR,

For outside threads RDIFF = DIATH/2 + WR.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-114 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96 Milling Cycles
3.3 Thread cutting – CYCLE90

Description of parameters

See Subsection 2.1.2. (Drilling, Centering –

CYCLE81) for a description of parameters RTP, Z Z
RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR
RTP RTP
RFP+SDIS RFP+SDIS
DIATH, KDIAM and PIT (nominal diameter, core RFP RFP

DPR
DPR
diameter and thread pitch)
DP
With these parameters you define the thread data
X X
such as, nominal diameter, core diameter and pitch.
Y Y
Parameter DIATH is the outside diameter and CPA CPA
KDIAM the inside diameter of the thread. The travel- CDIR CDIR

TH

TH
in and travel-out movements are generated by the

IA

IA
CPO

CPO
D

D
cycle based on these parameters.
X X

FFR (feedrate)
The value of parameter FFR is defined as the current
feedrate value for thread milling. In thread milling it is
active for the movement along the helical path.
This value is reduced in the cycle for the travel-in
and travel-out movements. Retraction is performed
outside the helical path with G0.

CDIR (direction of rotation)

You define the value for the machining direction of
the thread in this parameter.
If the parameter is assigned an invalid value, the
message "Wrong milling direction, G3 will be
generated" is output.
In this case the cycle is continued and G3 is
automatically generated.

TYPTH (thread type)

With parameter TYPTH you determine whether an
outside or inside thread is to be machined.

CPA and CPO (center point)

With these parameters you define the center point of
the hole or spigot on which the thread is to be
machined.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-115
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
08.97
3.3 Thread cutting – CYCLE90

Further notes
The milling cutter radius is taken into account by the
cycle. A tool offset must therefore be programmed
before the cycle is called. Otherwise alarm
61000 "No tool offset active" is output
and the cycle is aborted.
When the tool radius equals zero or a negative
value, the cycle is also aborted with this alarm.
With inside threads, the tool radius is monitored and
alarm 61105 "Cutter radius too large"
is output and the cycle is aborted.

Programming example
Y Y
Inside thread
With this program you can machine an inside thread A-B
A
at position X60 Y50 on the G17 plane.
50

B
60 X 40 Z

DEF REAL RTP=48, RFP=40, SDIS=5, -> Definition of variables with value assignment
-> DPR=40, DIATH=60, KDIAM=50
DEF REAL PIT=2, FFR=500, CPA=60,CPO=50
DEF INT CDIR=2, TYPTH=0
N10 G90 G0 G17 X0 Y0 Z80 S200 M3 Approach starting position
N20 T5 D1 Specification of technology values
N30 CYCLE90 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, -> Cycle call
-> DPR, DIATH, KDIAM, PIT, FFR, CDIR,
TYPTH, CPA CPO)
N40 G0 G90 Z100 Approach position after cycle
N50 M02 End of program
-> Must be programmed in a single block

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-116 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96 Milling Cycles
3.4 Elongated holes on a circle – LONGHOLE

3.4 Elongated holes on a circle – LONGHOLE

Programming
LONGHOLE (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR, NUM, LENG, CPA, CPO, RAD, STA1, INDA,
FFD, FFP1, MID)

Parameters

RTP real Retraction plane (absolute)

RFP real Reference plane (absolute)
SDIS real Safety distance (enter without sign)
DP real Elongated hole final drilling depth (absolute)
DPR real Elongated hole final drilling depth relative to reference plane (enter
without sign)
NUM int Number of elongated holes
LENG real Length of elongated hole (enter without sign)
CPA real Center point of circle, abscissa (absolute)
CPO real Center point of circle, ordinate (absolute)
RAD real Radius of circle (enter without sign)
STA1 real Initial angle
INDA real Indexing angle
FFD real Feedrate for depth infeed
FFP1 real Feedrate for surface machining
MID real Maximum infeed depth for infeed (enter without sign)

The cycle requires a milling cutter with an "end tooth

cutting over center" (DIN 844).

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-117
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
3.4 Elongated holes on a circle – LONGHOLE

Function
Elongated holes arranged on a circle can be
machined with this cycle. The longitudinal axis of the
elongated holes is arranged radially.
Unlike the slot, the width of the elongated hole is
determined by the diameter of the tool.
To avoid unnecessary travel, the cycle calculates the
most optimum path. If several depth infeed
movements are required to machine an elongated
hole, the infeed is performed at alternate end points.
The path to be traversed in the plane along the
longitudinal axis of the elongated hole changes
direction after every infeed. The cycle automatically
looks for the shortest path when changing to the
next elongated hole.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-118 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96 Milling Cycles
3.4 Elongated holes on a circle – LONGHOLE

Sequence of operations
Position reached prior to cycle start:
The starting position can be any position from which
each of the elongated holes can be approached
without collision.

The cycle implements the following motion

sequence:
• The starting position of a cycle is approached
with G0. The nearest end point of the first
elongated hole to be machined is approached in
both axes of the current plane at the retraction
plane level in the applicate of this plane and then
lowered in the applicate to the reference plane
brought forward by the safety distance.
• Each elongated hole is milled in a reciprocating
movement. Machining is performed in the plane
with G1 and the feedrate programmed under
FFP1. At each reversal point, the infeed to the
next machining depth calculated by the cycle is
performed with G1 and the feedrate FFD until
the final depth is reached.
• Retraction to the retraction plane with G0 and
approach to the next elongated hole along the
shortest path.
• When the last elongated hole has been
machined, the tool is traversed from the last
position reached in the machining plane to the
retraction plane with G0 and the cycle is
terminated.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-119
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
3.4 Elongated holes on a circle – LONGHOLE

Description of parameters
Y
CPA
See Subsection 2.1.2. (Drilling, Centering –
CYCLE81) for a description of parameters RTP, INDA
RFP, SDIS.

LE
See Section 3.2 for cycle setting data _ZSD[1].

N
STA1

G
DP and DPR (elongated hole depth)
The elongated hole depth can be defined as either

RA
D
absolute (DP) or relative (DPR) to the reference plane.

CPO
If it is entered as a relative value, the cycle automati-
cally calculates the correct depth on the basis of the
positions of the reference and retraction planes. X

NUM (number)
The number of elongated holes us determined with
the parameter NUM.

LENG (elongated hole length)

The elongated hole length is programmed under
LENG. If it is detected during the cycle run that this
length is less than the cutter diameter, then the cycle
is aborted with alarm 61105 "Cutter radius too large".

MID (infeed depth)

The maximum infeed depth is defined with this
parameter.
The depth infeed is performed by the cycle in equally
sized infeed steps. Using MID and the total depth,
the cycle automatically calculates this infeed which
lies between 0.5 x maximum infeed depth and the
maximum infeed depth. The minimum possible
number of infeed steps is used as the basis. _MID=0
means that the cut to pocket depth is made with one
infeed. The depth infeed commences at the
reference plane moved forward by the safety
distance (as a function of _ZSD[1]).

FFD and FFP1 (feedrate depth and plane)

Feedrate FFP1 is active for all traversing
movements performed in the plane at feedrate. FFD
is active for infeeds that are perpendicular to this
plane.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-120 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
08.97 Milling Cycles
3.4 Elongated holes on a circle – LONGHOLE

CPA, CPO and RAD (center point and radius)

The position of the circle in the machining plane is
defined by the center point (parameters CPA and CPO)
and the radius (parameter RAD). Only positive values
are permissible for the radius.

STA1 and INDA (start angle and indexing angle)

The arrangement of the elongated holes around the
circle is defined by these parameters.
If INDA=0 the indexing angle is calculated from the
number of elongated holes so that they are equally
distributed around the circle.

Further notes
A tool offset must be activated before the cycle is
called. Otherwise the cycle is aborted and alarm
61000 "No tool offset active" is output.

If incorrect values are assigned to the parameters

that determine the arrangement and size of the
elongated holes and thus cause mutual contour
violation of the elongated holes, the cycle is not
started. The cycle is aborted after the error message
61104 "Contour violation of slots/elongated holes"
is output.

During the cycle, the workpiece coordinate system is

shifted and rotated. The values in the workpiece
coordinate system are displayed on the actual value
display as if the longitudinal axis of the elongated
hole being machined were positioned on the first
axis of the current machining plane.
When the cycle is completed, the workpiece
coordinate system is again in the same position as it
was before the cycle was called.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-121
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
09.01
3.4 Elongated holes on a circle – LONGHOLE

Programming example
Machining elongated holes
Z Z
With this program you can machine 4 elongated A A-B
90°
holes 30mm in length and with a relative depth of
23mm (difference between the reference plane and
45°
the base of the elongated hole) that lie in a circle
with the center point Z45 Y40 and a radius of 20mm 20
in the YZ plane. The initial angle is 45 degrees, the
indexing angle is 90 degrees. The maximum infeed

45
depth is 6mm, the safety distance is 1mm.

30
B Y 23 X
40

N10 G19 G90 S600 M3 Specification of technology values

T10 D1
M6
N20 G0 Y50 Z25 X5 Approach starting position
N30 LONGHOLE (5, 0, 1, , 23, 4, 30, -> Cycle call
-> 40, 45, 20, 45, 90, 100 ,320, 6)
N40 M30 End of program

-> Must be programmed in a single block

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-122 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
04.00 Milling Cycles
3.5 Slots on a circle – SLOT1

3.5 Slots on a circle – SLOT1

Programming

SLOT1 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR, NUM, LENG, WID, CPA, CPO, RAD, STA1, INDA,
FFD, FFP1, MID, CDIR, FAL, VARI, MIDF, FFP2, SSF, _FALD, _STA2)

Parameters

RTP real Retraction plane (absolute)

RFP real Reference plane (absolute)
SDIS real Safety distance (enter without sign)
DP real Slot depth (absolute)
DPR real Slot depth relative to the reference plane (enter without sign)
NUM int Number of slots
LENG real Slot length (enter without sign)
WID real Slot width (enter without sign)
CPA real Center point of circle, abscissa (absolute)
CPO real Center point of circle, ordinate (absolute)
RAD real Radius of circle (enter without sign)
STA1 real Initial angle
INDA real Indexing angle
FFD real Feedrate for depth infeed
FFP1 real Feedrate for surface machining
MID real Maximum infeed depth for infeed (enter without sign)
CDIR int Milling direction for machining the slot
Value: 0...Down-cut milling (as spindle rotation)
1...Up-cut milling
2...with G2 (independent of spindle direction)
3...with G3
FAL real Final machining allowance on slot edge (enter without sign)
VARI int Machining type (enter without sign)
UNITS DIGIT:
Value: 0...Complete machining
1...Roughing
2...Finishing
TENS DIGIT:
Value: 0...Perpendicular with G0
1...Perpendicular with G1
3...Oscillation with G1
MIDF real Maximum infeed depth for finishing

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-123
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
04.00
3.5 Slots on a circle – SLOT1

FFP2 real Feedrate for finishing

SSF real Speed for finishing
_FALD real Final machining allowance on the base of slot
_STA2 real Maximum insertion angle for oscillation movement

The cycle requires a milling cutter with an "end tooth

cutting over center" (DIN 844).

Function
Cycle SLOT1 is a combined roughing-finishing cycle.

With this cycle you can machine slots arranged on a

circle. The longitudinal axis of the slots is arranged
radially. Unlike the elongated hole, a value is defined
for the slot width.

Sequence of operations
Position reached before the beginning of the cycle:
The starting position can be any position from which
each of the slots can be approached without G0 G0

collision.
G0
G0

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-124 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
10.00 Milling Cycles
3.5 Slots on a circle – SLOT1

The cycle implements the following motion

sequence:
• Travel to the position marked in the figure on the
right at the beginning of the cycle with G0 G0 G0
• Complete machining of a slot is performed in the
following stages: G0
G0
- Approach to reference plane brought forward
by the safety distance with G0.
- Infeed to the next machining depth as pro-
grammed under VAR1 and at feed value
FFD.
- Solid machining of the slot to the final
machining allowance on slot base and slot edge
at feed value FFP1.
Subsequent finishing at feed value FFP2 and
spindle speed SSF along the contour according
to the machining direction programmed
under CDIR.
- The vertical depth infeed of G0/G1
always takes place at the same position in the
machining plane until the final depth of the
is reached.
- With reciprocating machining, select the starting
point
so that the end point always reaches the same
position in the machining plane.
• Retract tool to retraction plane and move to next
slot with G0.
• At the end of machining the last groove, the tool
moves to the return plane with G0 and the cycle
ends.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-125
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
3.5 Slots on a circle – SLOT1

Description of parameters
Y
CPA

See Subsection 2.1.2. (Drilling, Centering –

CYCLE81) for a description of parameters RTP, INDA

RFP, SDIS.

LE
See Section 3.2 for cycle setting data _ZSD[1]. STA1

NG
WID
DP and DPR (slot depth)
The slot depth can be defined as either absolute (DP) or

RA
D

CPO
relative (DPR) to the reference plane. If it is entered as
a relative value, the cycle automatically calculates the
correct depth on the basis of the positions of the
reference and retraction planes. X

NUM (number)
The number of slots is determined with the parameter
NUM.

LENG and WID (slot length and slot width)

The shape of a slot in the plane is determined with
parameters LENG and WID. The milling cutter diameter
must be smaller than the slot width. Otherwise alarm
61105 "Cutter radius too large" will be activated and the
cycle aborted.
The milling cutter diameter must not be smaller than
half of the slot width. This is not checked.

CPA, CPO and RAD (center point and radius)

The position of the circle of holes in the machining
plane is defined by the center point (parameters CPA
and CPO) and the radius (parameter RAD). Only
positive values may be entered for the radius.
STA1 and INDA (start angle and indexing angle)
The arrangement of the slot on the circle is defined
by these parameters.
STA1 defines the angle between the positive direction
of the abscissa of the workpiece coordinate system
active before the cycle was called and the first slot.
Parameter INDA contains the angle from one slot to the
next.
If INDA=0, the indexing angle is calculated from the
number of slots so that they are arranged equally
around the circle.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-126 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
04.00 Milling Cycles
3.5 Slots on a circle – SLOT1

FFD and FFP1 (feedrate depth and plane)

Feedrate FFD is operative for vertical infeed to the
machining plane with G1 and for insertion with
oscillation motion.
Feedrate FFP1 is active for all movements in the plane
traversed at feedrate when roughing.

MID (infeed depth)

The maximum infeed depth is defined with this
parameter. The depth infeed is performed by the cycle
in equally sized infeed steps.
Using MID and the total depth, the cycle automatically
calculates this infeed which lies between 0.5 x
maximum infeed depth and the maximum infeed depth.
The minimum possible number of infeed steps is used
as the basis. MID=0 means that the cut to slot depth is
made with one infeed.
The depth infeed commences at the reference plane
moved forward by the safety distance (as a function of
_ZSD[1]).

CDIR (milling direction)

You define the slot machining direction in this
parameter.
Under parameter _CDIR the mill direction
• direct "2 for G2“ and "3 for G3“ or
• alternatively "up-cut milling“ or "down-cut milling“
can be programmed. Up-cut milling or down-cut
milling is determined within the cycle via the spindle
direction activated prior to the cycle call.
Up-cut milling Down-cut milling
M3 → G3 M3 → G2
M4 → G2 M4 → G3

FAL (final machining allowance at slot edge)

With this parameter you can program a final machining
allowance on the slot edge. FAL does not affect the
depth infeed. If the value of FAL is greater than allowed
for the specified width and the milling cutter used, FAL
is automatically reduced to the maximum possible
value. In the case of rough machining, milling is
performed with a reciprocating movement and depth
infeed at both end points of the slot.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-127
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
10.00
3.5 Slots on a circle – SLOT1

VARI, MIDF, FFP2 and SSF (machining type,

infeed depth, feedrate and speed)
You can define the type of machining with parameter
VARI.
Possible values are:
UNITS DIGIT
• 0=Complete machining in two parts
- Machining of the slot (SLOT1, SLOT2) or
pocket (POCKET1, POCKET2) to the final
machining allowance is performed at the
spindle speed programmed before the cycle
was called and with feedrate FFP1. Depth
infeed is defined with MID.
- Removing stock for the remaining final
machining allowance takes place at the spindle
speed reset by SSF and feed FFP2. The depth
infeed takes place with vertical indeed via
MIDF.
If MIDF=0, the infeed is equal to the final
depth.
If FFP2 is not programmed, feed FFP1 acts.
Similarly, if there is no message from SSF, i.e.
the speed programmed before cycle start is
active.
• 1=Roughing
The slot (SLOT1, SLOT2) or pocket (POCKET1,
POCKET2) is solid machined up to the finishing
allowance at the speed programmed before the
cycle call and feedrate FFP1. The depth infeed is
programmed in MID.
• 2=Finishing
The cycle requires that the slot (SLOT1, SLOT2) or
pocket (POCKET1, POCKET2) is already machined
to a remaining final machining allowance and that it
is only necessary to machine the final machining
allowance. If FFP2 and SSF are not programmed,
the feedrate FFP1 or the speed programmed before
the cycle call is active. Depth infeed takes place
with via MIDF with paraxial infeed.
In machining mode VARI=30 the edge finishing cut
is performed at the last roughing depth.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-128 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
10.00 Milling Cycles
3.5 Slots on a circle – SLOT1

TENS POINT (infeed)

• 0=Perpendicular with G0
• 1=Perpendicular with G1
• 3=Oscillation with G1
If another value is programmed for the parameter
VARI, the cycle aborts after output of the alarm
61102 "Operating mode not defined correctly".

Cutter diameter=Groove width (WID)

• With complete machining, finishing machining
only takes place on the base.
• In machining mode VARI=32 positioning is
paraxial in Z with G1 followed by finish-cutting
(infeed possible via MIDF).

_FALD (final machining allowance on slot base)

A separate final machining allowance on the base is
taken into account in roughing operations.
_STA2 (insertion angle)
Parameter _STA2 defines the maximum insertion
angle for the oscillation motion.
• Vertical insertion (VARI=0X, VARI=1X)
Vertical depth insertion is always performed at the
same position on the machining plane down to the
final depth of the slot.
• Insertion with oscillation on the center axis of
the slot (VARI=3X)
means that the mill center point oscillates along an
oblique linear path until it has reached the next
current depth. The maximum insertion angle is
programmed under _STA2, the length of the
oscillation path is calculated from
LENG-WID.
The oscillating depth infeed ends at the same point
as with vertical depth infeed motions, the starting
point in the plane is calculated accordingly. The
roughing operation begins in the plane once the
current depth is reached. The feedrate is
programmed under _FFD.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-129
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
04.00

Further notes
Contour violation
A tool offset must be activated before the cycle is
called. Otherwise the cycle is aborted with Alarm 61000
"No tool offset active".

If incorrect values are assigned to the parameters that

determine the arrangement and size of the slots and
thus cause mutual contour violation of the slots, the
cycle is not started. The cycle is aborted after the error
message
61104 "Contour violation of grooves/elongated holes".

During the cycle, the workpiece coordinate system is

shifted and rotated. The values in the workpiece
coordinate system displayed on the actual value
display are such that the longitudinal axis of the slot
that has just been machined corresponds to the first
axis of the current machining plane.

When the cycle is completed, the workpiece coordinate

system is again in the same position as it was before
the cycle was called.

Programming example
Slots
Z Z
A A-B
90°
This program produces the same arrangement of 4
slots on a circle as the program for elongated hole
machining (see Section 3.4). 45°

The slots have the following dimensions: 20

Length 30mm, width 15mm and depth 23mm. The
safety distance is 1mm, the final machining
45

allowance is 0.5mm, the milling direction is G2, the

30

maximum infeed in the depth is 10mm. The slots Y X

B 23
must be machined completely with an oscillating 40

insertion motion.

N10 G19 G90 S600 M3 Specification of technology values

N15 T10 D1
N17 M6
N20 G0 Y20 Z50 X5 Approach starting position
N30 SLOT1 (5, 0, 1, -23, , 4, 30, 15, -> Cycle call, parameters VARI, MIDF,
->40, 45, 20, 45, 90, 100, 320, 10, -> FFP2 and SSF omitted
->2, 0.5, 30, 10, 400, 1200, 0.6, 5)
N40 M30 End of program
-> Must be programmed in a single block

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-130 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
08.97 Milling Cycles
3.6 Circumferential slot – SLOT2

3.6 Circumferential slot – SLOT2

Programming

SLOT2 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR, NUM, AFSL, WID, CPA, CPO, RAD, STA1, INDA,
FFD, FFP1, MID, CDIR, FAL, VARI, MIDF, FFP2, SSF)

Parameters

RTP real Retraction plane (absolute)

RFP real Reference plane (absolute)
SDIS real Safety distance (enter without sign)
DP real Slot depth (absolute)
DPR real Slot depth relative to the reference plane (enter without sign)
NUM int Number of slots
AFSL real Angle for the slot length (enter without sign)
WID real Circumferential slot width (enter without sign)
CPA real Center point of circle, abscissa (absolute)
CPO real Center point of circle, ordinate (absolute)
RAD real Radius of circle (enter without sign)
STA1 real Initial angle
INDA real Indexing angle
FFD real Feedrate for depth infeed
FFP1 real Feedrate for surface machining
MID real Maximum infeed depth for infeed (enter without sign)
CDIR int Milling direction for machining the circumferential slot
Value: 2 (for G2)
3 (for G3)
FAL real Final machining allowance on slot edge (enter without sign)
VARI int Type of machining
Value: 0=Complete machining
1=Roughing
2=Finishing
MIDF real Maximum infeed depth for finishing
FFP2 real Feedrate for finishing
SSF real Speed for finishing

The cycle requires a milling cutter with an "end tooth

cutting over center" (DIN 844).

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-131
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
3.6 Circumferential slot – SLOT2

Function
Cycle SLOT2 is a combined roughing-finishing cycle.
With this cycle you can machine circumferential slots
arranged on a circle.

Sequence of operations
Position reached prior to cycle start:
The starting position can be any position from which G0
each of the slots can be approached without
collision.

The cycle implements the following motion G0

sequence:
• Travel to the position marked in the figure on the G0
right at the beginning of the cycle with G0.
• The circumferential slot is machined in the same
steps as a longitudinal slot.
• When a circumferential slot has been machined,
the tool is retracted to the retraction plane and
then moves to the next slot with G0.
• When the last slot has been machined, the tool
is traversed to the end position reached in the
machining plane specified in the display to the
retraction plane with G0 and the cycle is
terminated.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-132 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
08.97 Milling Cycles
3.6 Circumferential slot – SLOT2

Description of parameters
Y
CPA
See Subsection 2.1.2. (Drilling, Centering –
CYCLE81) for a description of parameters RTP,
INDA AFSL
RFP, SDIS.
STA1
See Section 3.5 (SLOT1) for a description of
parameters DP, DPR, FFD, FFP1, MID, CDIR, FAL,
VARI, MIDF, FFP2, SSF.
See Section 3.2 for cycle setting data _ZSD[1].

CPO
WID
NUM (number)
The number of slots is determined with the X
parameter NUM.

AFSL and WID (angle and circumferential slot

width)
With parameters AFSL and WID you define the
shape of a slot in the plane. The cycle checks
whether the slot width is violated with the active tool.
If this is the case, alarm
61105 "Cutter radius too large" is output
and the cycle is aborted.

CPA, CPO and RAD (center point and radius)

The position of the circle in the machining plane is
defined by the center point (parameters CPA and
CPO) and the radius (parameter RAD). Only positive
values are permissible for the radius.

STA1 and INDA (start angle and indexing angle)

The arrangement of circumferential slots on the
circle is defined by these parameters.

STA1 defines the angle between the positive

direction of the abscissa of the workpiece coordinate
system active before the cycle was called and the
first circumferential slot.

The INDA parameter contains the angle from one

circumferential slot to the next.
If INDA=0, the indexing angle is calculated from the
number of circumferential slots so that they are
arranged equally around the circle.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-133
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
08.97
3.6 Circumferential slot – SLOT2

Further notes
A tool offset must be activated before the cycle is
called. Otherwise the cycle is aborted and alarm
61000 "No tool offset active" is output. Contour violation

If incorrect values are assigned to the parameters

that determine the arrangement and size of the slots
and thus cause mutual contour violation of the slots,
the cycle is not started.
The cycle is aborted after the error message
61104 "Contour violation of slots/elongated holes"
is output.

During the cycle, the workpiece coordinate system is

shifted and rotated. The actual-value display in the
workpiece coordinate system is always displayed
such that the circumferential slot currently being
machined on the 1st axis of the current processing
level starts and the zero point of the workpiece
coordinate system lies in the center of the circle.
When the cycle is completed, the workpiece
coordinate system is again in the same position as it
was before the cycle was called.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-134 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96 Milling Cycles
3.6 Circumferential slot – SLOT2

Programming example
Y Y
Slots2
With this program you can machine 3 circumferential A-B
slots arranged on a circle whose center point is X60
A
Y60 and radius 42mm in the XY plane. The
70°
circumferential slots have the following dimensions:

15
Width 15mm, angle for slot length 70 degrees, depth 120°
23mm. The initial angle is 0 degrees, the indexing
angle is 120 degrees. The slot contours are

42
60
machined to a final machining allowance of 0.5mm,
the safety distance in infeed axis Z is 2mm, the B
maximum depth infeed is 6mm. The slots are to be X
60 Z
completely machined. The same speed and feedrate 23

are used for finishing. Infeed during finishing is

performed straight to the base of the slot.

DEF REAL FFD=100 Definition of variables with value

assignment
N10 G17 G90 S600 M3 Specification of technology values
N15 T10 D1
N17 M6
N20 G0 X60 Y60 Z5 Approach starting position
N30 SLOT2 (2, 0, 2, -23, , 3, 70, -> Cycle call
-> 15, 60, 60, 42, , 120, FFD, -> Reference plane+SDIS=retraction plane
-> FFD+200, 6, 2, 0.5) means: Lower in infeed axis with G0 to
reference plane+SDIS no longer
applicable, parameters VAR, MIDF,
FFP2 and SSF omitted
N40 M30 End of program

-> Must be programmed in a single block

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-135
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
08.97
3.7 Milling rectangular pockets – POCKET1

3.7 Milling rectangular pockets – POCKET1

Programming

POCKET1 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR, LENG, WID, CRAD, CPA, CPD, STA1, FFD,
FFP1, MID, CDIR, FAL, VARI, MIDF, FFP2, SSF)

Parameters

RTP real Retraction plane (absolute)

RFP real Reference plane (absolute)
SDIS real Safety distance (enter without sign)
DP real Pocket depth (absolute)
DPR real Pocket depth relative to the reference plane (enter without sign)
LENG real Pocket length (enter without sign)
WID real Pocket width (enter without sign)
CRAD real Corner radius (enter without sign)
CPA real Pocket center point, abscissa (absolute)
CPO real Pocket center point, ordinate (absolute)
STA1 real Angle between longitudinal axis and abscissa
Value range: 0<=STA1<180 degrees
FFD real Feedrate for depth infeed
FFP1 real Feedrate for surface machining
MID real Maximum infeed depth for infeed (enter without sign)
CDIR int Milling direction for machining the pocket
Value: 2 (for G2)
3 (for G3)
FAL real Final machining allowance on pocket edge (enter without sign)
VARI int Type of machining
Value: 0=Complete machining
1=Roughing
2=Finishing
MIDF real Maximum infeed depth for finishing
FFP2 real Feedrate for finishing
SSF real Speed for finishing

The cycle requires a milling cutter with an "end tooth

cutting over center" (DIN 844).

The pocket milling cycle POCKET3 can be performed

with any tool.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-136 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
08.97 Milling Cycles
3.7 Milling rectangular pockets – POCKET1

Function
The cycle is a combined roughing-finishing cycle.
With this cycle you can machine rectangular pockets
in any position in the machining plane.

Sequence of operations
Y
Position reached prior to cycle start:
This can be any position from which the starting
position on the center point of the pocket at the
retraction plane level can be approached without
collision.

G2
The cycle implements the following motion
sequence:
G3
• With G0, the pocket center point is approached
at the retraction plane level and then, from this
position, with G0 the reference plane brought
X
forward by the safety distance is approached.
Complete machining of the pocket is performed
in the following stages:
- Infeed to the next machining depth with G1
and feedrate FFD.
- Pocket milling up to the final machining
allowance with feedrate FFP1 and the spindle
speed that was active before the cycle was
called.
• After roughing is completed:
- Infeed to the machining depth defined by MIDF
- Final machining allowance along the contour
at feedrate FFP2 and speed SSF.
- The machining direction is defined by CDIR.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-137
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
08.97
3.7 Milling rectangular pockets – POCKET1

• When machining of the pocket is completed the tool

is traversed to the pocket center point on the
retraction plane and the cycle is terminated.

Description of parameters
Y

See Subsection 2.1.2. (Drilling, Centering – CPA

CYCLE81) for a description of parameters RTP,
RFP, SDIS.
STA1
CRAD
See Section 3.5 (SLOT1) for a description of
parameters FFD, FFP1, MID, CDIR, FAL, VARI, G2

NG
W
LE

ID
MIDF, FFP2, SSF. See Section 3.2 for cycle setting

CPO
G3
data _ZSD[1].

DP and DPR (pocket depth)

X
The pocket depth can be defined as either absolute
(DP) or relative (DPR) to the reference plane.
If it is entered as a relative value, the cycle
automatically calculates the correct depth on the
basis of the positions of the reference and retraction
planes.

LENG, WID and CRAD (length, width and radius)

The shape of a pocket in the plane is determined with
parameters LENG, WID and CRAD.
If it is not possible to traverse to the programmed corner
radius with the active tool because its radius is larger,
the corner radius of the completed pocket corresponds
to the tool radius. If the milling cutter radius is greater
than half the length or width of the pocket, the cycle is
aborted and alarm 61105 "Cutter radius too large" is
output.

CPA, CPO (center point)

With parameters CPA and CPO you define the center
point of the pocket in the abscissa and ordinate.

STA1 (angle)
STA1 defines the angle between the positive abscissa
and the longitudinal axis of the pocket.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-138 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96 Milling Cycles
3.7 Milling rectangular pockets – POCKET1

Further notes

A tool offset must be activated before the cycle is

called. Otherwise the cycle is aborted and alarm
61000 "No tool offset active" is output.
A new workpiece coordinate system that influences the
actual value display is used in the cycle. The zero point
of this coordinate system lies on the pocket center
point.
The original coordinate system becomes active again
after the end of the cycle.

Programming example
Pocket Y Y

With this program you can machine a pocket that is

60mm long, 40mm wide, 17.5mm deep (difference
A A-B
between the reference plane and the base of the
pocket) and which has a corner radius of 8mm in the
XY plane. The angle to the X axis is 0 degrees. The
final machining allowance of the pocket edges is
0.75mm, the safety distance in the Z axis, which is
R8
40

added to the reference plane, is 0.5mm. The center

B
point of the pocket lies at X60 and Y40, the
60 X Z
maximum depth infeed is 4mm. 17,5
Only roughing is to be performed.

DEF REAL LENG, WID, DPR, CRAD Definition of variables

DEF INT VARI
N10 LENG=60 WID=40 DPR=17.5 CRAD=8 Value assignments
N20 VARI=1
N30 G90 S600 M4 Specification of technology values
N35 T20 D2
N37 M6
N40 G17 G0 X60 Y40 Z5 Approach starting position
N50 POCKET1 (5, 0, 0.5, , DPR, -> Cycle call
-> LENG, WID, CRAD, 60, 40, 0, -> Parameters MIDF, FFP2 and SSF are
-> 120, 300, 4, 2, 0.75, VARI) omitted
N60 M30 End of program
-> Must be programmed in a single block

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-139
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
08.97
3.8 Milling circular pockets – POCKET2

3.8 Milling circular pockets – POCKET2

Programming
POCKET2 (RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR, PRAD, CPA, CPO, FFD, FFP1, MID, CDIR,
FAL, VARI, MIDF, FFP2, SSF)

Parameters

RTP real Retraction plane (absolute)

RFP real Reference plane (absolute)
SDIS real Safety distance (enter without sign)
DP real Pocket depth (absolute)
DPR real Pocket depth relative to the reference plane (enter without sign)
PRAD real Pocket radius (enter without sign)
CPA real Pocket center point, abscissa (absolute)
CPO real Pocket center point, ordinate (absolute)
FFD real Feedrate for depth infeed
FFP1 real Feedrate for surface machining
MID real Maximum infeed depth for infeed (enter without sign)
CDIR int Milling direction for machining the pocket
Value: 2 (for G2)
3 (for G3)
FAL real Final machining allowance on pocket edge (enter without sign)
VARI int Type of machining
Value: 0=Complete machining
1=Roughing
2=Finishing
MIDF real Maximum infeed depth for finishing
FFP2 real Feedrate for finishing
SSF real Speed for finishing

The cycle requires a milling cutter with an "end tooth

cutting over center" (DIN 844).

The pocket milling cycle POCKET4 can be performed

with any tool.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-140 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96 Milling Cycles
3.8 Milling circular pockets – POCKET2

Function
The cycle is a combined roughing-finishing cycle.
With this cycle you can machine circular pockets in
the machining plane.

Sequence of operations
Position reached prior to cycle start:
This can be any position from which the starting
position on the center point of the pocket at the
retraction plane level can be approached without
collision.
The cycle implements the following motion
sequence:
• With G0, the pocket center point is approached
at the retraction plane level and then, from this
position, with G0 the reference plane brought
forward by the safety distance is approached.
Complete machining of the pocket is performed
in the following stages:
- Infeed perpendicular to the pocket center
to the next machining depth with feedrate FFD.
- Pocket milling up to the final machining
allowance with feedrate FFP1 and the spindle
speed that was active before the cycle was
called.
• After roughing is completed:
- Infeed to the next machining depth defined by
MIDF.
- Final machining along the contour with
feedrate FFP2 and speed SSF.
- The machining direction is defined by CDIR.
• When machining is completed the tool is traversed
to the pocket center point in the retraction plane and
the cycle is terminated.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-141
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
08.97
3.8 Milling circular pockets – POCKET2

Description of parameters
Y

See Subsection 2.1.2. (Drilling, Centering – CPA

CYCLE81) for a description of parameters RTP,
RFP, SDIS. See Section 3.7 for a description of
parameters DP, DPR.
G3 G2
See Section 3.5 (SLOT1) for a description of

PR
parameters FFD, FFP1, MID, CDIR, FAL, VARI,

AD

CPO
MIDF, FFP2, SSF. See Section 3.2 for cycle setting
data _ZSD[1].

X
PRAD (pocket radius)
The shape of the circular pocket is determined by
the radius only.
If the radius is less than the tool radius of the active
tool, the cycle is aborted after alarm
61105 "Milling cutter radius too large" is output.

CPA, CPO (pocket center point)

With parameters CPA and CPO you define the
center point of the circular pocket in the abscissa
and ordinate.

Further notes

A tool offset must be activated before the cycle is

called. Otherwise the cycle is aborted and alarm
61000 "No tool offset active" is output.

The depth infeed is always made in the pocket center

point. It can be useful to drill there beforehand.

A new workpiece coordinate system that influences

the actual value display is used in the cycle. The
zero point of this coordinate system lies on the
pocket center point. The original coordinate system
becomes active again after the end of the cycle.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-142 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96 Milling Cycles
3.8 Milling circular pockets – POCKET2

Programming example
Z Z
Circular pocket
With this program you can machine a circular pocket A A-B
in the YZ plane. The center point is defined by Y50
Z50. The infeed axis for the depth infeed is the
X axis, the pocket depth is entered as an absolute
value. Neither a final machining allowance nor a

50
safety distance is defined.

50
B
Y X
50
20

DEF REAL RTP=3, RFP=0, DP=-20,-> Definition of variables with value

-> PRAD=25, FFD=100, FFP1, MID=6 assignment
N10 FFP1=FFD*2
N20 G19 G90 G0 S650 M3 Specification of technology values
N25 T10 D1
N27 M6
N30 Y50 Z50 Approach starting position
N40 POCKET2 (RTP, RFP, , DP, , PRAD, -> Cycle call
-> 50, 50, FFD, FFP1, MID, 3, ) Parameters FAL, VARI, MIDF, FFP2,
SSF are omitted
N50 M30 End of program

-> Must be programmed in a single block

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-143
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
08.97
3.9 Milling rectangular pockets – POCKET3

3.9 Milling rectangular pockets – POCKET3

The POCKET3 cycle is available as from SW 4.

Programming
POCKET3 (_RTP, _RFP, _SDIS, _DP, _LENG, _WID, _CRAD, _PA, _PO, _STA, _MID, _FAL,
_FALD, _FFP1, _FFD, _CDIR, _VARI, _MIDA, _AP1, _AP2, _AD, _RAD1, _DP1)

Parameters
The following input parameters are always required:
_RTP real Retraction plane (absolute)
_RFP real Reference plane (absolute)
_SDIS real Safety distance (to be added to the reference plane, enter without sign)
_DP real Pocket depth (absolute)
_LENG real Pocket length for dimensioning from the corner with sign
_WID real Pocket width for dimensioning from the corner with sign
_CRAD real Pocket corner radius (enter without sign)
_PA real Pocket reference point, abscissa (absolute)
_PO real Pocket reference point, ordinate (absolute)
_STA real Angle between the pocket longitudinal axis and the first axis of the plane
(abscissa, enter without sign);
Value range: 0° ≤ _STA < 180°
_MID real Maximum infeed depth (enter without sign)
_FAL real Final machining allowance on pocket edge (enter without sign)
_FALD real Final allowance at base (enter without sign)
_FFP1 real Feedrate for surface machining
_FFD real Feedrate for depth infeed
_CDIR int Milling direction: (enter without sign)
Value: 0...Down-cut milling (as spindle rotation)
1...Up-cut milling
2...with G2 (independent of spindle direction)
3...with G3
_VARI int Type of machining: (enter without sign)
UNITS DIGIT:
Value: 1...Roughing
2...Finishing

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-144 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
12.97 Milling Cycles
3.9 Milling rectangular pockets – POCKET3

TENS DIGIT:
Value: 0...Perpendicular to pocket center with G0
1...Perpendicular to pocket center with G1
2...Along a helix
3...Oscillating along the pocket longitudinal axis
The other parameters can be selected as options. They define the insertion strategy and
overlapping for solid machining: (enter without sign)
_MIDA real Maximum infeed width during solid machining in the plane
_AP1 real Basic size pocket length
_AP2 real Basic size pocket width
_AD real Basic pocket depth from reference plane
_RAD1 real Radius of the helical path on insertion (relative to the tool center point
path) or maximum insertion angle for oscillating motion
_DP1 real Insertion depth per 360° revolution on insertion along helical path

Function
The cycle can be applied to roughing and finishing.
For finishing, a face cutter is needed.
The depth infeed will always start at the pocket
center point and be performed vertically from there;
thus predrill can be suitably performed in this
position.

New functions compared to POCKET1:

• The milling direction can be defined with a
G instruction (G2/G3) or up-cut milling or down-
cut from the spindle direction
• For solid machining, the maximum infeed width
in the plane is programmable
• Finishing allowance for the pocket base
• Three different insertion strategies:
- Vertically at the pocket center point
- Along a helical path around the pocket center
- Oscillating around the pocket central axis
• Shorter approach paths in the plane for finishing
• Consideration of a blank contour in the plane and a
basic size at the base (optimum processing of pre-
formed pockets possible)

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-145
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
3.9 Milling rectangular pockets – POCKET3

Sequence of operations
Y
Position reached prior to cycle start:
This can be any position from which the starting
position on the center point of the pocket at the
retraction plane level can be approached without
collision.

Motion sequence when roughing (VARI=X1): G2

With G0, the pocket center point is approached at the
retraction plane level and then, from this position, with G3
G0 the reference plane brought forward by the safety
distance is approached. Pocket machining is then
performed according to the selected insertion strategy X
and considering the programmed base size.

Insertion strategies:
• Vertical insertion to pocket center (VARI=0X,
VARI=1X) means that the current infeed depth
internally calculated in the cycle (≤ programmed
maximum infeed depth through _MID) is executed
in one block with G0 or G1.
• Insertion along helical path (VARI=2X)
means that the milling center point travels on the
helical path determined by radius _RAD1 and depth
per revolution _DP1. The feedrate is always
programmed through _FFD. The sense of rotation
of this helical path corresponds to the direction to
be used for machining the pocket.
The depth programmed under _DP1 on insertion is
calculated as the maximum depth and is always
calculated as a whole number of revolutions of the
helical path.
When the current depth for the infeed (these may be
several revolutions on the helical path) has been
calculated, a full circle is made to remove the slope
on insertion.
Then pocket solid machining starts in this plane and
continues until reaching the finishing allowance.
The starting point of the helical path described is on
the pocket longitudinal axis in the "plus direction"
and reached with G1.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-146 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
08.97 Milling Cycles
3.9 Milling rectangular pockets – POCKET3

• Oscillating insertion on center axis of pocket

(VARI=3X)
means that the mill center point oscillates along an
oblique linear path until it has reached the next
current depth. The maximum insertion angle is
programmed under _RAD1, the position of the
oscillation path is calculated within the cycle. When
the current depth has been reached, the path is
traversed again without depth infeed in order to
remove the slope caused by insertion. The feedrate
is programmed through _FFD.

Accounting for blank dimensions

During solid machining, it is possible to take blank Y
dimensions (for example, in the machining of
precast workpieces) into account.
The basic size for the length and width (_AP1 and
_AP2) are programmed without sign and their
symmetrical positions around the pocket center
_AP1 basic size pocket length
computed in the cycle. They define the part of the
pocket that does not have to be solid machined. The
basic size for the depth (_AD) is also programmed
without a sign and computed in the direction of the
pocket depth from the reference plane.
Depth infeed to account for workpiece sizes is _AP2 basic size
X

carried out according to the programmed type pocket width

(helical path, oscillating, vertical). If the cycle

recognizes that by means of the blank contour and
the radius of the active tool there is enough room in
the pocket center, infeed takes place as long as
possible vertically downwards to the pocket center in
order to avoid time-consuming approach paths in the
open.
The pocket is solid machined beginning from the top
and proceeding in the downward direction.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-147
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
08.97
3.9 Milling rectangular pockets – POCKET3

Motion sequence when finishing (VARI=X2)

Finishing is performed in sequence from the edge
until reaching the finishing allowance on the base,
then the base is finished. If one of the finishing
allowances is equal to zero, this part of the finishing
process is skipped.
• Finishing on the edge
While finishing on the edge, the pocket is only
machined once.
For finishing on the edge the path includes one
quadrant reaching the corner radius. The radius
of this path is normally 2mm or, if "less room" is
available, equals the difference between the
corner radius and the mill radius.
If the finishing allowance on the edge is larger
than 2mm, the approach radius is increased
accordingly.
The depth infeed is performed with G0 in the
open towards the pocket center and the starting
point of the approach path is also reached with
G0.
• Finishing on the base
During finishing on the base, the machine
performs G0 towards the pocket center until
reaching a distance equal to pocket depth +
finishing allowance + safety distance. From this
point onwards, the tool is always fed in
vertically at the depth infeed feedrate (since a
tool with a front cutting edge is used for base
finishing).
The base surface of the pocket is machined
once.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-148 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
12.97 Milling Cycles
3.9 Milling rectangular pockets – POCKET3

Description of parameters
Pocket dimensioned from the center
Y

See Subsection 2.1.2. (Drilling, Centering – _PA

CYCLE81) for a description of parameters _RTP,

_RFP, _SDIS
See Section 3.7 for a description of parameter _DP. _STA
_CRAD
See Section 3.2 for cycle setting data _ZSD[1],
G2
_ZSD[2].

G
_W
EN

ID
_L

G
G3

_PO
_LENG, _WID and _CRAD (pocket length, pocket
width and corner radius)
The shape of a pocket in the plane is determined
X
with parameters _LENG, _WID and _CRAD.
The pocket can be dimensioned from the center or
from one corner point. When dimensioning from a Pocket dimensioned from one corner point
Y
corner point, use _LENG and _WID with sign.
If it is not possible to traverse to the programmed
corner radius with the active tool because its radius
is larger, the corner radius of the completed pocket
corresponds to the tool radius.

G
NE
If the milling cutter radius is greater than half the _L
G2
length or width of the pocket, the cycle is aborted
_W
IG

and alarm
G3
61105 "Cutter radius too large" is output.

_PO
_PA, _PO (reference point)
_PA X
The center point of the pocket in the abscissa and
ordinate is defined with parameters _PA and _PO.
This is either the pocket center point or a corner
point. The value of this parameter depends on cycle
setting data bit _ZSD[2]:
• 0 means pocket center point
• 1 means corner point
When dimensioning the pocket from a corner, the
length and width parameters must be entered with
sign (_LENG, _WID), thus completely defining the
position of the pocket.

_STA (angle)
_STA indicates the angle between the 1st axis of the
plane (abscissa) and the longitudinal axis of the pocket.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-149
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
08.97
3.9 Milling rectangular pockets – POCKET3

_MID (infeed depth)

With this parameter you determine the maximum infeed
depth when roughing.
The depth infeed is performed by the cycle in equally
sized infeed steps.
The cycle automatically calculates this infeed using _MID
and the total depth. The minimum possible number of
infeed steps is used as the basis.
_MID=0 means that the cut to pocket depth is made with
one infeed.
_FAL (final machining allowance at the edge)
The final machining allowance only affects machining
of the pocket in the plane at the edge.
When the final machining allowance ≥ tool diameter,
the pocket will not necessarily be machined
completely. The message
"Caution: Final machining allowance ≥ tool diameter"
is output but the cycle is continued.
_FALD (final machining allowance on the base)
For roughing, a separate final machining allowance is
considered on the base (POCKET1 does not normally
consider any finishing allowance).
_FFD and _FFP1 (infeed depth and plane)
Feedrate _FFD is used for insertion into the material.
Feedrate FFP1 is used for all movements in the plane
traversed at feedrate when machining.
_CDIR (milling direction)
The value for the machining direction of the pocket is
defined in this parameter.
Under parameter _CDIR the mill direction
• direct "2 for G2“ and "3 for G3“ or
• alternatively "up-cut milling“ or "down-cut milling“
can be programmed. Up-cut milling or down-cut
milling is determined within the cycle via the spindle
direction activated prior to the cycle call.
Up-cut milling Down-cut milling
M3 → G3 M3 → G2
M4 → G2 M4 → G3

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-150 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96 Milling Cycles
3.9 Milling rectangular pockets – POCKET3

_VARI (machining mode)

You can define the type of machining with parameter
_VARI.
Possible values are:
Units digit:
• 1=Roughing
• 2=Finishing
Tens digit (infeed):
• 0=Perpendicular to the pocket center with G0
• 1=Perpendicular to the pocket center with G1
• 2=Along a helical path
• 3=Oscillating along the pocket longitudinal axis
If another value has been programmed for
parameter _VARI, the cycle is aborted after alarm
61002 "Machining type incorrectly defined" is output.

_MIDA (max. infeed width)

With this parameter you define the maximum infeed
width for solid machining in the plane. In the same
way as the known calculation of the infeed depth
(equal distribution of the overall depth using the
largest possible value), the width is evenly divided,
using the value programmed in _MIDA as a
maximum value.
If this parameter is not programmed, or if its value is
0, the cycle uses 80 per cent of the mill diameter as
maximum infeed width.

Further notes
Applies if the width infeed determined from edge
machining is recalculated on reaching the full pocket
depth; otherwise, the width infeed calculated at the
start is retained for the full cycle.

_AP1, _AP2, _AD (blank dimension)

With the parameters _AP1, _AP2 and _AD you
define the blank dimension (incremental) of the
pocket in the horizontal and vertical planes.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-151
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
12.97
3.9 Milling rectangular pockets – POCKET3

_RAD1 (radius)
With the parameter _RAD1 you define the radius of
the helical path (i.e. the tool center point path) or the
maximum insertion angle for oscillation.

_DP1 (insertion depth)

With the parameter _DP1 you define the infeed
depth for insertion on the helical path.

Further notes

A tool offset must be activated before the cycle is

called. Otherwise the cycle is aborted and alarm
61000 "No tool offset active" is output.

A new workpiece coordinate system that influences

the actual value display is used in the cycle. The
zero point of this coordinate system lies on the
pocket center point.
The original coordinate system becomes active
again after the end of the cycle.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-152 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
12.97 Milling Cycles
3.9 Milling rectangular pockets – POCKET3

Programming example
Pocket Y Y

With this program you can machine a pocket that is

60mm long, 40mm wide, 17.5mm deep in the XY plane,
A A-B
and which has a corner radius of 8mm. The angle in
relation to the X axis is 0 degrees. The final machining
allowance of the pocket edges is 0.75mm, 0.2mm at the
base, the safety distance in the Z axis, which is added
to the reference plane, is 0.5mm. The center point of

R8
40
the pocket lies at X60 and Y40, the maximum depth
B
infeed is 4mm.
60 X Z
Up-cut milling uses the spindle rotation direction as 17,5
direction of machining.
Only roughing is to be performed.

N10 G90 S600 M4 Specification of technology values

N15 T10 D1
N17 M6
N20 G17 G0 X60 Y40 Z5 Approach starting position
N25 _ZSD[2]=0 Dimensioning the pocket via the center
point
N30 POCKET3 (5, 0, 0.5, -17.5, 60 -> Cycle call
-> 40, 8, 60, 40, 0, 4, 0.75, 0.2 ->
-> 1000, 750, 0, 11, 5)
N40 M30 End of program

-> Must be programmed in a single block

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-153
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
08.97
3.10 Milling circular pockets – POCKET4

3.10 Milling circular pockets – POCKET4

The cycle POCKET4 is available with SW 4 and later.

Programming
POCKET4 (_RTP, _RFP, _SDIS, _DP, _PRAD, _PA, _PO, _MID, _FAL, _FALD, _FFP1, _FFD,
_CDIR, _VARI, _MIDA, _AP1, _AD, _RAD1, _DP1)

Parameters
The following input parameters are always required:
_RTP real Retraction plane (absolute)
_RFP real Reference plane (absolute)
_SDIS real Safety distance (to be added to the reference plane, enter without sign)
_DP real Pocket depth (absolute)
_PRAD real Pocket radius
_PA real Pocket center point, abscissa (absolute)
_PO real Pocket center point, ordinate (absolute)
_MID real Maximum infeed depth (enter without sign)
_FAL real Final machining allowance on pocket edge (enter without sign)
_FALD real Final allowance at base (enter without sign)
_FFP1 real Feedrate for surface machining
_FFD real Feedrate for depth infeed
_CDIR int Milling direction: (enter without sign)
Value: 0...Up-cut milling (in spindle rotation direction)
1...Down-cut milling
2...with G2 (independent of spindle direction)
3...with G3
_VARI int Type of machining: (enter without sign)
UNITS DIGIT:
Value: 1...Roughing
2...Finishing
TENS DIGIT:
Value: 0...Perpendicular to the pocket center with G0
1...Perpendicular to the pocket center with G1
2...Along a helix

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-154 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
12.97 Milling Cycles
3.10 Milling circular pockets – POCKET4

The other parameters can be selected as options. They define the insertion strategy and
overlapping for solid machining: (enter without sign)
_MIDA real Maximum infeed width during solid machining in the plane
_AP1 real Basic size pocket radius
_AD real Basic pocket depth from reference plane
_RAD1 real Radius of the helical path during insertion related to the tool center point
path)
_DP1 real Insertion depth per 360° revolution on insertion along helical path

Function
With this cycle you can machine circular pockets in
the machining plane.
For finishing, a face cutter is needed.
The depth infeed will always start at the pocket
center point and be performed vertically from there;
thus predrill can be suitably performed in this
position.

New functions compared to POCKET2:

• The milling direction can be defined with a
G instruction (G2/G3) or up-cut milling or down-
cut from the spindle direction
• For solid machining, the maximum infeed width
in the plane is programmable
• Finishing allowance for the pocket base
• Two different insertion strategies:
- Vertically from the pocket center point
- Along a helical path around the pocket center
• Shorter approach paths in the plane for finishing
• Consideration of a blank contour in the plane
and a basic size at the base (optimum
processing of pre-formed pockets possible)
• _MIDA is recalculated when machining the
edge.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-155
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
12.97
3.10 Milling circular pockets – POCKET4

Sequence of operations
Y
Position reached prior to cycle start:
_PA
This can be any position from which the starting
position on the center point of the pocket at the
retraction plane level can be approached without
collision.
G3 G2
Motion sequence when roughing (VARI=X1):

_P
RA
With G0, the pocket center point is approached at the

_PO
retraction plane level and then, from this position, with
G0 the reference plane brought forward by the safety
distance is approached. Pocket machining is then
X
performed according to the selected insertion strategy
and considering the programmed base size.

Insertion strategies:
see Section 3.9 (POCKET3).

Accounting for blank dimensions

During solid machining, it is possible to take blank
dimensions (for example, in the machining of
precast workpieces) into account.
For circular pockets, the basic size _AP1 at the edge
is also circular (with a smaller radius than the pocket
radius).

For additional explanations see Section 3.9

(POCKET3).

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-156 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
08.97 Milling Cycles
3.10 Milling circular pockets – POCKET4

Motion sequence when finishing (VARI=X2):

Finishing is performed in sequence from the edge until
reaching the finishing allowance on the base, then the base
is finished. If one of the finishing allowances is equal to zero,
this part of the finishing process is skipped.
• Finishing on the edge
While finishing on the edge, the pocket is only
machined once. For finishing on the edge the path
includes one fourth of circle which reaches the
pocket radius. The radius of this path is less or equal
to 2mm or, if "less room" is available, equals the
difference between the pocket radius and the mill
radius.
The depth infeed is performed with G0 in the open
towards the pocket center and the starting point of
the approach path is also reached with G0.
• Finishing on the base
During finishing on the base, the machine performs
G0 towards the pocket center until reaching a
distance equal to pocket depth + finishing allowance
+ safety distance. From this point onwards, the tool is
always fed in vertically at the depth infeed feedrate
(since a tool with a front cutting edge is used for base
finishing).
The base surface of the pocket is machined once.

Description of parameters
Y
See Subsection 2.1.2. (Drilling, Centering –
_PA
CYCLE81) for a description of parameters _RTP,
_RFP, _SDIS
See Section 3.7 (POCKET1) for a description of
parameter _DP.
G3 G2
See Section 3.9 (POCKET3) for a description of
_P
RA

parameters _MID, _FAL, _FALD, _FFP1, _FFD, _CDIR,

D

_PO

_MIDA, _AP1, _AD, _RAD1, _DP1.

See Section 3.2 for cycle setting data _ZSD[1].

X
_PRAD (pocket radius)
The shape of the circular pocket is determined by
the radius only.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-157
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
10.00
3.10 Milling circular pockets – POCKET4

If the radius is less than the tool radius of the active

tool, the cycle is aborted after alarm
61105 "Milling cutter radius too large" is output.

_PA, _PO (pocket center point)

With parameters _PA and _PO you define the center
point of the pocket. Circular pockets are always
measured from the center.

_VARI (machining mode)

You can define the type of machining with parameter
_VARI.
Possible values are:
Units digit:
• 1=Roughing
• 2=Finishing
Tens digit (infeed):
• 0=Perpendicular to the pocket center with G0
• 1=Perpendicular to the pocket center with G1
• 2=Along a helical path
If another value has been programmed for
parameter _VARI, the cycle is aborted after alarm
61002 "Machining type incorrectly defined" is output.

Rough cutting only edge with POCKET4 (SW 5.3

or higher)
POCKET4 (circular pocket) can now machine only the
edge when rough-cutting.
Define the rough dimension in the depth (parameter _AD)
so that it is at least the same size as the pocket depth
(DP) minus the final machining allowance depth (_FALD).

Example:
Condition: depth calculation without including safety
distance (_ZSD[1]=1)
_RTP=0 reference plane
_SDIS=2 safety distance
_DP=-21 pocket depth
_FALD=1.25 depth allowance
à_AD≥19.75 rough dimension for depth must be
greater or equal to pocket depth
incremental minus depth allowance,
i.e. 21-1.25=19.75

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-158 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
08.97 Milling Cycles
3.10 Milling circular pockets – POCKET4

Further notes

A tool offset must be activated before the cycle is

called. Otherwise the cycle is aborted and alarm
61000 "No tool offset active" is output.

A new workpiece coordinate system that influences

the actual value display is used in the cycle. The
zero point of this coordinate system lies on the
pocket center point.
The original coordinate system becomes active
again after the end of the cycle.

Programming example
Z Z
Circular pocket
With this program you can machine a circular pocket A A-B
in the YZ plane. The center point is defined by Y50
Z50. The infeed axis for the depth infeed is the
X axis. Neither a final machining allowance nor a
safety distance is defined. The pocket will be
50

machined using down-cut milling. Infeed occurs

along a helical path.
50

B
Y X
50
20

N10 G19 G90 G0 S650 M3 Specification of technology values

N15 T20 D1
N17 M6
N20 Y50 Z50 Approach starting position
N40 M30 End of program

-> Must be programmed in a single block

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-159
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
05.98
3.11 Face milling – CYCLE71

3.11 Face milling – CYCLE71

The cycle CYCLE71 is available in SW 4 and later.

Programming
CYCLE71 (_RTP, _RFP, _SDIS, _DP, _PA, _PO, _LENG, _WID, _STA,_MID, _MIDA, _FDP,
_FALD, _FFP1, _VARI, _FDP1)

Parameters
The following input parameters are always required:
_RTP real Retraction plane (absolute)
_RFP real Reference plane (absolute)
_SDIS real Safety distance (to be added to the reference plane, enter without sign)
_DP real Depth (absolute)
_PA real Starting point, abscissa (absolute)
_PO real Starting point, ordinate (absolute)
_LENG real Rectangle length along the 1st axis, incremental.
The corner from which dimensions are measured is given by the plus/minus
sign.
_WID real Rectangle length along the 2nd axis, incremental.
The corner from which dimensions are measured is given by the plus/minus
sign.
_STA real Angle between the longitudinal axis of the rectangle and the first axis of the
plane (abscissa, enter without sign);
Value range: 0° ≤ _STA < 180°
_MID real Maximum infeed depth (enter without sign)
_MIDA real Maximum infeed width value for solid machining in the plane (enter without sign)
_FDP real Retraction travel in cutting direction (incremental, enter without sign)
_FALD real Final machining allowance in depth (incremental, enter without sign) In the
roughing mode, _FALD refers to the remaining material on the surface.
_FFP1 real Feedrate for surface machining
_VARI int Type of machining: (enter without sign)
UNITS DIGIT:
Value: 1...Roughing
2...Finishing
TENS DIGIT:
Value: 1...Parallel to the abscissa, in one direction
2...Parallel to the ordinate, in one direction
3...Parallel to the abscissa, with changing direction
4...Parallel to the ordinate, with changing direction
_FDP1 real Overrun travel in direction of plane infeed (incr., enter without sign)

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-160 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
12.97 Milling Cycles
3.11 Face milling – CYCLE71

Function
Y Y
With cycle CYCLE71, you can face mill any
_LENG _LENG
rectangular surface. The cycle differentiates
between roughing (machining the surface in several

_WID

_WID
steps until reaching the finishing allowance) and
finishing (end milling the surface in one step).
Maximum infeed can be defined in width and depth. X X
The cycle operates without cutter radius Y _LENG Y _LENG

compensation. The depth infeed is programmed in

the open.

_WID
_WID
X X

Possible machining strategies for face milling

Sequence of operations
Position reached prior to cycle start:
This can be any position from which the starting
position on the infeed point at the retraction plane
level can be reached without collision.

The cycle implements the following motion

sequence:
• G0 is applied to approach the infeed point on the
current position plane. The reference plane, shifted
forward by the safety distance, is then also
approached with G0 from this position. Then, also
with G0, infeed to machining plane. G0 is possible,
since infeed occurs in the open.
There are several roughing strategies (paraxial in
one direction or back and forth).
• Motion sequence when roughing (VARI=X1):
Roughing is possible on several planes according
to the programmed values _DP, _MID and _FALD.
Machining will be performed in the downward
direction, i.e. by removing stock on one plane at a
time, and then executing the next depth infeed in
open space (parameter_FDP).
The traversing paths for stock removal on the plane
are determined by the settings in parameters
_LENG, _WID, _MIDA, _FDP, _FDP1 and the

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-161
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
12.98
3.11 Face milling – CYCLE71

cutter radius of the active tool.

The first path to be milled is always selected so that
the infeed width is exactly _MIDA, and thus no
width exceeds the maximum possible value. The
tool center point thus does not always travel exactly
to the edge (only if _MIDA = mill radius). The
dimension by which the tool traverses outside the
edge always equals cutter diameter - _MIDA,
even when only 1 surface cut is performed, i.e.
surface width + overrun less than _MIDA. The other
paths for width infeed are calculated internally so
as to produce a uniform path width (<=_MIDA).

• Motion sequence when finishing (VARI=X2):

Y
When finishing, the surface is once milled in the
plane. The finishing allowance for roughing must
also be selected so that the remaining depth can _FDP

be machined in one pass with the finishing tool.

After each surface milling pass in the plane, the
tool retracts completely. The retraction travel is
programmed by the parameter _FDP.
• Machining in one direction stops at the finishing
allowance + safety distance and the next starting _FDP

point is reached at rapid traverse.

Roughing in one directions stops when reaching the
X
calculated infeed depth + safety distance. The Milling during finishing in one direction
infeed depth is performed towards the same point (type of machining 22)

as for roughing.
After finishing has been completed, the tool retracts
from the last position reached to the retraction
plane _RTP.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-162 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
12.98 Milling Cycles
3.11 Face milling – CYCLE71

Description of parameters
_LENG
Y
See Subsection 2.1.2. (Drilling, Centering – _MIDA
CYCLE81) for a description of parameters _RTP,

_MIDA
_RFP, _SDIS
See Section 3.9 (POCKET3) for a description of
parameters _STA, _MID, _FFP1.

_WID
See Section 3.2 for cycle setting data _ZSD[1].

_DP (depth)
The depth can be defined as an absolute value

_FDP
(_DP) in relation to the reference plane. Infeed point
X
Roughing with _MIDA larger than mill radius
_PA, _PO (starting point) (Type of machining 41)
With parameters _PA and _PO you define the starting
point of the surface in the abscissa and ordinate.

_LENG, _WID (length)

With parameters _LENG and _WID you determine
the length and width of the rectangle in the plane.
The sign determines the position of the rectangle
relative to _PA and _PO.

_MIDA (max. infeed width)

With this parameter, you define the maximum infeed
width for solid machining in the plane. In the same
way as the known calculation of the infeed depth
(equal distribution of the overall depth using the
largest possible value), the width is evenly divided,
using the value programmed in _MIDA as a
maximum value.
If this parameter is not programmed, or if its value is
0, the cycle uses 80 percent of the mill diameter as
maximum infeed width.

_FDP (retraction travel)

This parameter defines the dimension for retraction
travel in the plane. This parameter should reasonably
always be larger than zero.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-163
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
12.98
3.11 Face milling – CYCLE71

_FDP1 (overrun travel)

By means of this parameter an overrun travel in the
direction of the plane infeed may be defined (_MIDA)
allowing the deviation between the current cutter radius Mill diameter from tool table
and the cutting edge (e.g. tool nose radius or inclined
cutting tips) to be compensated. The last cutter center
point path therefore always corresponds to _LENG (or
_WID) + _FDP1 tool radius (from correction table). _FDP1

_FALD (final machining allowance) Surface

During roughing, the depth finishing allowance used
is defined by this parameter.
The residual material designated as the finishing
allowance must always be specified for finish cutting
so as to ensure that the tool can be lifted and
inserted at the starting point of the next cut without
risk of collision.

_VARI (machining mode)

You can define the type of machining with parameter
_VARI.
Possible values are:
Units digit:
1=Roughing to final machining allowance
2=Finishing
Tens digit:
• 1=Parallel to the abscissa, in one direction
• 2=Parallel to the ordinate, in one direction
• 3=Parallel to the abscissa, with changing
direction
• 4=Parallel to the ordinate, with changing
direction
If another value has been programmed for
parameter _VARI, the cycle is aborted after alarm
61002 "Machining type incorrectly defined" is output.

Further notes
A tool offset must be activated before the cycle is
called. Otherwise the cycle is aborted and alarm
61000 "No tool offset active" is output.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-164 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
05.98 Milling Cycles
3.11 Face milling – CYCLE71

Programming example
Face milling
Parameters for cycle call:
• Retraction plane: 10mm
• Reference plane: 0mm
• Safety distance: 2mm
• Milling depth: -11mm
• Max. infeed depth 6mm
• No final machining allowance
• Starting point of the rectangle X = 100mm
Y = 100mm
• Rectangle dimensions X = +60mm
Y = +40mm
• Angle of rotation in the plane 10 degrees
• Max. infeed width 10mm
• Retraction travel at the end of the
milling path: 5mm
• Feedrate for surface machining 4000mm/min
• Type of machining: roughing parallel
to the X axis with changing direction
• Overrun on last cut as determined by
the cutting edge geometry 2mm
%_N_TSTCYC71_MPF Program for face milling with CYCLE71
;$PATH=/_N_MPF_DIR
;*
$TC_DP1[1,1]=120 Tool type
$TC_DP6[1,1]=10 Tool radius
N100 T1
N102 M06
N110 G17 G0 G90 G54 G94 F2000 X0 Y0 Approach starting position
Z20
;
CYCLE71( 10, 0, 2,-11, 100, 100, -> Cycle call
-> 60, 40, 10, 6, 10, 5, 0, 4000, 31, 2)
N125 G0 G90 X0 Y0
N130 M30 End of program
-> Must be programmed in a single block

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-165
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
12.98
3.12 Path milling – CYCLE72

3.12 Path milling – CYCLE72

The cycle CYCLE72 is available with SW 4
(not for FM-NC).

Programming
CYCLE72 (_KNAME, _RTP, _RFP, _SDIS, _DP, _MID, _FAL, _FALD, _FFP1, _FFD, _VARI, _RL,
_AS1, _LP1, _FF3, _AS2, _LP2)

Parameters
The following input parameters are always required:
_KNAME string Name of the contour subroutine
_RTP real Retraction plane (absolute)
_RFP real Reference plane (absolute)
_SDIS real Safety distance (to be added to the reference plane, enter without sign)
_DP real Depth (absolute)
_MID real Maximum infeed depth (incremental, enter without sign)
_FAL real Final machining allowance at the edge contour (enter without sign)
_FALD real Final machining allowance at the base (incremental, enter without sign)
_FFP1 real Feedrate for surface machining
_FFD real Feedrate for depth infeed (enter without sign)
_VARI int Type of machining: (enter without sign)
UNITS DIGIT:
Value: 1...Roughing
2...Finishing
TENS DIGIT:
Value: 0...Intermediate paths with G0
1...Intermediate paths with G1
HUNDREDS DIGIT:
Value: 0...Return at end of contour to _RTP
1...Return at end of contour to _RFP + _SDIS
2...Return at end of contour to _SDIS
3...No return to end of contour
_RL int Contouring is centric, on right or left (with G40, G41 or G42, enter
without sign)
Value: 40...G40 (approach and return, straight line only)
41...G41
42...G42

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-166 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
12.98 Milling Cycles
3.12 Path milling – CYCLE72

_AS1 int Specification of approach direction/path: (enter without sign)

UNITS DIGIT:
Value: 1...Straight tangential line
2...Quadrant
3...Semicircle
TENS DIGIT:
Value: 0...Approach to the contour in the plane
1...Approach to the contour along a spatial path
_LP1 real Length of the approach travel (along a straight line) or radius of the mill
center path of the arc of approach (along a circle) (enter without sign)
The other parameter can be preset optionally
(enter without sign).
_FF3 real Return feedrate and feedrate for intermediate positioning in the plane
(when retracting)
_AS2 int Specification of return direction/path: (enter without sign)
UNITS DIGIT:
Value: 1...Straight tangential line
2...Quadrant
3...Semicircle
TENS DIGIT:
Value: 0...Return to the contour in the plane
1...Return to the contour along a spatial path
_LP2 real Length of the return travel (along a straight line) or radius of the return arc
(along a circle) (enter without sign)

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-167
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
12.98
3.12 Path milling – CYCLE72

Function
Y
With the cycle CYCLE72 it is possible to mill along
any contour defined in a subroutine. The cycle
operates with or without cutter radius compensation.
The contour does not need to be closed; internal or Contour starting point
external machining is defined by the position of the
cutter radius compensation (center, on left or right of
contour).
The contour must be programmed in the
direction of milling and must be in the same
plane. In addition, its must consist of at least 2
contour blocks (start and end points) since the X
contour subroutine is invoked within the cycle.

Cycle functions:
• Selection of roughing (single-pass parallel to the
contour considering a finishing allowance if
necessary at several depths until reaching the final
machining allowance) and finishing (single-pass of
final contour, if necessary at several depths)
• Flexible approach and retraction to/from the contour
either tangentially or radially (quadrant or
semicircle)
• Programmable depth infeed
• Intermediate motions either with rapid traverse
or at feedrate

The requirement for executing a cycle is an NC SW

4.3. or higher that includes the function "Soft
approach and return".

Sequence of operations
Position reached prior to cycle start:
The starting position can be any position from which
the start of the contour at the retraction plane level
can be reached without collision.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-168 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
12.98 Milling Cycles
3.12 Path milling – CYCLE72

The cycle creates the following motion sequence

when roughing (VARI=XX1):
The depth infeeds are divided evenly using the
highest possible value according to the preset
parameter.
• Travel to starting point for initial cut with G0/G1
(and _FF3). This point is calculated internally in
the control and depends on
- the contour starting point (first point in
subroutine),
- the direction of the contour at the starting point,
- the approach mode and corresponding
parameters and
- the tool radius.
The cutter radius path compensation is activated
in this block.
• Depth infeed to first or next machining depth
plus programmed safety distance DISCL with
G0/G1. The first processing depth is given by
- the overall depth,
- the final machining allowance and
- the maximum possible depth infeed.
• Approach the contour perpendicular to the feed
depth and approach in the plane then at the
feedrate programmed for surface machining, or
programmed under _FAD for 3D machining
corresponding to the programming for soft
approach.
• Milling along the contour with G40/G41/G42.
• Soft retraction from the contour with G1 and still
with the feedrate for surface machining by lift
DISCL.
• Retraction with G0 /G1 (and feedrate for
intermediate travel _FF3) depending on
program.
• Return to depth infeed point with G0/G1 (and
_FF3).
• This operating sequence is repeated on the next
machining plane, until reaching the final
machining allowance in depth.
When roughing is over, the tool lies on the contour
starting point (calculated within the control unit) at
the retraction plane level.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-169
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
12.97
3.12 Path milling – CYCLE72

The cycle creates the following motion sequence

when finishing (VARI=XX2):
During finishing, milling is performed at the relevant
infeed along the base of the contour until the final
dimension is reached.
Approaching and retraction to/from the contour is
performed in a flexible way according to the
corresponding preset parameters. The corresponding
path is calculated within the control unit.
At the end of the cycle, the tool is positioned at the
contour retraction point at the retraction plane level.

Contour programming
For programming the contour, please note the
following:
• In the subroutine no programmable frame
(TRANS, ROT, SCALE, MIRROR) may be
selected before the first programmed position.
• The first block of the contour subroutine is a
straight line block containing G90, G0 and
defines the contour start.
• The cutter radius compensation is selected and
deselected from the upper level cycle; then the
contour subroutine has no G40, G41, G42
programmed.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-170 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
08.99 Milling Cycles
3.12 Path milling – CYCLE72

Description of parameters
Z

See Subsection 2.1.2. (Drilling, Centering –

CYCLE81) for a description of parameters _RTP,
_RFP, _SDIS

See Section 3.9 for a description of parameters _MID,

_FAL, _FALD, _FFP1, _FFD and Section 3.11 for
parameter _DP. Reference plane _RFP

See Section 3.2 for cycle setting data _ZSD[1].

Finishing allowance depth _FALD

Final machining allowance _DP

_KNAME (name)
X
The contour to be milled is completely programmed in a
subroutine. With parameter _KNAME you can define
the name of the contour subroutine.

In SW 5.2 and later, the milling contour can also be a

section of the calling routine or from any other program.
The section is identified by start or end labels or by
block numbers. In this case, the program name and
labels/block number are identified by an ":".

Examples:
_KNAME=“CONTOUR_1“ The milling contour is the complete program
"Contour_1".
_KNAME=“START:END“ The milling contour is defined as the section
starting from the block labeled START to the
block labeled END in the calling routine.
_KNAME= The milling contour is defined in blocks N130
"/_N_SPF_DIR/_N_CONTOUR_1_SPF:N130:N210" to N210 in program CONTOUR_1. The
program name must be entered complete
with path and extension, see description of
call in References: /PGA/ Programming
Guide Advanced.
If the section is defined by block numbers, it must be
noted that these block numbers for the section in
_KNAME must be adjusted if the program is modified
and subsequently renumbered.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-171
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
12.98
3.12 Path milling – CYCLE72

_VARI (machining mode) Contouring on the right or left

You can define the type of machining with parameter
_AS1/_AS2 Approach/retraction
_VARI. For possible values, see "Parameter to/from the contour with
straight line
CYCLE72".
If another value has been programmed for
parameter _VARI, the cycle is aborted after alarm
61002 "Machining type incorrectly defined" is
output. _

Approach/retraction from
the contour in quadrant
_RL (travel around the contour)
Parameter _RL is set to define how the tool must
_AS1/_AS2
travel around the contour, i.e. along the center path
or on the left or right-hand side with G40, G41 or
G42. See "Parameter CYCLE72" for possible Approach/retraction
settings. to/from the contour in
semi-circle

_AS1, _AS2 (direction of approach/approach travel, _AS1/_AS2

direction of retraction/retraction travel)
With the parameter _AS1 you can specify the approach
travel and with _AS2 the retraction travel. For possible
values, see "Parameter CYCLE72". If _AS2 is not Contouring the center
programmed, then the behavior programmed for the _AS1/_AS2 Approach/retraction
approach path will apply to the return path. to/from the contour with
The flexible approach of the contour along a 3D path straight line

(helix or straight line) should be programmed only if the

tool is suitable and not yet engaged.

With center path travel (G40), tool must approach and

return along a straight line.

_LP1, _LP2 (length, radius)

Parameter _LP1 is set to program the approach path or
approach radius (distance between tool outer edge and
contour starting point) and _LP2 to program the return
path or return radius (distance between tool outer edge
and end point of contour).
Parameters _LP1, _LP2 must be set to >0. A setting
of zero generates error message 61116 "Approach
or retract path=0.“

When G40 is programmed, the approach or retract path

corresponds to the distance between the tool center
point and the starting or end point of the contour.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-172 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
12.98 Milling Cycles
3.12 Path milling – CYCLE72

_FF3 (retraction feedrate)

Parameter _FF3 is used to define a retraction feedrate
for intermediate positioning in the plane (in the open)
when intermediate motions are to be performed with
feed (G01). If no feedrate is programmed, the
intermediate motions are carried out with surface feed
for G01.

Further notes

A tool offset must be activated before the cycle is

called. Otherwise the cycle is aborted and alarm
61000 "No tool offset active" is output.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-173
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
12.98
3.12 Path milling – CYCLE72

Programming example 1 Y Contour starting point

Programmed
Milling a closed contour externally contour direction
This program is used to mill a contour as shown in
the figure.

Parameters for cycle call:

• Retraction plane 250mm
• Reference plane 200
• Safety distance 3mm Final contour
Final contour + final
• Depth 175mm machining allowance
• Maximum depth infeed 10mm
• Final machining allowance in depth 1.5mm
X
• Feedrate depth infeed 400mm/min
• Final machining allowance in the
plane 1mm
• Feedrate in the plane 800mm/min
• Machining: Roughing up to the finishing allowance,
intermediate travel with G1, during the intermediate
motions, return along Z to _RFP + _SDIS

Parameters for the approach:

• G41 - to the left of the contour, i.e. external
machining
• Approach and return on quadrant
in plane 20mm radius
• Retraction feedrate 1000mm/min

%_N_RANDKONTUR1_MPF Program for re-milling a contour with

;$PATH=/_N_MPF_DIR CYCLE72
N10 T20 D1 T20: milling cutter with radius 7
N15 M6 Changing tool T20
N20 S500 M3 F3000 Program feedrate and spindle speed
N25 G17 G0 G90 X100 Y200 Z250 G94 Approach starting position
N30 CYCLE72 ( "MYKONTUR", 250, 200, -> Cycle call
-> 3, 175, 10,1, 1.5, 800, 400, 111, ->
-> 41, 2, 20, 1000, 2, 20)
N90 X100 Y200
N95 M02 End of program
-> Must be programmed in a single block

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-174 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
08.99 Milling Cycles
3.12 Path milling – CYCLE72

%_N_MYKONTUR_SPF Subroutine for contour milling (for example)

;$PATH=/_N_SPF_DIR
N100 G1 G90 X150 Y160 Start point of contour
N110 X230 CHF=10
N120 Y80 CHF=10
N130 X125
N140 Y135
N150 G2 X150 Y160 CR=25
N160 M17

Programming example 2 (SW 5.2 and later)

Milling round the outside of a closed contour as
described in sample program 1, with the contour
defined in the calling program
$TC_DP1[20,1]=120 STC_DP6[20,11]=7
N10 T20 D1 T20: milling cutter with radius 7
N15 M6 Changing tool T20
N20 S500 M3 F3000 Program feedrate and spindle speed
N25 G17 G0 G90 G94 X100 Y200 Z250 -> Approach starting position, cycle call
CYCLE72 ( "START:END", 250, 200, ->
-> 3, 175, 10,1, 1.5, 800, 400, 11, ->
-> 41, 2, 20, 1000, 2, 20)
N30 G0 X100 Y200
N35 GOTOF END
START:
N100 G1 G90 X150 Y160
N110 X230 CHF=10
N120 Y80 CHF=10
N130 X125
N140 Y135
N150 G2 X150 Y160 CR=25
END:
N160 M02

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-175
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
04.00
3.13 Milling rectangular spigots – CYCLE76 (SW 5.3 and later)

3.13 Milling rectangular spigots – CYCLE76 (SW 5.3 and later)

Programming
CYCLE76 (_RTP, _RFP, _SDIS, _DP, _DPR, _LENG, _WID, _CRAD, _PA, _PO, _STA, _MID,
_FAL, _FALD, _FFP1, _FFD, _CDIR, _VARI, _AP1, _AP2)

Parameters
The following input parameters are always required:
_RTP real Retraction plane (absolute)
_RFP real Reference plane (absolute)
_SDIS real Safety distance (to be added to the reference plane, enter without sign)
_DP real Depth (absolute)
_DPR real Depth relative to the reference plane (enter without sign)
_LENG real Spigot length, for dimensioning from corner with sign
_WID real Spigot width, for dimensioning from corner with sign
_CRAD real Spigot corner radius (enter without sign)
_PA real Spigot reference point, abscissa (absolute)
_PO real Spigot reference point, ordinate (absolute)
_STA real Angle between longitudinal axis and 1st axis of plane
_MID real Maximum depth infeed (incremental, enter without sign)
_FAL real Final machining allowance on edge contour (incremental)
_FALD real Final machining allowance at the base (incremental, enter without sign)
_FFP1 real Feedrate on contour
_FFD real Feedrate for depth infeed
_CDIR int Milling direction: (enter without sign)
Value: 0...Upcut milling
1...Downcut milling
2 with G2 (irrespective of spindle direction)
3...with G3
_VARI int Type of machining:
Value: 1...Roughing to final machining allowance
2...Finishing (allowance X/Y/Z=0)
_AP1 real Length of blank spigot
_AP2 real Width of blank spigot

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-176 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
04.00 Milling Cycles
3.13 Milling rectangular spigots – CYCLE76 (SW 5.3 and later)

Function
With this cycle you can machine rectangular spigots
in the machining plane. For finishing, a face cutter is
needed. Depth infeed is always performed in the
position reached prior to semicircular positioning on
the contour.

Sequence of operations
Position reached prior to cycle start:
The starting point is a position in the positive range of
the abscissa with integrated approach semicircle and
allowance for programmed, abscissa-related blank
dimension.

Sequence of motions for roughing (_VARI=1)

Approach to and exit from contour: Approach to and retraction from the contour in a
semicircle with spindle rotating clockwise and
The retraction plane (_RTP) is approached in rapid
climb milling
traverse so that the tool can be positioned from there on
the starting point in the machining plane. The starting Y
point is defined as being 0 degrees in relation to the
abscissa. Approach to contour
The tool is fed in at rapid traverse to the safety distance
(_SDIS) and then traverses to machining depth at
normal feedrate. The tool approaches the spigot X
contour along a semicircular path.
The milling direction can be defined as up-cut or down- Retraction from contour
cut milling in relation to the spindle direction.
If the spigot has been circumnavigated once, the tool
lifts off the contour in the plane along a semicircular
path and is then fed in to the next machining depth.
The contour is then approached again along a
semicircle and the spigot circumnavigated once. This
process is repeated until the programmed spigot depth
is reached. The tool then approaches the retraction
plane (_RTP) in rapid traverse.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-177
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
04.00
3.13 Milling rectangular spigots – CYCLE76 (SW 5.3 and later)

Depth infeed:
• Infeed to safety distance
• Insertion to machining depth
The first machining depth is the product of:
• the total depth,
• the final machining allowance and
• the maximum possible depth infeed.

Sequence of motions for finishing (VARI=X2)

Depending on the setting of parameters _FAL and
_FALD, a finishing operation is performed on the spigot
surface or base or both. The approach strategy
matches the motions in the plane executed for roughing
operations.

Description of parameters Spigot dimensioned from center point

Y
_PA
See Subsection 2.1.2. (Drilling, Centering –
CYCLE81) for a description of parameters RTP,
RFP, SDIS, DP, DPR.
_STA
See Section 3.9 for a description of parameters _CRAD
_MID, _FAL, _FALD, _FFP1, _FFD.
See Section 3.2 for cycle setting data _ZSD[2].
G
EN
_W
_L

ID

_LENG, _WID and _CRAD (spigot length, spigot

_PO
width and corner radius)
The shape of a spigot in the plane is determined with
parameters _LENG, _WID and _CRAD. X
The spigot can be dimensioned from the center or
from one corner point. When dimensioning from a Spigot dimensioned from corner point
Y
corner point, use _LENG and _WID with sign.
The absolute length value (_LENG) always refers to
the abscissa (with a plane angle of zero degrees).

_PA, _PO (reference point)

_STA
G

Parameters _PA and _PO are set to define the

EN
_L

reference point of the spigot in abscissa and ordinate.

This is either the spigot center point or a corner
_W

point. The value of this parameter depends on cycle

ID

setting data bit _ZSD[2]:

_PO

• 0 means spigot center point

• 1 means corner point _PA X
When the spigot is dimensioned from a corner, the
length and width parameters must be entered with sign

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-178 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
04.00
12.97 Milling Cycles
3.13 Milling rectangular spigots – CYCLE76 (SW 5.3 and later)

(_LENG, _WID) so that a unique position for the spigot

is defined.

_STA (angle)
_STA specifies the angle between the 1st axis of the
plane (abscissa) and the longitudinal axis of the spigot.

_CDIR (milling direction)

The machining direction of the spigot is defined in this
parameter.
Under parameter _CDIR the mill direction
• direct "2 for G2“ and "3 for G3“ or
• alternatively "Up-cut milling“ or "down-cut milling“
can be programmed. Up-cut milling or down-cut
milling is determined within the cycle via the spindle
direction activated prior to the cycle call.
Up-cut Down-cut
M3 → G3 M3 → G2
M4 → G2 M4 → G3

_VARI (machining mode)

You can define the type of machining with parameter
_VARI.
Possible values are:
• 1=Roughing
• 2=Finishing

_AP1, _AP2 (blank dimensions) Y

Blank dimensions (e.g. in the case of precast
workpieces) can be taken into account in machining
of the spigot.
The basic size for the length and width (_AP1 and
_AP2
_AP2) are programmed without sign and their
symmetrical positions around the spigot center
computed in the cycle. The internally calculated _AP1
radius of the approach semicircle is dependent on
this dimension. X

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-179
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
10.00
3.13 Milling rectangular spigots – CYCLE76 (SW 5.3 and later)

Further notes
A tool offset must be activated before the cycle is
called. The cycle is otherwise aborted with alarm 61009
"Active tool number=0".
A new workpiece coordinate system that influences the
actual value display is used in the cycle. The zero point
of this coordinate system lies on the pocket center
point.
The original coordinate system becomes active
again after the end of the cycle.

Programming example
Spigots Y Y

This program allows you to machine a spigot that is

60mm long, 40mm wide, 15mm deep in the XY plane
A A-B
and with a corner radius of 15mm. The spigot has an
P1
angle of 10 degrees in relation to the X axis and is
programmed from a corner point P1. When a spigot is
dimensioned with reference to corners, the length and R15 10°
60

width must be entered with a sign to define a unique

position for the spigot. The spigot is premachined with
B
an allowance of 80mm in its length and 50mm in its
80 X Z
width. 17,5

N10 G90 Go G17 X100 Y100 T20 D1 S3000 M3 Specification of technology values
N20 _ZSD[2]=1 Dimensioning of spigot referred to
corners
N30 CYCLE76 (10, 0, 2, -17.5, , -60, -> Cycle call
-> -40, 15, 80, 60, 10, 11, , , 900, ->
-> 800, 0, 1, 80, 50)
N40 M30 End of program

-> Must be programmed in a single block

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-180 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
04.00 Milling Cycles
3.14 Milling circular spigots – CYCLE77 (SW 5.3 and later)

3.14 Milling circular spigots – CYCLE77 (SW 5.3 and later)

Programming
CYCLE77 (_RTP, _RFP, _SDIS, _DP, _DPR, _PRAD, _PA, _PO, _MID, _FAL, _FALD, _FFP1,
_FFD, _CDIR, _VARI, _AP1)

Parameters
The following input parameters are always required:
_RTP Real Retraction plane (absolute)
_RFP Real Reference plane (absolute)
_SDIS Real Safety distance (to be added to the reference plane, enter without sign)
_DP Real Depth (absolute)
_DPR Real Depth relative to the reference plane (enter without sign)
_PRAD Real Diameter of spigot (enter without sign)
_PA Real Spigot center point, abscissa (absolute)
_PO Real Spigot center point, ordinate (absolute)
_MID Real Maximum depth infeed (incremental, enter without sign)
_FAL Real Final machining allowance on edge contour (incremental)
_FALD Real Final machining allowance at the base (incremental, enter without sign)
_FFP1 Real Feedrate on contour
_FFD Real Feedrate for depth infeed (or spatial infeed)
_CDIR Int Milling direction: (enter without sign)
Value: 0...Upcut milling
1...Downcut milling
2 with G2 (irrespective of spindle direction)
3...with G3
_VARI Int Type of machining
Value: 1...Roughing to final machining allowance
2...Finishing (allowance X/Y/Z=0)
_AP1 Real Diameter of blank spigot

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-181
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
04.00
3.14 Milling circular spigots – CYCLE77 (SW 5.3 and later)

Function
With this cycle you can machine circular spigots in
the machining plane. For finishing, a face cutter is
needed. Depth infeed is always performed in the
position reached prior to semicircular positioning on
the contour.

Sequence of operations
Position reached prior to cycle start:
The starting point is a position in the positive range of the
abscissa with integrated approach semicircle and
allowance for programmed blank dimension.

Sequence of motions for roughing (_VARI=1)

Approach to and exit from contour: Approach to and retraction from the contour in a
semicircle with spindle rotating clockwise and
The retraction plane (_RTP) is approached in rapid climb milling
traverse so that the tool can be positioned from there on
Y
the starting point in the machining plane. The starting point
is defined as being 0 degrees in relation to the abscissa
Approach to contour
axis.
The tool is fed in at rapid traverse to the safety distance
(_SDIS) and then traverses to machining depth at normal X
feedrate. The spigot contour is approached along a
semicircular path, making allowance for the programmed Retraction from contour

blank spigot.
The milling direction can be defined as up-cut or down-cut
milling in relation to the spindle direction.
If the spigot has been circumnavigated once, the tool lifts
off the contour in the plane along a semicircular path and is
then fed in to the next machining depth.
The contour is then approached again along a semicircle
and the spigot circumnavigated once. This process is
repeated until the programmed spigot depth is reached.
The tool then approaches the retraction plane (_RTP) in
rapid traverse.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-182 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
04.00 Milling Cycles
3.14 Milling circular spigots – CYCLE77 (SW 5.3 and later)

Depth infeed:
• Infeed to safety distance
• Insertion to machining depth
The first machining depth is the product of:
• the total depth,
• the final machining allowance and
• the maximum possible depth infeed.
Sequence of motions for finishing (_VARI=2)
Depending on the setting of parameters _FAL and _FALD,
a finishing operation is performed on the spigot surface or
base or both. The approach strategy matches the motions
in the plane executed for roughing operations.

Description of parameters
See Subsection 2.1.2. (Drilling, Centering – CYCLE81)
for a description of parameters RTP, RFP, SDIS, DP,
DPR.
See Section 3.9 for a description of parameters _MID,
_FAL, _FALD, _FFP1, _FFD.
_PRAD (diameter of spigot)
The diameter must be entered without a sign.

_PA, _PO (spigot center point)

With parameters _PA and _PO you define the reference
point of the spigot.
Circular spigots are always measured from the center.
_CDIR (milling direction)
The machining direction of the spigot is defined in this
parameter. Under parameter _CDIR the mill direction
• direct "2 for G2“ and "3 for G3“ or
• alternatively "Up-cut milling“ or "down-cut milling“
can be programmed. Up-cut milling or down-cut milling
is determined within the cycle via the spindle direction
activated prior to the cycle call.
Up-cut Down-cut
M3 → G3 M3 → G2
M4 → G2 M4 → G3

_VARI (machining mode)

You can define the type of machining with parameter
_VARI.
Possible values are:
• 1=Roughing
• 2=Finishing

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-183
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
04.00
3.14 Milling circular spigots – CYCLE77 (SW 5.3 and later)

_AP1 (diameter of blank spigot)

This parameter defines the blank dimension of the spigot
(without sign). The internally calculated radius of the
approach semicircle is dependent on this dimension.

Further notes
A tool offset must be activated before the cycle is called.
The cycle is otherwise aborted with alarm 61009 "Active
tool number=0".
A new workpiece coordinate system that influences the
actual value display is used in the cycle. The zero point of
this coordinate system lies on the pocket center point.
The original coordinate system becomes active again after
the end of the cycle.

Programming example
Circular spigot Y Y

Machine a spigot from a blank with a diameter of

55mm and a maximum infeed of 10mm per cut.
A A-B
Enter a final machining allowance for finishing the
spigot surface. The entire spigot is machined in a
down-cut milling operation.

Ø55
Ø50
70

60 B X Z
20

N10 G90 G17 G0 S1800 M3 D1 Specification of technology values

N20 CYCLE77 (10, 0, 3, -20, ,50, 60, -> Roughing cycle call
-> 70, 10, 0.5, 0, 900, 800, 1, 1, 55)
N30 T2 M6 Tool change
N40 S2400 D1 M3 Specification of technology values
N50 CYCLE77 (10, 0, 3, -20, , 50, 60, -> Finishing cycle call
-> 70, 10, 0, 0, 800, 800, 1, 2, 55)
N40 M30 End of program
-> Must be programmed in a single block

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-184 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
08.99 Milling Cycles
3.15 Pocket milling with islands – CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

3.15 Pocket milling with islands – CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

(SW 5.2 and later)
Pocket milling with islands is an option and requires
SW 5.2 in both the NCK and MMC 103.

Precondition
To use the pocket milling cycle with islands, the
machine data below must be set as follows
(minimum requirement):
• MD 18120: MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_NC 20
• MD 18150: MM_GUD_VALUES_MEM 80

Function
Cycles CYCLE73, CYCLE74 and CYCLE75 enable you
to machine pockets with islands.
The contours of the pocket and islands are defined in
DIN code in the same program as the pocket machining
operation or as a subroutine.
Cycles CYCLE74 and CYCLE75 transfer the pocket
edge contour or island contours to CYCLE73, the actual
pocket milling cycle.
CYCLE73 uses a geometry processor to create a
machining program which it then executes. To ensure
correct program processing, it is important to program
cycle calls in the proper sequence.
• CYCLE74( ) ;Transfer edge contour
• CYCLE75( ) ;Transfer island contour 1
• CYCLE75( ) ;Transfer island contour 2
• ...
• CYCLE73( ) ;Machine pocket

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-185
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
08.99
3.15 Pocket milling with islands – CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

3.15.1 Transfer pocket edge contour – CYCLE74

Pocket milling with islands is an option and requires
SW 5.2 in both the NCK and MMC 103.

Programming
CYCLE74 (_KNAME, _LSANF, _LSEND)

Parameters

_KNAME string Name of contour subroutine of pocket edge contour

_LSANF string Block number/label identifying start of contour definition
_LSEND string Block number/label identifying end of contour definition

Function
Cycle CYCLE74 transfers the pocket edge contour to
pocket milling cycle CYCLE73. This is done by creating
a temporary internal file in the standard cycles directory
and storing the transferred parameter values in it.

If a file of this type already exists, it is deleted and set

up again.

For this reason, a program sequence for milling pockets

with islands must always begin with a call for CYCLE74.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-186 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
10.00 Milling Cycles
3.15 Pocket milling with islands – CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

Explanation of parameters
The edge contour can be programmed either in a
separate program or in the main program that calls the
routine. The contour is transferred to the cycle by
parameter _KNAME, name of program or _LSANF,
_LSEND and the program section from ... to identified
by block numbers or labels.

So there are three options for contour programming:

• Contour is defined in a separate program,
in which case only _KNAME needs to be
programmed;
e.g. CYCLE74 ("EDGE","","")
• Contour is defined in the calling program,
in which case only _LSANF and _LSEND need
to be programmed;
e.g. CYCLE74 ("","N10","N160")
• The edge contour is part of a program but
not part of the program that calls the cycle,
in which case all three parameters need to be
programmed.
e.g. CYCLE74(“EDGE“,“MARKER_START“,
“MARKER_END“)
The program name is describable by its path name and
program type.
Example:
_KNAME="/N_WKS_DIR/_N_EXAMPLE3_WPD/_N_EDGE_MPF"

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-187
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
08.99
3.15 Pocket milling with islands – CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

3.15.2 Transfer island contour – CYCLE75

Pocket milling with islands is an option and requires
SW 5.2 in both the NCK and MMC 103.

Programming
CYCLE75 (_KNAME, _LSANF, _LSEND)

Parameters

_KNAME string Name of contour subroutine of island contour

_LSANF string Block number/label identifying start of contour definition
_LSEND string Block number/label identifying end of contour definition

Function
Cycle CYCLE75 transfers island contours to the pocket
milling cycle CYCLE73. The cycle is called once for
each island contour. It need not be called if no island
contours are programmed.

The transferred parameter values are written to the

temporary file opened by CYCLE74.

Description of parameters
The number and meaning of parameters are the
same as for CYCLE74.

(see CYCLE74)

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-188 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
04.00 Milling Cycles
3.15 Pocket milling with islands – CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

3.15.3 Contour programming

Pocket edge and island contours must always be closed,
i.e. the start and end points are identical.

The start point, i.e. first point on a contour must always be

programmed with G0, and all other contour elements via
G1 to G3.

When the contour is programmed, the last contour element

(block with label or block number at end of contour) must
not contain a radius or chamfer.

The tool may not stand at a starting position of the

programmed contour element before CYCLE73 is invoked.

The necessary programs must always be stored in one

directory (workpiece or part program). It is permissible to
use the subroutine memory for pocket edge or island
contours.

Workpiece-related geometric dimensional data may be

programmed in either metric or inches. Switching between
these units of measurement within individual contour
programs will causes errors in the machining program.

When G90/G91 are programmed alternately in contour

programs, care must be taken to program the correct
dimensional command at the start of the program in the
sequence of contour programs to be executed.

When the pocket machining program is calculated, only the

geometries in the plane are taken into account.

If other axes or functions (T.., D.., S.. M.. etc.) are

programmed in contour sections, they are skipped when
the contour is prepared internally in the cycle.

All machine-specific program commands (e.g. tool call,

speed, M command) must be programmed before the
cycle commences. Feedrates must be set as parameters in
CYCLE73.
The tool radius must be greater than zero.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-189
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
08.99
3.15 Pocket milling with islands – CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

It is not possible to repeat island contours by offsets

implemented by suitable control commands (e.g.
zero offset, frames, etc.). Every island to be
repeated must always be programmed again with
the offsets calculated into the coordinates.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-190 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
08.99 Milling Cycles
3.15 Pocket milling with islands – CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

Programming example
Sample program 1.mpf (pocket with islands) Y Y

98
A A-A

73

10
R

66
58

15
R
R5
30
%_N_SAMPLE1_MPF
;$PATH=/_N_MPF_DIR A X Z
34
; Example_1: Pocket with islands 20 79 17.5
; All radii on R5 corners

$TC_DP1[5,1]=120 $TC_DP6[5,1]=6 $TC_DP3[5,1]=111 ;Tool offset mill T5 D1

$TC_DP1[2,2]=120 $TC_DP6[2,2]=5 $TC_DP3[2,2]=130
N100 G17 G40 G90 ;Initial conditions G code
N110 T5 D1 ;Load milling tool
N120 M6
N130 S500 M3 F2000 M8
GOTOF _MACHINE
;
N510 _EDGE:G0 G64 X25 Y30 F2000 ;Define edge contour
N520 G1 X118 RND=5
N530 Y96 RND=5
N540 X40 RND=5
N545 X20 Y75 RND=5
N550 Y35
N560 _ENDEDGE:G3 X25 Y30 CR=5
;
N570 _ISLAND1:G0 X34 Y58 ;Define bottom island
N580 G1 X64
N590 _ENDISLAND1:G2 X34 Y58 CR=15
;
N600 _ISLAND2:G0 X79 Y73 ;Define top island
N610 G1 X99
N620 _ENDISLAND2:G3 X79 Y73 CR=10
;
_MACHINE:
;Programming contours
SAMPLE_CONT:
CYCLE74 ("SAMPLE1","_EDGE","_ENDEDGE") ;Transfer edge contour
CYCLE75 ("SAMPLE1","_ISLAND1","_ENDISLAND1") ;Transfer island contour 1
CYCLE75 ("SAMPLE1","_ISLAND2","_ENDISLAND2") ;Transfer island contour 2
ENDLABEL:

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-191
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
08.99
3.15 Pocket milling with islands – CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

3.15.4 Pocket milling with islands – CYCLE73

Pocket milling with islands is an option and requires
SW 5.2 in both the NCK and MMC 103.

Programming
CYCLE73 (_VARI, _BNAME, _PNAME, _TN, _RTP,
_RFP, _SDIS, _DP, _DPR, _MID, _MIDA, _FAL, _FALD,
_FFP1, _FFD, _CDIR, _PA, _PO, _RAD, _DP1)

Parameters

_VARI int Type of machining: (enter without sign)

UNITS POSITION (select machining):
Value: 1...Rough cut (remove stock) from solid material
2...Rough cut residual material
3...Finish edge
4...Finish base
5...Rough drill
TENS DIGIT (select insertion strategy):
Value: 1...Perpendicular with G1
2...Along a helix
3...Oscillate
HUNDREDS DIGIT (select liftoff mode):
Values:0...to retraction plane (_RTP)
1...by safety distance (_SDIS) via reference plane (_RFP)
THOUSANDS DIGIT (select start point):
Values:1...Automatic
2...Manual
_BNAME string Name for program of drill positions
_PNAME string Name for pocket milling machining program
_TN string Name of stock removal tool
_RTP real Retraction plane (absolute)
_RFP real Reference plane (absolute)
_SDIS real Safety distance (to be added to the reference plane, enter without sign)
_DP real Pocket depth (absolute)
_DPR real Pocket depth (incremental)
_MID real Maximum infeed depth for infeed (enter without sign)
_MIDA real Maximum infeed depth in the plane (enter without sign)
_FAL real Final machining allowance in the plane (enter without sign)
_FALD real Final machining allowance on base (enter without sign)
_FFP1 real Feedrate for surface machining

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-192 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
08.99 Milling Cycles
3.15 Pocket milling with islands – CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

_FFD real Feedrate for depth infeed

_CDIR int Milling direction for machining the pocket: (enter without sign)
Value: 0...Upcut milling (as spindle rotation)
1...Downcut milling
2...with G2 (irrespective of spindle direction)
3...with G3
_PA real Start point in first axis (only with manual selection of start point)
_PO real Start point in second axis (only with manual selection of start point)
_RAD real Radius center-point path on insertion along helical path or
max. insertion angle for oscillating insertion motion
_DP1 real Insertion depth per 360° revolution on insertion along helical path

Function
Cycle CYCLE73 enables you to machine pockets with
or without islands. It supports complete machining of
this type of pocket and offers the following machining
operations:
• Rough drill
• Solid machine pocket
• Machine residual material
• Finish edge
• Finish base
Pocket and island contours are freely programmed
in DIN code supported, for example, by the
geometry processor.
The cycle is executed once for each operation
according to the programmed machining type (_VARI).
In other words, in applications requiring roughing and
finishing, or an additional rough-cut residual material
operation, CYCLE73 must be called a second time.

Solid machine pocket

When a pocket is solid machined, it is machined with
the active tool down to the programmed finishing
dimensions. The insertion strategy for milling can be
selected. The cutting operation is segmented in the
pocket depth direction (tool axis) in accordance with the
specified values.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-193
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
08.99
3.15 Pocket milling with islands – CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

Machine residual material

The cycle allows material to be removed with a smaller
milling tool. The traversing motions defined by the
residual material of the last milling operation and the
current tool radius are output in the generated program.
The residual material technology can be programmed
repeatedly with a succession of decreasing tool radii.
No check is made on completion of the cycle for any
further residual material in the pocket.

Edge/base finishing
Another function of the cycle is to finish the pocket base
or circumnavigate the pocket and individual islands in a
finish operation.

Rough drill
Depending on the milling tool used, it may be necessary
to drill before solid machining the workpiece. The cycle
automatically calculates the rough drilling positions as a
function of the solid machining operation to be
performed afterwards. The drilling cycle called modally
beforehand is executed at each of these positions.
Rough drilling can be executed in a number of
technological machining operations (e.g. 1. centering, 2.
Drilling).

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-194 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
08.99 Milling Cycles
3.15 Pocket milling with islands – CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

Rough drilling sequence

In the first machining section of the rough drilling
operation, a REPEAT command must be used after a
modal call for the drilling cycle to call a sequence of
machining steps with the contents of CYCLE73 and the
contour repetition. The drilling cycle must be deselected
modally before the next tool change. Other drilling
technologies can be programmed subsequently.
The next program section contains CYCLE73 which
contains all necessary parameters as well as the
programs for solid machining and drilling.
Parameter _VARI is the only one to define all solid
machining parameters and it must always be
programmed for this reason.
The cycle now generates the solid machining and
drilling position programs for the pocket. It then calls the
drilling position program and executes it.
If the operation involves several different pockets, it will
be necessary to call the associated contours again in
this section. This block can be omitted if there is only
one pocket.
This entire machining section must be marked by a
skip command to the following "Solid machine
pocket" section.

Example
Rough drill, with solid machining
ACCEPTANCE4_CONT: ;Marker with name for beginning of pocket
;contour
CYCLE74("EDGEA01", ,) ;Definition of contour for pocket edge
CYCLE75("ISL11A01", ,) ;Definition of contour for 1st island
CYCLE75("ISL1A01", ,)
CYCLE75("ISL2A01", ,)
CYCLE75("ISL3A01", ,)
ENDLABEL: ;Marker for end of a pocket contour
T4 M6
D1 M3 F1000 S4000
MCALL CYCLE81(10,0,1,-3) ;Modal call of drilling cycle
REPEAT ACCEPTANCE4_MACH ;Execute drilling position program
ACCEPTANCE4_MACH_END
MCALL ;Deselect drilling cycle modally

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-195
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
08.99
3.15 Pocket milling with islands – CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

GOTOF ACCEPTANCE4_MACH_END ;Branch to Solid machine pocket

ACCEPTANCE4_MACH: ;Start of section Generate programs
;REPEAT ACCEPTANCE4_CONT ENDLABEL ;Required only if there is more than one pocket
;contour
CYCLE73(1015,"ACCEPTANCE4_DRILL","ACCEPTANCE
4_MILL1","3",10,0,1,-
12,0,,2,0.5,,9000,400,0,,,,)
ACCEPTANCE4_MACH_END: ;End of section Generate programs
T3 M6
D1 M3 S2000
;REPEAT ACCEPTANCE4_CONT ENDLABEL ;Required only if there is more than one pocket
;contour
CYCLE73(1011,"ACCEPTANCE4_DRILL","ACCEPTANCE ;Solid machine pocket
4_MILL1","3",10,0,1,-
12,0,,2,0.5,,9000,400,0,,,,)

Sequence for roughing, solid machining

(_VARI=XXX1)
All parameters must be written to the CYCLE73
command again.

The program performs the following machining

steps:
• Approach a manually calculated or automatically
generated start point located on the return plane.
G0 is then used to traverse the axis to a reference
plane brought forward by the safety distance.
• Infeed to the current machining depth according
to the selected insertion strategy (_VARI) with
feed value _FFD.
• Mill pocket with islands down to final machining
allowance with feed _FFP1. The machining
direction corresponds to the setting in _CDIR.
The pocket can be split if the ratio between mill
diameter and clearance between islands or
between islands and edge contours is not ideal.
For this purpose, the cycle calculates additional
start points for mill insertion.
• Lift off in accordance with selected retraction
mode and return to start point for next plane
infeed.
• When the pocket has been machined, the tool is
retracted either to the return plane or by the safety

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-196 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
08.99 Milling Cycles
3.15 Pocket milling with islands – CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

distance via the reference plane, depending on the

selected liftoff mode. The tool position in the plane
is above the pocket surface as determined by the
generated program.

Sequence of motions for finishing

(_VARI=XXX3)
• The pocket and island contours are
circumnavigated once each during the edge
finishing operation. Vertical insertion with G1
(_VARI) must be programmed as the insertion
strategy. Approach and retraction at the start
and edge points respectively of the finishing
operation are each executed along a tangential
circle segment.
• To finish the base, the tool is inserted to pocket
depth + final machining allowance + safety
distance with G0. From this position the tool is
fed in vertically at the feedrate for depth infeed.
The base surface of the pocket is machined
once.
• Liftoff and retraction as the same as for solid
machining.
• Parameters _FAL, _FALD and _VARI=XXX4
must be assigned for simultaneous finishing in
the plane and on the base.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-197
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
08.99
3.15 Pocket milling with islands – CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

Description of parameters
_VARI (machining mode)
You can define the type of machining with parameter
_VARI. Possible values are:
Units digit:
• 1=Rough cut (solid machine) from solid material
• 2=Rough cut residual material
• 3=Finish edge
• 4=Finish base
• 5=Rough drill
When "Rough cut from solid material" is set, the
machining program solid machines the pocket
completely down to the final machining allowance.
If it is not possible to machine areas of the edge
surfaces with the selected mill diameter, then setting "2"
can be selected to machine them afterwards with a
smaller milling tool. To do this, cycle CYCLE73 must be
called again.

Tens digit:
• 1=Vertical with G1
• 2=Along a helical path
• 3=Oscillation

Selection of insertion strategies:

• Insert vertically (_VARI=XX1X)
means that the current infeed depth calculated
internally is executed in one block.
• Insert along helical path (_VARI=XX2X)
means that the mill center point traverses along
the helical path determined by radius _RAD and
depth per revolution _DP1. The feedrate is
always programmed through _FFD. The sense
of rotation of this helical path corresponds to the
direction to be used for machining the pocket.
The depth programmed under _DP1 on insertion
is calculated as the maximum depth and is
always calculated as a whole number of
revolutions of the helical path.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-198 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
08.99 Milling Cycles
3.15 Pocket milling with islands – CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

When the current depth for the infeed (these may be

several revolutions on the helical path) has been
calculated, a full circle is made to remove the slope
on insertion.
Then pocket solid machining starts in this plane and
continues until reaching the finishing allowance.
• Insertion with oscillation (_VARI=XX3X)
means that the mill center point oscillates along
an oblique linear path until it has reached the
next current depth. The maximum insertion
angle is programmed under _RAD, the position
of the oscillation path is calculated within the
cycle. When the current depth has been
reached, the path is traversed again without
depth infeed in order to remove the slope
caused by insertion. The feedrate is
programmed through _FFD.

Hundreds digit: (_VARI=X1XX)

• 0=To retraction plane (_RTP)
• 1=By safety distance (_SDIS) via reference plane
(_RFP)

Thousands digit: (_VARI=1XXX)

• 1=Start point automatic
• 2=Start point manual

When the starting point is selected automatically, the

cycle internally calculates the starting point for Y
machining
itself.
Notice: Manually specified start positions must not be Starting
point 2
too close to the island surface. Manually specified start
positions are not monitored internally.
If the pocket has to be split as a result of the island
position and the mill diameter used, then several start
Starting
points are calculated automatically. point 1 Residual
material
With manual start point selection, parameters _PA and
_PO must also be programmed. However, these can
only define one start point. X
If the pocket has to be split, the required start points are
calculated automatically.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-199
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
08.99
3.15 Pocket milling with islands – CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

_BNAME (name for drilling position program)

_PNAME (name for pocket milling program)
The pocket milling cycle generates programs with
traversing blocks required to rough drill or mill the
workpiece. These programs are stored in the same
directory as the calling program in the part program
memory, i.e. in the "part programs" directory (MPF.DIR) if
the cycle is called from there or in the corresponding
workpiece directory. The programs are always main
programs (type MPF).
The names of these programs are defined by parameters
_BNAME and _PNAME.
A drilling program name is needed only when
_VARI=XXX5.
Example:No drilling program name:
CYCLE73(1011,"",ACCEPTANCE4_MILL,...)

_TN (name of solid machining tool)

This parameter must be set to the solid machining tool.
Depending on whether the tool management function is
active or not, the parameter must be set to a tool name or
tool number.
Example:
• with tool management
CYCLE73(1015,“PART1_DRILL“,“PART1_MILL“,
“MILL3“,...)
• without tool management
CYCLE73(1015,“PART1_DRILL“,“PART1_MILL“,“3“
,...)
Parameter _TN is defined as a compulsory parameter with
a maximum length of 16 characters. It must therefore be
assigned to the cutting tool in every subsequent CYCLE73
call. When the residual material machining operation is
used more than once, the tool from the last residual
material removal process must be used.

TOOL AND OFFSET:

It must be ensured that the tool offset is processed
exclusively by D1. Replacement tool strategies may not be
used.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-200 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
08.99 Milling Cycles
3.15 Pocket milling with islands – CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

_RFP and _RTP (reference plane and retraction plane)

The reference plane (RFP) and retraction plane are
generally set to different values. In the cycle it is
assumed that the retraction plane lies in front of the
reference plane. The distance between the retraction
plane and the final drilling depth is therefore greater
than the distance between the reference plane and
the final drilling depth.

_SDIS (safety distance)

The safety distance (SDIS) is effective with regard to
the reference plane which is brought forward by the
safety distance. The direction in which the safety
distance is active is automatically determined by the
cycle.

_DP (absolute pocket depth) and

_DPR (incremental pocket depth)
The pocket depth can be specified as either an absolute
value (_DP) or relative value (_DPR) in relation to the
reference plane. If the incremental option is selected,
the cycle automatically calculates the depth on the basis
of the reference and retraction plane positions.

_MID (maximum infeed depth)

The maximum infeed depth is defined with this
parameter. The depth infeed is performed by the cycle
in equally sized infeed steps.
The cycle calculates this infeed automatically on the
basis of _MID and the total depth.
The minimum possible number of infeed steps is used
as the basis. _MID=0 means that the cut to pocket
depth is made with one infeed.

_MIDA (max. infeed depth in the plane)

With this parameter you define the maximum infeed
width for solid machining in the plane. This value is
never exceeded.
If this parameter is not programmed, or if its value is
0, the cycle uses 80 percent of the mill radius as the
maximum infeed width.
If an infeed width of more than 80 percent of the mill
diameter is programmed, the cycle is aborted after
output of alarm 61982 "Infeed width in plane too large".

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-201
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
08.99
3.15 Pocket milling with islands – CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

_FAL (final machining allowance in the plane)

The final machining allowance only affects
machining of the pocket in the plane at the edge.
When the final machining allowance ≥ tool diameter,
the pocket will not necessarily be machined
completely.

_FALD (final machining allowance on the base)

A separate final machining allowance on the base is
taken into account in roughing operations.

_FFD and _FFP1 (feedrate for depth infeed and

surface machining)
Feedrate _FFD is used for insertion into the material.
Feedrate FFP1 is used for all movements in the plane
traversed at feedrate when machining.

_CDIR (milling direction)

The value for the machining direction of the pocket is Y
defined in this parameter.
Under parameter _CDIR the mill direction
• direct "2 for G2“ and "3 for G3“ or
• alternatively "Up-cut milling“ or "down-cut milling“
can be programmed. Up-cut milling or down-cut G3
G2
milling is determined within the cycle via the spindle G2
direction activated prior to the cycle call.
Up-cut milling Down-cut milling G3
M3 → G3 M3 → G2
M4 → G2 M4 → G3
X

_PA, _PO (start point for first and second axes)

When the start point is selected manually, the start
point must be programmed in these parameters such
that it can be approached without risk of collision. It
must be noted that only one start point can be
programmed (see description of parameter _VARI).

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-202 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
08.99 Milling Cycles
3.15 Pocket milling with islands – CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

_RAD (center-point path or insertion angle)

Parameter _RAD defines the radius of the helical path
(referred to tool center point path) or the maximum
insertion angle for oscillation.

_DP1 (insertion depth for helical path)

With the parameter _DP1 you define the infeed
depth for insertion on the helical path.

Further notes
Name for pocket machining (NAME)
Pockets are generally machined in several
technological machining steps. However, the contours
defining the pocket geometries are defined only once.
To ensure that contours can be automatically assigned
to the appropriate machining step in the program, the
contour definition is marked with labels and this
program section then repeated later with the REPEAT
instruction.
When programs are written using the cycles support
function, a name for the pocket machining program is
therefore entered in the respective screen forms. The
name length is restricted to 8 characters.
In sample program 2, this is, for example
"ACCEPTANCE4“.
The T number contains the milling tool for all machining
technologies. When residual material is machined more
than once, the tool used beforehand must always be
entered in the T number.

Explanation of the cycle structure

Cycle CYCLE73 is used to solve very complex
problems associated with solid machining of pockets
with islands which require a high level of computing
capacity in the control. For optimum timing, the
calculation is carried out in the MMC.

The calculation is started from the cycle. Its result

contains programs with traversing blocks for drilling or
milling operations which are stored in the file system of
the control. These are then called by the cycle and
executed.
This structure means that it is only necessary to

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-203
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
10.00
3.15 Pocket milling with islands – CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

perform the calculation the first time a program is

executed with CYCLE73 call. From the second program
run onwards, the generated traversing program is
available for immediate call by the cycle.
Recalculation is performed when:
• A finished contour has been modified;
• A transfer parameter of the cycle has changed;
• A tool with different tool offset data has been
activated prior to the cycle call;
• In the case of different technologies, such as solid
machining and residual material, with machining
programs generated in different ways.

Program storage in the file system

If the contours for CYCLE73 are programmed outside
the program that makes the call, the following applies
for the search in the file system of the control:
• If the calling program is stored in a workpiece
directory, then the programs containing the edge
or island contours must be stored in the same
workpiece directory;
• If the invoked program is located in the "Part
Program" directory (MPF.DIR), a search is also
made for the programs there.

The programs generated by the cycle are also

stored in the same directory as the program
containing the cycle call, i.e. in the same workpiece
directory or in MPF.DIR or SPF.DIR.

Note on simulation
In the pocket milling simulation, the generated
programs are saved to the NCU file system. Therefore,
only the "NC Active Data" setting is practical since tool
offset data flow into the program calculation.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-204 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
08.99 Milling Cycles
3.15 Pocket milling with islands – CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

Programming example 1
The machining task involves machining a pocket with 2 Y Y

islands from solid material and then finishing the pocket

98
in plane X, Y
A A-A
Sample program 1.mpf (pocket with islands)

73

10
R

66
58

15
%_N_SAMPLE1_MPF

R
;$PATH=/_N_WKS_DIR/_N_CC73BEI1_WPD R5
30
; Example_1: Pocket with islands
;Solid machine and finish 34 A X Z
20 79 17.5
All radii on R5 corners

$TC_DP1[5,1]=120 $TC_DP3[5,1]=111 ;Tool offset mill T5 D1

$TC_DP6[5,1]=4
$TC_DP1[2,1]=120 $TC_DP3[2,1]=130
$TC_DP6[2,1]=5
N100 G17 G40 G90 ;Initial conditions G code
N110 T5 D1 ;Load milling tool
N120 M6
N130 M3 F2000 S500 M8
N140 GOTOF _MACHINE
;
N510 _EDGE:G0 G64 X25 Y30 ;Define edge contour
N520 G1 X118 RND=5
N530 Y96 RND=5
N540 X40 RND=5
N545 X20 Y75 RND=5
N550 Y35
N560 _ENDEDGE:G3 X25 Y30 CR=5
;
N570 _ISLAND1:G0 X34 Y58 ;Define bottom island
N580 G1 X64
N590 _ENDISLAND1:G2 X34 Y58 CR=15
;
N600 _ISLAND2:G0 X79 Y73 ;Define top island
N610 G1 X99
N620 _ENDISLAND2:G3 X79 Y73 CR=10
;

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-205
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
08.99
3.15 Pocket milling with islands – CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

;Programming contours
_MACHINE:
SAMPLE1_CONT:
CYCLE74 ("","_EDGE","_ENDEDGE")
CYCLE75 ("","_ISL1","_ENDISL1")
CYCLE75 ("","_ISL2","_ENDISL2")
ENDLABEL:

;Programming Mill Pocket

CYCLE73 (1021,"","SAMPLE1_MILL1","5",10,0,1,
-17.5,0,,2,0.5,,9000,3000,0,,,4,3)

T2 D1 M6
S3000 M3
;Programming Finish Pocket
CYCLE73 (1113,"","SAMPLE1_MILL3","5",10,0,1,
-17.5,0,,2,,,8000,1000,0,,,4,2)
M30

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-206 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
08.99 Milling Cycles
3.15 Pocket milling with islands – CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

Programming example 2
Machining task:
Before the pocket is milled, the workpiece must be
rough drilled to ensure optimum insertion of the milling
tool.
• Center for rough drilling
• Rough drill
• Solid machine pocket with islands, mill radius 12mm
• Solid machine residual material, mill radius 6mm
• Finish pocket, mill radius 5mm

Sketch of machining
operation
Y

Pocket depth 12 mm

INS11A01 INS3A01

INS2A01

45

35

120
85

∅ 30

INS1A01 20
40

50
50
30

R
10

30 20 5 X
10 70
200 60

Machining program:
%_N_SAMPLE2_MPF
;$PATH=/_N_WKS_DIR/_N_CC73BEI2_WPD
; Example_2: Pocket with islands
; 2*rough drill, machine, machine resid. mat. ,
finish
;
; Tool offset data
$TC_DP1[2,1]=220 $TC_DP6[2,1]=10
$TC_DP1[3,1]=120 $TC_DP6[3,1]=12
$TC_DP1[4,1]=220 $TC_DP6[4,1]=3
$TC_DP1[5,1]=120 $TC_DP6[5,1]=5
$TC_DP1[6,1]=120 $TC_DP6[6,1]=6
TRANS X10 Y10

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-207
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
08.99
3.15 Pocket milling with islands – CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

;Defining machining contours

ACCEPTANCE4_CONT:
CYCLE74("EDGEA01",,)
CYCLE75("ISL11A01",,)
CYCLE75("ISL1A01",,)
CYCLE75("ISL2A01",,)
CYCLE75("ISL3A01",,)
ENDLABEL:

;Program centering
T4 M6
D1 M3 F1000 S4000
MCALL CYCLE81 (10,0,1,-3,)
REPEAT ACCEPTANCE4_MACH ACCEPTANCE4_MACH_END
MCALL

;Program drilling
T2 M6
D1 M3 F2222 S3000
MCALL CYCLE81(10,0,1,-12,)
REPEAT ACCEPTANCE4_MACH ACCEPTANCE4_MACH_END
MCALL

GOTOF ACCEPTANCE4_MACH_END
ACCEPTANCE4_MACH:
REPEAT ACCEPTANCE4_CONT ENDLABEL
CYCLE73(1015,"ACCEPTANCE4_DRILL","ACCEPTANCE4_MILL1",
"3",10,0,1,-12,0,,2,0.5,,2000,400,0,,,,)
ACCEPTANCE4_MACH_END

;Program solid machining

T3 M6
D1 M3 S4000
REPEAT ACCEPTANCE4_CONT ENDLABEL
CYCLE73(1011,"","ACCEPTANCE4_MILL1","3",10,0,1,
-12,0,,2,0.5,,2000,400,0,,,,)

;Program solid machining of residual material

T6 M6
D1 M3 S4000
REPEAT ACCEPTANCE4_CONT ENDLABEL
CYCLE73(1012,"","ACCEPTANCE4_2_MILL4","3",10,0,1,
-12,0,,2,0.5,,1500,800,0,,,,)

;Program finishing
T5 M6
D1 M3 S4500
REPEAT ACCEPTANCE4_CONT ENDLABEL
CYCLE73(1013,"","ACCEPTANCE4_MILL3","3",10,0,1,
-12,0,,2,,,3000,700,0,,,,)
M30

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-208 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
08.99 Milling Cycles
3.15 Pocket milling with islands – CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

Edge contour programming example 2:

%_N_EDGEA01_MPF
;$PATH=/_N_WKS_DIR/_N_CC73BEI2_WPD
;Ste 17.05.99
;Edge contour sample program 2

N5 G0 G90 X260 Y0
N7 G3 X260 Y120 CR=60
N8 G1 X170 RND=15
N9 G2 X70 Y120 CR=50
N10 G1 X0 RND=15
N11 Y0 RND=15
N35 X70 RND=15
N40 G2 X170 Y0 CR=50
N45 G1 X260 Y0
N50 M30

Island contour programming example 2

%_N_ISL1A01_MPF
;$PATH=/_N_WKS_DIR/_N_CC73BEI2_WPD
;Ste 18.06.99
;Island contour sample program 2

N5 G90 G0 X30 Y15

N10 G91 G3 X0 Y30 CR=15
N12 X0 Y-30 CR=15
N15 M30

%_N_ISL11A01_MPF
;$PATH=/_N_WKS_DIR/_N_CC73BEI2_WPD
;Ste 18.06.99
;Island contour sample program 2

N5 G90 G0 X30 Y70

N10 G91 G3 X0 Y30 CR=15
N12 X0 Y-30 CR=15
N15 M30

%_N_ISL2A01_MPF
;$PATH=/_N_WKS_DIR/_N_CC73BEI2_WPD
;Ste 18.06.99
;Island contour sample program 2

N5 G90 G0 X200 Y40

N10 G3 X220 Y40 CR=10
N15 G1 Y85
N20 G3 X200 Y85 CR=10
N25 G1 Y40
N30 M30

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-209
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
08.99
3.15 Pocket milling with islands – CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

%_N_ISL3A01_MPF
;$PATH=/_N_WKS_DIR/_N_CC73BEI2_WPD
;Ste 18.06.99
;Island contour sample program 2

N5 G0 G90 X265 Y50

N10 G1 G91 X20
N15 Y25
N20 G3 X-20 I-10
N25 G1 Y-25
N30 M30

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-210 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
10.00 Milling Cycles
3.15 Pocket milling with islands – CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

Programming example 3
Machining task:
Shows the program sequence of a machining task,
illustrated by two different pockets with islands. The
machining process is tool-oriented, i.e. each time a new
tool becomes available, all machining tasks requiring
this particular tool are performed complete on both
pockets before the next tool is used.
• Rough drill
• Solid machine pocket with islands
• Solid machine residual material
%_N_SAMPLE3_MPF
;$PATH=/_N_WKS_DIR/_N_CC73BEI3_WPD
; Sample3
; 07.04.2000

; Tool offset data

$TC_DP1[2,1]=220 $TC_DP3[2,1]=330 $TC_DP6[2,1]=10
$TC_DP1[3,1]=120 $TC_DP3[3,1]=210 $TC_DP6[3,1]=12
$TC_DP1[6,1]=120 $TC_DP3[6,1]=199 $TC_DP6[6,1]=6

;Workpiece zero
;G54
$P_UIFR[1,X,TR]=620
$P_UIFR[1,Y,TR]=50
$P_UIFR[1,Z,TR]=-320
;G55
$P_UIFR[2,X,TR]=550
$P_UIFR[2,Y,TR]=200
$P_UIFR[2,Z,TR]=-320
;
N10 G0 G17 G54 G40 G90
N20 T2
M6
D1 M3 F2000 S500 M8
N30 G0 Z20

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-211
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
10.00
3.15 Pocket milling with islands – CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

;Machining contours pocket 1

GOTOF ENDLABEL
POCKET1_CONT:
CYCLE74("EDGE"," "," ")
CYCLE75("ISLAND1"," "," ")
CYCLE75("ISLAND2"," "," ")
ENDLABEL:

;Machining contours pocket 2

GOTOF ENDLABEL
SAMPLE2_CONT:
CYCLE74("EDGEA01",,)
CYCLE75("ISL11A01",,)
CYCLE75("ISL1A01",,)
CYCLE75("ISL2A01",,)
CYCLE75("ISL3A01",,)
ENDLABEL:

;Drill
T2 M6
D1 M3 F6000 S4000
MCALL CYCLE81(10,0,1,-8,)
REPEAT POCKET1_MACH POCKET1_MACH_END
MCALL

G55
MCALL CYCLE81(10,0,1,-8,)
REPEAT SAMPLE2_MACH SAMPLE2_MACH_END
MCALL

;Removing pocket 1
T3 M6
G54 D1 M3 S3300
GOTOF POCKET1_MACH_END
POCKET1_MACH:
REPEAT POCKET1_CONT ENDLABEL
CYCLE73(1025,"POCKET1_DRILL","POCKET1_MILL1","3",10,0,1,-8,0,0,2,0,0,2000,400,0,0,0,3,4)
POCKET1_MACH_END:
REPEAT POCKET1_CONT ENDLABEL
CYCLE73(1021,"POCKET1_DRILL","POCKET1_MILL1","3",10,0,1,-8,0,0,2,0,0,2000,400,0,0,0,3,4)

;Removing pocket 2
G55
GOTOF SAMPLE2_MACH_END

SAMPLE2_MACH:
REPEAT SAMPLE2_CONT ENDLABEL
CYCLE73(1015,"SAMPLE2_DRILL","SAMPLE2_MILL1","3",10,0,1,-8,0,0,2,0,0,2000,400,0,0,0,3,4)
SAMPLE2_MACH_END:
REPEAT SAMPLE2_CONT ENDLABEL
CYCLE73(1011,"SAMPLE2_DRILL","SAMPLE2_MILL1","3",10,0,1,-8,0,0,2,0,0,2000,400,0,0,0,3,4)

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-212 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
10.00 Milling Cycles
3.15 Pocket milling with islands – CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

;Removing residual material pocket 1 and pocket 2

T6 M6
D1 G54 M3 S222
REPEAT POCKET1_CONT ENDLABEL
CYCLE73(1012,"","POCKET1_3_MILL2","3",10,0,1,-8,0,,2,,,2500,800,0,,,,)

G55
REPEAT EXAMPLE2_CONT ENDLABEL
CYCLE73(1012,"","SAMPLE2_3_MILL2","3",10,0,1,-8,0,,2,,,2500,800,0,,,,)
G0 Z100
M30

;Edge and island contours

;Pocket 2 corresponds to programming example 2
Pocket 1:
%_N_Edge_MPF
;$PATH=/_N_WKS_DIR/_N_CC73BEI3_WPD
;29.03.99

N1 G0 X0 Y0 G90
N3 G1 X200 Y0
N5 X200 Y100
N10 X0 Y100
N20 X0 Y0
M30

%_N_ISLAND1_MPF
;$PATH=/_N_WKS_DIR/_N_CC73BEI3_WPD
;29.03.99
N100 G0 X130 Y30 Z50 G90
N110 G1 X150 Y30
N120 X150 Y60
N130 X130 Y60
N200 X130 Y30
M30

%_N_ISLAND2_MPF
;$PATH=/_N_WKS_DIR/_N_CC73BEI3_WPD
;29.03.99
N12 G0 X60 Y20
N13 G1 X90 Y20
N14 X90 Y50
N30 X60 Y50
N40 X60 Y20
M30

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-213
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
10.00
3.15 Pocket milling with islands – CYCLE73, CYCLE74, CYCLE75

Explanation
Alarms source CYCLE73...CYCLE75
Alarm number Alarm text Explanation, remedy
61703 “Internal cycle error while deleting file“
61704 “Internal cycle error while writing file“
61705 “Internal cycle error while reading file“
61706 “Internal cycle error during checksum formation“
61707 “Error in ACTIVATE on MMC“
61708 “Error in READYPROG on MMC“
61900 "No contour"
61901 "Contour is not closed"
61902 "No more free memory"
61903 "Too many contour elements"
61904 "Too many intersections"
61905 "Cutter radius too small"
61906 "Too many contours"
61907 "Circle without center point measurement"
61908 "No starting point specified"
61909 "Helical radius too small"
61910 "Helix violates contour"
61911 "Several insertion points required"
61912 "No path generated"
61913 "No residual material generated"
61914 "Programmed helix violates contour"
61915 "Approach/liftoff motion violates contour"
61916 "Ramp path too short"
61917 "Residual corners might be left
with less than 50 per cent overlap"
61918 "Cutter radius too large for residual material"
61980 “Error in island contour“
61981 “Error in edge contour“
61982 “Infeed width in plane too large“
61983 "Pocket edge contour missing"
61984 “Tool parameter _TN not defined“
61985 “Name of drilling position program missing"
61986 “Machine pocket program missing"
61987 "Drilling position program missing"
61988 "Name of program for machining pocket missing"
61989 "Not D1 programmed as active tool cutting edge"

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-214 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
09.01 Milling Cycles
3.16 Swiveling - CYCLE800 (from SW 6.2)

3.16 Swiveling - CYCLE800 (from SW 6.2)

The Swiveling cycle is not an option, but is available

with PCU 20/50, SW 06.02, and NCK SW 6.3 or later.
The functions
• 3/2 axes inclined machining and
• orientatable toolholder
must be available in the basic version.

References: Description of Functions 840D/840Di/810D

/W1/ "Tool Offset"
/R2/ "Rotary Axes"
/K2/ "System Frames" (from SW 6.1)

Precondition
To use the swiveling cycle, the machine data below must be set as
follows (minimum requirement):
• MD 10602: FRAME_GEOAX_CHANGE_MODE=1
(only when the tool is corrected using TRAORI)
• MD 18088: MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER
à Number of swivel data records
• MD 20126: TOOL_CARRIER_RESET_VALUE
à described in CYCLE800
• MD 20180: TOCARR_ROT_ANGLE_INCR[0]=0
• MD 20180: TOCARR_ROT_ANGLE_INCR[1]=0
• MD 20182:TOCARR_ROT_ANGLE_OFFSET[0]=0
• MD 20182: TOCARR_ROT_ANGLE_OFFSET[1]=0
• MD 20184: TOCARR_BASE_FRAME_NUMBER=-1
• MD 22530: TOCARR_CHANGE_M_CODE
à M code on swivel data changeover
• MD 24008: CHSFRAME_POWERON_MASK
bits 4, 3, 2=1 if system frames PAROT, TOROT, WPFRAME are
to be deleted on Power ON
• MD 28082:MM_SYSTEM_FRAME_MASK
bits 4, 3, 2=1

Changes to the relevant machine data result in reorganization of the

buffered memory (data loss!). Series start-up must be performed
after setting the MD and before NCK reset.
References: /IAM/ HMI/MMC Installation and Start-Up Guide

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-215
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
09.01
3.16 Swiveling - CYCLE800 (from SW 6.2)

Note about MD 18088:

1. If more than one channel is declared in the NCU, the
number of swivel data records is divided between them.
Example: MD 18088 MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER =4
Number of channels=2: 2 swivel data records are provided
for each channel.
2. If only one swivel data record is declared (with one
channel), no name needs to be assigned during start-up or
in cycle calls.

Note about MD 22530:

If more than one swivel data record is declared per channel,
and if machine functions need to be activated on changeover
between swivel heads or tables, an M command can be
issued in the NC program on switchover to another swivel
data record.
Example: Number of swivel data records in channel 1 =2
MD 22530: TOCARR_CHANGE_M_CODE = -800
Programming of swivel data record 1 (TCARR=1) --> M801
Programming of swivel data record 2 (TCARR=2) --> M802

Function
The cycle is used during milling to swivel on any type
of surface so that it can be machined and/or measured.
By calling the appropriate NC functions, the cycle
converts the active workpiece zeroes and tool offsets
to refer to the inclined surface, taking account of the
kinematic chain on the machine, and positions the
rotary axes (optional).
Swiveling can be implemented either axially, as a
projection angle or as a solid angle.
Before the rotary axes are positioned, the linear axes
can be retracted if desired.

Machine kinematics
1. Swivel-mounted toolholder (swivel head) --> type T
2. Swivel-mounted workholder (swivel table) --> type P
Mixed kinematics from 1. and 2. --> type M
Important
The zero offset with which the workpiece was scratched must

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-216 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
09.01 Milling Cycles
3.16 Swiveling - CYCLE800 (from SW 6.2)

be programmed before the swivel cycle is first called in the

main program. This zero offset is converted to the appropriate
machining plane in the swivel cycle. The ZO value remains
unchanged. Translational and rotary components are stored in
system frames (swivel frame) PARTFRAME, TOFRAME,
WPFRAME.
Swiveling onto a machining or auxiliary surface
always involves 3 steps:
• Offset of reference point prior to rotation (corresponds to
TRANS or ATRANS)
• Rotation (corresponds to AROT or AROTS)
• Offset of zero point after rotation (corresponds to ATRANS)
The offsets or rotations are not machine-specific, but refer
to the coordinate system X,Y,Z of the
workpiece. No programmable frames are used in the
swivel cycle. The active programmable frames programmed
by the user (or standard cycles) are transferred in the
workpiece frame and then deleted. In this way it can be
ensured that the last swivel plane remains active if required
(settable via machine data) in the event, for example, of a
program reset or power failure. Any type of machining
operation can be performed on the swivel plane, e.g. through
calling standard or measuring cycles.
Note about calling the 5-axis transformation
If a program which activates the 5-axis transformation
(TRAORI) must be executed on the swiveled machining plane,
then either the active zero offset must be programmed after
TRAORI or machine data MD 10602:
FRAME_GEOAX_CHANGE_MODE must be set to 1. PAROT
and TOROT must also be programmed to ensure the tool
lengths are updated.
Example (machine with swivel table)
G54
T="MILL_10mm"
M6
CYCLE800(1,"",0,57,0,40,0,-45,0,0,0,0,0,-1,1) ;Swivel cycle
CYCLE71(50,24,2,0,0,0,80,60,0,4,10,5,0,2000,31,5) ;Face mill
TRAORI
G54 ;Calculation of new zero offset
PAROT ;Calculation of new tool length
EXTCALL "WALZ" ;5-axis machining program with direction vectors
M2

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-217
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
09.01
3.16 Swiveling - CYCLE800 (from SW 6.2)

3.16.1 Operation, parameter assignment

Description of parameters
Interactive screen form CYCLE800 on standard
interface

Reference point
Bezugspunkt
before
vor rotation
der Drehung

Drehung
Rotation

Nullpunkt nach
Zero after rotation
der Drehung

_TC (name of swivel data record)

The existing swivel data records (see Start-Up of Swivel
Function) can be selected (toggled),
"0" à swivel data record deselected.
Each swivel data record has a name. No name needs
to be declared if there is only one swivel data record.

_FR (retraction)
The retraction positions are approached absolutely. If a
different retraction sequence or incremental positioning is
desired, the process can be modified accordingly in user
cycle TOOLCARR during start-up.
• Do not retract
• Retract axis Z
• Retract axis Z, XY
The retraction positions can be entered in the start-up
menu display.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-218 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
09.01 Milling Cycles
3.16 Swiveling - CYCLE800 (from SW 6.2)

With high settings for the return plane in subsequently

programmed standard cycles and a large swivel angle
(through 90 degrees with multiface machining), the
traversing area may be too small (software end position
violation), since the order of approach is always the
machining plane (with G17 X, Y) first followed by the
infeed axis (Z). The return plane can be reduced to
optimize this behavior.

_ST (swivel plane)

• New
Previous swivel frames are deleted and a new
swivel frame formed according to the values
specified in the input screen.
Every main program should begin with a swivel cycle
with the new swivel plane to ensure that a system
frame from another program is not active.
• Additive
The swivel frame is added to the swivel frame of the
last swivel cycle.
If several swivel cycles with the additive swivel
plane are programmed in one program and if
programmable frames (e.g. AROT ATRANS) are
also active between them, then they are chained
(added) to the current swivel frame and then
deleted.

_DIR (direction)
• Minus/plus
Reference to rotary axis 1 or 2 when direction of travel is
selected in swivel cycle interactive screen form. Due to the
large angular range of the rotary axes of the machine
kinematics, the NCU calculates two possible solutions. One
of these solutions is normally appropriate technologically.
The selection as to which rotary axis the two solutions must
refer is made in the start-up menu. The selection of the
solution to be applied is made in the interactive screen form
for the swivel cycle.
• None
The "None" selection applies if the rotary axes must not be
moved when the swivel cycle is activated.
Application: Auxiliary swivel levels according to workpiece
drawing

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-219
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
09.01
3.16 Swiveling - CYCLE800 (from SW 6.2)

_X0, _Y0, _Z0 (reference points prior to rotation)

Reference points

_MODE (swivel mode) Axial

This parameter defines the swivel mode for the axis.
• Axial
• Projection angle
• Solid angle
See also "Starting up CYCLE800"

Swiveling can be implemented either axially, as a

projection angle or as a solid angle. The available
swivel variants are dependent on a machine datum.
• With the axial swiveling variant, the tool is rotated Projection angle
about the individual axes in succession, with each
rotation starting from the previous rotation. The axis
sequence can be selected freely.
• With the solid angle variant, the tool is rotated first
about the Z axis and then the Z axis. The second
rotation starts from the first.
• With the projection angle variant, the tool is rotated
about the individual axes in succession, the axis
sequence being freely selectable. The first two
rotations both refer to the initial state, the last Solid angle
rotation starts from the previous rotation.
The positive direction of each rotation for the
different swivel variants is shown in the help
displays.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-220 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
09.01 Milling Cycles
3.16 Swiveling - CYCLE800 (from SW 6.2)

_A, _B, _C (rotations)

• Rotations (axial, projection angle)

• Rotation (solid angle)

_X1, _Y1, _Z1 (zero point after rotation)

Correction
• Yes / No
Display can be concealed via swivel start-up
setting.
• Yes: When swiveling onto a machining plane, the
rotary axes can be corrected to prevent risk of
collision.
Preconditions:
1. TRAORI option is required.
2. The machine manufacturer has adapted user
cycle TOOLCARR.spf appropriately.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-221
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
09.01
3.16 Swiveling - CYCLE800 (from SW 6.2)

Approach TILT
• Yes / No
Display can be concealed via swivel start-up
setting.
• Yes: The tool orientation after swiveling is always LEAD

perpendicular to the machining plane. When

machining with a radius cutter, it can suit
technological requirements to approach the tool at
an angle to the surface normal vector.

References: /PGA/, "Programming Guide

Advanced", Chapter 7

The setting angle is generated by an axis rotation (max.

15 deg.) in relation to the active swivel plane. Only the
rotations are taken into account in the interactive screen
form with "Approach tool: Yes".
If a milling operation with approached tool is
programmed in a program with several swivel
cycles, the "new" swivel plane must always be set
before the approach instruction --> see programming
example 3.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-222 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
09.01 Milling Cycles
3.16 Swiveling - CYCLE800 (from SW 6.2)

Programming
CYCLE800(_FR, _TC, _ST, _MODE, _XO, _YO, _ZO, _A, _B, _C, _X1, _Y1, _Z1, _DIR)

Parameters

_FR int Retraction

Value: 0...Do not retract
1...Retract axis Z (default)
2...Retract axis Z, X, Y
_TC String[20] Name of swivel data record
"" Swivel data record 1 (default)
"HEAD1" Name of swivel data record
"0" Unload toolholder
_ST int Swivel plane
UNITS DIGIT:
Value: 0...additive
1...new
1)
TENS DIGIT :
Value: 0x...Do not correct tool tip
1x... Correct tool tip
1)
HUNDREDS DIGIT :
Value: 0xx...Do not approach tool
1xx...Approach tool
1) Precondition: Option TRAORI must be available
_MODE int Swivel mode
Value: 0x...axial (default)
1x...Solid angle
8x...Projection angle
Evaluation of angle:
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
01: Rotation around 1st axis
10: Rotation around 2nd axis Angle of
11: Rotation around 3rd axis rotation 1
01: Rotation around 1st axis
10: Rotation around 2nd axis Angle of
11: Rotation around 3rd axis rotation 2
01: Rotation around 1st axis
10: Rotation around 2nd axis Angle of
11: Rotation around 3rd axis rotation 3
00: Swivel angle per axis (_A, _B, _C)
01: Solid angle (_A, _B)
10: Angle of projection (_A, _B, _C)
Note Bits 0 to 5 have no meaning for solid angle

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-223
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
09.01
3.16 Swiveling - CYCLE800 (from SW 6.2)

_X0, _Y0, _Z0 real Reference point prior to rotation

_A real 1. Axis angle (axial swivel mode)
2. Angle of rotation in XY plane about the Z axis (swivel mode 'solid
angle')
3. Axis angle (swivel mode 'projection angle') sequence of axes
_B real 1. Axis angle (axial swivel mode)
2. Angle of rotation in space about the Y axis (swivel mode 'solid
angle')
_C real Axis angle (swivel modes 'axial', 'projection angle')
_X1, _Y1, _Z1 real Zero point after rotation
_DIR int direction
If the CNC calculates 2 solutions when the swivel cycle is called, the
operator can select a preferred direction. The machine manufacturer
specifies the axis to which the preferred direction refers.
Value: -1 (minus)...lower rotary axis value (default)
+1 (plus)...higher rotary axis value
0...no rotary axis movement

Programming example 1
Set swivel plane ZERO
%_N_SWIVEL_0_SPF
;$PATH=/_N_WCS_DIR/_N_HAA_SWIVEL_WPD
G54
CYCLE800(1,"",0,57,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,-1)
M2

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-224 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
09.01 Milling Cycles
3.16 Swiveling - CYCLE800 (from SW 6.2)

Programming example 2
Scratching point G57 25
Face milling and milling a circular pocket on Swivel edge 15 grd
a machining plane swiveled through 15 degrees 30 40

Y
X

%_N_SWIVEL_CIRCULARPOCKET_SPF
;$PATH=/_N_WCS_DIR/_N_HAA_SWIVEL_WPD
N12 T="MILL_26mm"
N14 M6
N16 G57
N18 CYCLE800(1,"",0,57,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,1)
N20 M3 S5000
N22 CYCLE71(50,2,2,0,0,0,80,60,0,4,15,5,0,2000,31,5) ;Face mill
N24 CYCLE800(1,"",0,57,0,25,0,-15,0,0,0,0,0,-1,1)

N26 CYCLE71(50,12,2,0,0,0,80,60,0,4,10,5,0,2000,31,5) ;Face mill

N28 CYCLE800(1,"",1,57,0,0,0,0,0,0,40,30,0,0,1)

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-225
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
09.01
3.16 Swiveling - CYCLE800 (from SW 6.2)

N30 T="MILL_10mm"
N32 M6
N34 M3 S5000
N36 POCKET4(50,0,1,-15,20,0,0,4,0.5,0.5,1000,1000,0,11,,,,,) ;Circular pocket
N38 POCKET4(50,0,1,-15,20,0,0,4,0,0,1000,1000,0,12,,,,,)
N40 M2

Programming example 3
Face milling with approached tool
Create an end face (see programming example 2) with approached tool.
Tool is approached by 10deg. in X.Y.
%_N_SWIVEL_APPROACH_SPF
;$PATH=/_N_WCS_DIR/_N_HAA_SWIVEL_WPD
N12 T="RADMILL_10mm"
N14 M6
N16 G56
N18 CYCLE800(1,"",0,57,0,25,0,-60,0,180,0,0,0,0,1)

N20 CYCLE800(1,"",101,57,0,0,0,10,10,0,0,0,0,-1)

N22 CYCLE71(50,2,0,0,-56,0,-28,60,0,2,2,5,0,2000,41,5)
N40 M2

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-226 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
09.01 Milling Cycles
3.16 Swiveling - CYCLE800 (from SW 6.2)

3.16.2 Starting up CYCLE800

When CYCLE800 is started up, the data (swivel data

record) are set in various different
NCU areas (tool data $TC_CARR1..30, global
GUD7 _TC_xx parameters). These are grouped to
form Swivel start-up menus.

The CYCLE800 start-up process is supported by

the following menu displays:
Start-up of kinematic chain

A swivel data record must be created for each swivel

head, swivel table or each swivel head/table combination.
Swivel data records can be declared in several channels.
The number of swivel data records is limited by the following
machine data:
• MD18088: MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER or
• MD: NUM_CHANNELS

The meaning of the parameters in the screen form is as

follows:
Name: Swivel data record GUD7 _TC_N[n]
If more than one swivel data record is declared in each
NC channel, then a name is assigned to each record. No
name need be specified if the swivel-mounted toolholder
is not exchangeable (i.e. one swivel data record per
channel). The program is advanced to the next swivel
data record and the next channel via softkeys (channel
+/- swivel data record +/-).

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-227
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
09.01
3.16 Swiveling - CYCLE800 (from SW 6.2)

Kinematic type ($TC_CARR23[n] n..swivel data record)

• Swivel head (type T)
• Swivel table (type P)
• Swivel head + swivel table (type M)

Retraction/retraction position
The start-up engineer determines whether the options
'Retract axis Z' and 'Retract axes Z,X,Y' are possible in
the input menu for the swivel cycle.
The mode of retraction can be modified in user cycle
TOOLCARR.spf (marker M41, M40) if necessary. If
user cycle TOOLCARR.spf is not modified, the
retraction position is approached as an absolute
machine position.

Please note the following when moving the tool axes:

Retract the tool axis in such a way that the tool and
workpiece cannot collide when swiveled.

Offset rotary axis vector (machine kinematics)

$TC_CARR1[n] .. $TC_CARR20[n]
The positions in the kinematic chain are measured by the
machine manufacturer; they are always relevant with
respect to a swivel head/table (swivel data record).
The machine kinematics used need not be fully
implemented from the control viewpoint. It must then be
noted that the spatial traversing area is limited.
Manually adjustable rotary tables with or without measuring
systems are possible and can be used with "plain
machines".

Swivel head (type T) Swivel table (type P) Swivel head + swivel table (type M)
Offset vector I1 Offset vector I2 Offset vector I1
Rotary axis vector V1 Rotary axis vector V1 Rotary axis vector V1
Offset vector I2 Offset vector I3 Offset vector I2
Rotary axis vector V2 Rotary axis vector V2 Offset vector I3
Offset vector I3 Offset vector I4 Rotary axis vector V2
Offset vector I4

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-228 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
09.01 Milling Cycles
3.16 Swiveling - CYCLE800 (from SW 6.2)

The vector meanings are as follows:

• Offset vector I1
à Distance between reference point of toolholder
and rotary axis 1
• Offset vector I2
à Distance between rotary axes 1 and 2
• Offset vector I3
à Distance between rotary axis 2 and tool
reference point
• Offset vector I4
à Distance between rotary axis 2 and table
reference point
• Rotary axis vector V1
à Direction of rotary axis 1
• Rotary axis vector V2
à Direction of rotary axis 2

The offset vectors must not necessarily point to the

pivot point of the rotary axes, but it is important that they
are directed towards a point in the direction of rotation.
The sign of the rotary axis vectors is determined by the
direction of rotation of the relevant rotary axis.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-229
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
09.01
3.16 Swiveling - CYCLE800 (from SW 6.2)

_TC_DM (display options)

are coded in GUD6 _TC_DMO[n].
If the appropriate display options are not set, the value is
not displayed in the interactive screen form (see
Subsection 3.16.1, default =0).
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0: Axial
1: Axial + angle of projection
2: Axial + angle of projection + solid angle
Rotary axis 1
0: automatic
1: manual 1
2: manual 2
Rotary axis
0: automatic
1: manual 1
2: manual 2
Selection axis feed direction
0: no
1: Reference to rotary axis 1
2: Reference to rotary axis 2
Correct tool tip
0: no
1: yes
Approach tool
0: no
1: yes
Retraction mode
0: Z axis
1: Z axis or ZXY axis
Automatic compensation with Hirth tooth system
0: no
1: 1st rotary axis
2: 2nd rotary axis
3: 1st and 2nd rotary axis

The following display options affect the interactive screen

form for the swivel cycle:
• Swivel mode
à axial
à axial and projection angle
à axial and projection angle and solid angle
Example:
Selection of swivel mode during start-up:
Axial, angle of projection

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-230 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
09.01 Milling Cycles
3.16 Swiveling - CYCLE800 (from SW 6.2)

• In this case, only 'axial' or 'projection angle'

is included in the input menu. Programming of a
solid angle is not desired or possible in this
example.

• Direction
à rotary axis 1
à rotary axis 2
Reference to rotary axis 1 or 2 when direction of
travel is selected in swivel cycle interactive
screen form.
Due to the large angular range of the rotary axes
of the machine kinematics, the NCU calculates
two possible solutions. One of these solutions is
normally appropriate technologically. The
selection as to which rotary axis the two
solutions must refer is made in the start-up
menu. The selection of the solution to be applied
is made in the interactive screen form for the
swivel cycle.

• Correct tool
à yes
à no
"Correct tool" display in the swivel cycle interactive
screen form. Since the "Correct tool" function
requires the 5-axis transformation function, the
display should be no for machines with SIN810D.

• Approach tool
à yes
à no
"Approach tool" display in the swivel cycle
interactive screen form.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-231
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
09.01
3.16 Swiveling - CYCLE800 (from SW 6.2)

Starting up rotary axis parameters

Input of data relevant to the swivel cycle for

rotary axes 1 and 2.

Identifier
Axis identifiers of rotary axes. The following identifiers
should be chosen where possible:
Axis rotates about axis of coordinate X --> A
Axis rotates about axis of coordinate Y --> B
Axis rotates about axis of coordinate Z --> C
If the axes are registered with the NCU, then the same
axis identifiers must be selected (see Mode).

Mode
• Automatic
Rotary axes are automatically moved to the
appropriate swivel angle
• Manual
Rotary axes are moved manually by the operator
to the appropriate position (see MMC Box
Swiveling). On the "plainest machines" with
manually adjustable rotary axes (measuring
system: Steel gauge), the axis identifier need not
be registered with the NCU.

Accept software end positions

• yes/no
See Angular Range.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-232 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
09.01 Milling Cycles
3.16 Swiveling - CYCLE800 (from SW 6.2)

Angular range
(Accept key for software end positions optional)
$TC_CARR30[n] .. $TC_CARR33[n]
A valid angular range must be assigned to each rotary
axis. This must not be the software end position area.
The traversing range for modulo axes is between 0 and
360 degrees.

Hirth tooth system

• no
The fields below are concealed.
• Yes
à Angular offset of Hirth tooth system at beginning
of gearing.
à Angular grid of Hirth tooth system
à Automatic correction yes / no
The tool might exit the angular grid set for the Hirth
tooth system if the swivel head jams. If this happens,
the swiveled frame will need to be recalculated
(TCOABS) with the current angular values (of the
Hirth tooth system). This functionality is calculated by
the Automatic correction (yes) setting in the swivel
cycle.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-233
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
09.01
3.16 Swiveling - CYCLE800 (from SW 6.2)

Start-up examples for machine kinematics

Example 1: Swivel head 1 "HEAD_1"

Reference point
of tool carrier
172 250 125

I1
V2 150
I2 V1
45 ?

Rotary axis 1
I3
280

Rotary axis 2 Z

Reference point of tool Y

X

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-234 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
09.01 Milling Cycles
3.16 Swiveling - CYCLE800 (from SW 6.2)

Example 2: Swivel head 2 "HEAD_2"

In this example, the offset vectors are not defined as
described for example 1, but as a closed system as defined
below:
Offset vector I1: Distance between point 1 on rotary axis 1
and tool reference point
Offset vector I2: Distance between point on rotary axis 2
and point on rotary axis 1
Offset vector I3: Distance between reference point of tool
and point on rotary axis 2
This advantage of this method is that the position values do
not change in the unswiveled state regardless of whether or
not the swivel head is selected.

172 Rotary axis 2

V2

V1
45 ?
172 I2
I1 Rotary axis 1

93,8
I3 Point on rotary
axis 1 Z

Point on rotary
axis 2 Y
Reference point of X
tool

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-235
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
09.01
3.16 Swiveling - CYCLE800 (from SW 6.2)

Example 3: Table 2
In this example, the offset vectors are not defined as described for
example 3, but as a closed system as defined below:
Offset vector I2: Distance between machine reference point
and point on rotary axis 1
Offset vector I3: Distance between point on rotary axis 1 and
point on rotary axis 2
Offset vector I4: Distance between point on rotary axis 2 and
machine reference point
The advantage of this method is that the position values do
not changed in the unswiveled state, regardless of whether or not the
swivel table is selected.

Rotary axis 2 Rotary axis 1

V2

160 I3
V1
45 ?

I4
190
I2

Z 380 95
Reference point of
machine

Y
X

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-236 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
09.01 Milling Cycles
3.16 Swiveling - CYCLE800 (from SW 6.2)

Example 4: MIXED 1

208 188
Z
Reference point of
tool carrier
Y
X I1
148

V1
I2
250
Rotary axis of
swivel head

Reference point of tool

Reference point
of table Rotary axis of table

76 I4

V2
160
I3 Reference point
of machine

380

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-237
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
09.01
3.16 Swiveling - CYCLE800 (from SW 6.2)

Example 5: MIXED 2
In this example, the reference points of the toolholder and the
tool are identical, as well as the reference points of the table
and the machine.
Thus: I1 = -I2 and I3 = -I4
resulting in each case in a closed system.
The advantage of this method is that the position values do not
change in the unswiveled state, regardless of whether the swivel
head or table is selected.

Z
V1

Y
X Rotary axis of
swivel head

Point on rotary
100 I2 I1 axis of swivel
head

Reference point of tool carrier = Reference point of tool

Z Rotary axis of table

Y V2

Reference point of table = Reference point of machine

I3
200 I4 Rotary axis of
table

Table
Y

X
300

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-238 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
09.01 Milling Cycles
3.16 Swiveling - CYCLE800 (from SW 6.2)

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-239
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
09.01
3.16 Swiveling - CYCLE800 (from SW 6.2)

3.16.3 User cycle TOOLCARR.spf

Programming
All axis positions during swiveling are traversed by
means of user cycle TOOLCARR.spf. This cycle is
called from swivel cycle CYCLE800. It can be modified
by the user (machine manufacturer during start-up) in
order to cater to the properties of specific machines.

%_N_TOOLCARR_SPF
;$PATH=/_N_CUS_DIR
N10 PROC TOOLCARR(INT _MODE,INT _TC1,REAL _A1,REAL _A2,INT _TC2) SAVE
;V06.02.03 29.02.2001-floppy disks
only
;C06.02.03 27.06.2001
;Swiveling user cycle
;20 = Swivel swivel head/table rotary axes 1,2 automatically
;21 = Swivel swivel head/table rotary axis 2 automatically, rotary axis 1
manually
;30 = Swivel swivel head/table rotary axis 1 automatically, rotary axis
2 manually
;31 = Swivel swivel head/table rotary axis 1,2 manually
;40 = User Init
;41 = Retract axis Z
;42 = Retract axis Z,XY
;_TC1 : Number of swivel head/table
;_A1 : Angle of 1st rotary axis
;_A2 : Angle of 2nd rotary axis

;Re 40 --> User Init

;1.User can integrate his own initialization in TOOLCARR prior to 1st
calculation of frame
;2.User can scan variables _TC_N_WZ and _TC_A_WZ in TOOLCARR and e.g.
activate TRAORI.
;Re 41,42
;User can modify the NC blocks with retraction instructions before
programming swivel commands
;The retraction positions (see start-up screen SWIVELING) can thus be
approached absolutely or incrementally.
N12 DEF INT _M345=5,_DD=0
N14 _M345=$AC_SDIR[$AC_MSNUM]

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-240 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 3 3
03.96
09.01 Milling Cycles
3.16 Swiveling - CYCLE800 (from SW 6.2)

N16 CASE _MODE OF 20 GOTOF _M20 21 GOTOF _M21 30 GOTOF _M30 31 GOTOF
_M31 40 GOTOF _M40 41 GOTOF _M41 42 GOTOF _M42 DEFAULT GOTOF _MEND
N18 _M20:
N20 G0 G90 AX[AXNAME(_TC_AX1[_TC_NUM-1])]=_A1
AX[AXNAME(_TC_AX2[_TC_NUM-1])]=DC(_A2)
N22 GOTOF _MEND
N24 _M21: G0 G90 AX[AXNAME(_TC_AX2[_TC_NUM-1])]=_A2
N26 M5
N28 M0
N30 M=_M345
N32 GOTOF _MEND
N34 _M30: G0 G90 AX[AXNAME(_TC_AX1[_TC_NUM-1])]=_A1
N36 M5
N38 M0
N40 M=_M345
N42 GOTOF _MEND
N44 _M31: M5
N46 M0
N48 M=_M345
N50 GOTOF _MEND
N52 _M40:
N54 GOTOF _MEND
N56 _M41:
N58 _DD=$P_TOOL
N60 SUPA D0 G0 G90 G40 G60 Z=_TC_FR_POS[_TC1,0]
N62 D=_DD
N64 GOTOF _MEND
N66 _M42:
N68 _DD=$P_TOOL
N70 SUPA D0 G0 G90 G40 G60 Z=_TC_FR_POS[_TC1,0]
N72 SUPA X=_TC_FR_POS[_TC1,1] Y=_TC_FR_POS[_TC1,2]
N74 D=_DD
N76 GOTOF _MEND
N78 _MEND:
N80 RET

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 3-241
 3 3
Milling Cycles 03.96
09.01
3.16 Swiveling - CYCLE800 (from SW 6.2)

Notes

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

3-242 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 4 4
03.96
09.01 Turning cycles

Turning cycles

4.1 General information .......................................................................................................4-244

4.2 Preconditions .................................................................................................................4-245

4.3 Grooving cycle – CYCLE93 ...........................................................................................4-249

4.4 Undercut cycle – CYCLE94 ...........................................................................................4-259

4.5 Stock removal cycle – CYCLE95...................................................................................4-263

4.6 Thread undercut – CYCLE96 ........................................................................................4-276

4.7 Thread cutting – CYCLE97............................................................................................4-280

4.8 Thread chaining – CYCLE98 .........................................................................................4-288

4.9 Thread recutting (SW 5.3 and later) ..............................................................................4-295

4.10 Extended stock removal cycle – CYCLE950 (SW 5.3 and later)...................................4-297

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 4-243
 4 4
Turning cycles 03.96
4.1 General information

4.1 General information

The following sections describe how turning cycles are
programmed. This section is intended to guide you in
selecting cycles and assigning them with parameters. In
addition to a detailed description of the function of the
individual cycles and the corresponding parameters,
you will also find a programming example at the end of
each section to familiarize you with the use of cycles.

The sections are structured as follows:

• Programming
• Parameters
• Function
• Sequence of operations
• Explanation of parameters
• Additional notes
• Programming example
"Programming" and "Parameters" explain the use of
cycles sufficiently for the experienced user, whereas
beginners can find all the information they need for
programming cycles under "Function", "Sequence of
operations", "Explanation of parameters", "Additional
notes" and the "Programming example".

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

4-244 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 4 4
03.96 Turning cycles
4.2 Preconditions

4.2 Preconditions
Data block for turning cycles
The turning cycles require module GUD7.DEF. It is
supplied on diskette together with the cycles.

Call and return conditions

The G functions active before the cycle is called and the
programmable frame remain active beyond the cycle.

Plane definition
The machining plane must be defined before the X

cycle is called. In the case of turning, this is usually

the G18 (ZX) plane. The two axes of the turning
plane are referred to below as the longitudinal axis
(first axis of this plane) and the plane axis (second Transverse axis
axis of this plane).
If diameter programming is active, the second axis
of the plane is always taken as facing axis (see G18

Programming Guide).

Spindle handling
The turning cycles are written in such a way that the Z
Longitudinal axis
spindle commands always refer to the active master
spindle of the control.
If you want to use a cycle on a machine with several
spindles, the active spindle must first be defined as
the master spindle (see Programming Guide).

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 4-245
 4 4
Turning cycles 03.96
09.01
4.2 Preconditions

Machining status messages

Status messages are displayed on the control monitor
during processing of the turning cycles. The following
messages can be displayed:
• "Thread start <No.> - longitudinal thread machining"
• "Thread start <No.> - face thread machining"
In each case <No.> stands for the number of the figure
that is currently being machined.
These messages do not interrupt program processing
and continue to be displayed until the next message is
displayed or the cycle is completed.

Cycle setting data

For the stock removal cycle CYCLE95, Software
Release 4 and higher has provision for setting data that
is stored in module GUD7.DEF.
Cycle setting data _ZSD[0] can be used to vary the
calculation of the depth infeed MID in CYCLE95. If it is
set to zero, the parameter is calculated as before.
• _ZSD[0]=1 MID is a radius value
• _ZSD[0]=2 MID is a diameter value

For the groove cycle CYCLE93, software release 4 and

higher has provision for setting data in module
GUD7.DEF. This cycle setting data _ZSD[4] can affect
the retraction after the 1st groove.
• _ZSD[4[=1 Retraction with G0
• _ZSD[4]=0 Retraction with G1 (as before)

From SW 6.2 onwards, there is an option for setting

mirroring behavior in _ZSD[6] for grooving cycle
CYCLE93.
• _ZSD[6]=0 The tool offsets are exchanged in the
cycle when mirroring is active (for use without
orientatable toolholder)
• _ZSD[6]=1 The tool offsets are not exchanged in
the cycle with active mirroring
(for use with orientatable toolholder)

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

4-246 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 4 4
03.96 Turning cycles
4.2 Preconditions

Contour monitoring with respect to tool

clearance angle
Some turning cycles in which travel movements with
relief cutting are generated monitor the tool clearance
angle of the active tool for possible contour violation.
This angle is entered as a value in the tool offset (under
parameter P24 in the D offset).
An angle between 0 and 90 degrees is entered without
a sign.

No contour violation Contour violation

When entering the tool clearance angle, remember

that this depends on whether machining is
longitudinal or facing. If a tool is to be used for
longitudinal and face machining, two tool offsets
must be applied if the tool clearance angles are
different.
A check is made in the cycle to determine whether
the programmed contour can be machined with the
selected tool.
If machining is not possible with this tool, then
• the cycle is terminated with an error message
(while cutting) or
• contour machining continues and a message is
No contour violation Contour violation
output (in undercut cycles). The tool nose
geometry then determines the contour.
Note that active scale factors or rotations in the
current plane modify the relationships at the angles,
and that this cannot be allowed for in the contour
monitoring that takes place within the cycle.
If the tool clearance angle is specified as zero in the
tool offset, this monitoring function is deactivated.
The precise reactions are described in the various
cycles.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 4-247
 4 4
Turning cycles 03.96
09.01
4.2 Preconditions

Turning cycles with active adapter

transformation
From NCK SW 6.2 onwards, turning cycles can also
be executed with an active adapter transformation.
The transformed tool offset data for the tool point
direction and clearance angle are always read.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

4-248 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 4 4
03.96
09.01 Turning cycles
4.3 Grooving cycle – CYCLE93

4.3 Grooving cycle – CYCLE93

Programming
CYCLE93 (SPD, SPL, WIDG, DIAG, STA1, ANG1, ANG2, RCO1, RCO2, RCI1, RCI2,
FAL1, FAL2, IDEP, DTB, VARI, _VRT)

Parameters

SPD real Starting point in the facing axis (enter without sign)
SPL real Starting point in the longitudinal axis
WIDG real Width of groove (enter without sign)
DIAG real Depth of groove (enter without sign)
STA1 real Angle between contour and longitudinal axis
Value range: 0<=STA1<=180 degrees
ANG1 real Flank angle 1: on the side of the groove defined by the starting point
(enter without sign)
Value range: 0<=ANG1<89.999 degrees
ANG2 real Flank angle 2: on the other side (enter without sign)
Value range: 0<=ANG2<89.999
RCO1 real Radius/chamfer 1, outside: on the side defined by the starting point
RCO2 real Radius/chamfer 2, outside
RCI1 real Radius/chamfer 1, inside: on the starting point side
RCI2 real Radius/chamfer 2, inside
FAL1 real Final machining allowance on the base of the groove
FAL2 real Final machining allowance on the flanks
IDEP real Infeed depth (enter without sign)
DTB real Dwell time at base of groove
VARI int Type of machining
Value range 1...8 and 11...18
_VRT real Variable retraction distance from contour, incremental
from SW (enter without sign)
6.2 or
higher

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 4-249
 4 4
Turning cycles 03.96
4.3 Grooving cycle – CYCLE93

Function
With the grooving cycle you can make symmetrical
and asymmetrical grooves for longitudinal and
traverse machining on straight contour elements.
You can machine both external and internal grooves.

Sequence of operations
The depth infeed (towards the base of the groove)
and infeed across the width (from groove to groove)
are distributed evenly and with the greatest possible
value.
If the groove is being machined on an inclined
surface, travel from one groove to the next follows
the shortest path, i.e. parallel to the cone on which
the groove is being machined. The safety distance to
the contour is calculated in the cycle.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

4-250 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 4 4
03.96 Turning cycles
4.3 Grooving cycle – CYCLE93

1st step
Paraxial roughing to the base of the groove in single
infeed steps. After each infeed, the tool is retracted
for chip breaking.

2nd step
The groove is machined perpendicular to the infeed
direction in one or more cuts. Each cut is again
divided up according to the infeed depth. From the
second cut along the groove width the tool is
withdrawn by 1mm before it is fully retracted.

3rd step
Cutting of the flanks in one step, if angles are
programmed under ANG1 or ANG2. The infeed
along the groove width is performed in several steps
if the flank width is larger.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 4-251
 4 4
Turning cycles 03.96
4.3 Grooving cycle – CYCLE93

4th step
Cutting of final machining allowance parallel to the
contour from the edge to the center of the groove.
The tool radius compensation is automatically
selected and deselected by the cycle.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

4-252 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 4 4
03.96 Turning cycles
4.3 Grooving cycle – CYCLE93

Description of parameters X

SPD and SPL (starting point)

You define the starting point of the groove from SPL

where the cycle calculates the shape with these IDEP STA1

coordinates. The cycle itself determines the starting

R
C
01
point to be approached at the beginning. In the case

DIAG
02
of an external groove, the longitudinal axis direction I2

RC

R
C ANG1

C
R

I1
ANG2
is first traversed and in the case of an internal

SPD
groove, the facing axis direction is first traversed. WIDG

Grooves on curved surfaces can be created in a

variety of ways. Depending on the shape and radius
of the curve, either a paraxial straight line can be
placed on the maximum of the curve or a tangential Z

oblique line can be placed on one of the edge points

of the groove.
Radii and chamfers on the groove edge of a curved X

surface should only be programmed if the edge point

in question is positioned on the straight line defined
for the cycle. ANG2

WIDG and DIAG (groove width and groove depth) IDEP

WIDG

DIAG
The shape of the groove is defined with the
parameters groove width (WIDG) and groove depth ANG1
(DIAG). The cycle always starts its calculation from SPL
STA1
the point programmed with SPD and SPL.

SPD
If the groove is wider than the active tool, the groove
is machined in several steps. The total width is
divided into equal sections in the cycle. The Z

maximum infeed is 95 percent of the tool width after

subtracting the tool nose radii. This ensures a cut
overlap.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 4-253
 4 4
Turning cycles 03.96
08.97
4.3 Grooving cycle – CYCLE93

If the programmed groove width is less than the actual X

tool width, the error message
61602 "Tool width incorrectly defined" is output,
SPL
the cycle is not started and machining is aborted.
IDEP STA1
The alarm is also output if the value zero has been

R
entered for the tool nose width.

C
01

DIAG
02
RC

I2
R
ANG1
STA1 (angle)

C
C

I1
R
ANG2
The angle of the oblique surface on which the

SPD
WIDG
groove is to be machined is programmed with
parameter STA1. The angle can have any value
between 0 and 180 degrees and always refers to the
longitudinal axis.
Z

ANG1 and ANG2 (flank angle)

Asymmetrical grooves can be described by separate
X
flank angles. The angles can be assigned any value
between 0 and 89.999 degrees.

ANG2
RCO1, RCO2 and RCI1, RCI2 (radius/chamfer)
The shape of the groove can be modified by entering
IDEP
WIDG

radii/chamfers for the edge or base of the groove. DIAG

The values for the radii must always be positive, the
values for the chamfers must always be negative. ANG1
SPL
You can use the tens setting for the VARI parameter STA1
to determine the type of calculation for programmed SPD

milling.
• With VARI<10 (tens=0) the absolute value of this
Z
parameter is regarded as chamfer length
(chamfering with CHF programming).
• With VARI>10, it is regarded as path length
(chamfering with CHR programming).

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

4-254 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 4 4
03.96
09.01 Turning cycles
4.3 Grooving cycle – CYCLE93

FAL1 and FAL2 (machining allowance)

You can program separate final machining allowances
for the groove base and the flanks. Roughing is
performed to this final machining allowance. Then, the
same tool is used to machine a contour-parallel cut
Final machining
along the final contour. allowance on
flanks, FAL2

IDEP (infeed depth) Final machining

By programming an infeed depth you can divide the at base, FAL1

paraxial grooving action into several depth infeeds.

After every infeed, the tool is retracted for
chipbreaking by 1mm or, from SW 6.2 or higher
onwards, by the distance programmed under _VRT.
Parameter IDEP, anyway, is to be programmed.

DTB (dwell time) VARI Selection of cycle support

A dwell time at the base of the groove should be
1/11 X longitudinal, external,
chosen that allows at least one spindle revolution. left
The dwell time is programmed in seconds.
Z
5/15 X longitudinal, external,
VARI (type of processing) right
The units digit of the VARI parameter determines the Z
type of processing for the groove. This parameter 3/13 X longitudinal, internal,
left
can be assigned any of the values shown in the
figure. Z
7/17 X longitudinal, internal,
right
The tens value of the VARI determines the type of
Z
calculation for the chamfer.
6/16 X plane, external, top
VARI 1...8: Chamfers are calculated as CHF
VARI 11...18: Chamfers are calculated as CHF
Z
8/18 X plane, external, bottom
Input of the ones position in cycle support is
distributed among three selection fields: Z
1. Field: longitudinal/plane 2/12 X plane, internal, top
2. Field: external/internal
3. Field: starting point left/right (for longitudinal) or Z
top/bottom (for plane) 4/14 X plane, internal, bottom

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 4-255
 4 4
Turning cycles 03.96
09.01
4.3 Grooving cycle – CYCLE93

If the parameter is assigned another value, the cycle

is aborted and alarm
61002 "Machining type incorrectly programmed".
is output.
The contour monitoring performed by the cycle
ensures that a realistic groove contour results. This
is not the case if the radii/chamfers touch each other
at the base of the groove or overlap or if an attempt
at face grooving is made on a section of the contour
that runs parallel to the longitudinal axis. In these
cases, the cycle is aborted with alarm
61603 "Groove form incorrectly defined".

_VRT (variable retraction path)

From SW 6. onward, the retraction path can be
programmed on the basis of the outside or inside
diameter of the groove in parameter _VRT. If
_VRT=0 (parameter not programmed),
liftoff is 1mm. The retraction path is always
measured in the programmed system of units inch or
metric.
The same retraction path is also used for
chipbreaking after each depth infeed into the groove.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

4-256 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 4 4
03.96 Turning cycles
4.3 Grooving cycle – CYCLE93

Further notes
You must activate a double-edged tool before calling
the grooving cycle. You must enter the offset values for
the two tool edges in two successive D numbers of the
tool, the first of which must be activated before the cycle
is called. The cycle determines itself which of the two
tool offsets it requires for which machining step and
activates them automatically. After the cycle is
completed, the offset number programmed before the
cycle call becomes active again. If no D number has
been programmed for a tool offset when the cycle is
called, the cycle is aborted with alarm
61000 "No tool offset active"
and the cycle is aborted.

For SW 5.1 and higher, cycle setting data _ZSD[4]

can be used to influence the retraction after the 1st
groove.
_ZSD[4]=0 means retraction with G1 as before,
_ZSD[4]=1 means retraction with G0.

From SW 6.2 or higher onward, cycle data _ZSD[6] can

be set to define how the tool offset is handled in the
cycle.
_ZSD[6]=0 TO is exchanged internally in the cycle
(without orientatable toolholder)
_ZSD[6]=1 TO is not exchanged internally in the cycle
(with orientatable toolholder)

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 4-257
 4 4
Turning cycles 03.96
4.3 Grooving cycle – CYCLE93

Programming example X

Grooving
This program machines a groove on an oblique
surface (longitudinal, outside).
The starting point is at X35 Z60.
The cycle uses tool offsets D1 and D2 of tool T1. 5°
The grooving tool must be defined correspondingly.

10°

25
20°
Chamfers 2mm

30

10
60 Z

DEF REAL SPD=35, SPL=60, WIDG=30, -> Definition of parameters with value
-> DIAG=25, STA1=5, ANG1=10, ANG2=20, -> assignments
-> RCO1=0, RCI1=-2, RCI2=-2, RCO2=0, ->
-> FAL1=1, FAL2=1, IDEP=10, DTB=1
DEF INT VARI=5
N10 G0 G90 Z65 X50 T1 D1 S400 M3 Starting point before the beginning of the
cycle
N20 G95 F0.2 Specification of technology values
N30 CYCLE93 (SPD, SPL, WIDG, DIAG, -> Cycle call
-> STA1, ANG1, ANG2, RCO1, RCO2, ->
-> RCI1, RCI2, FAL1, FAL2, IDEP, ->
-> DTB, VARI)
N40 G0 G90 X50 Z65 Next position
N50 M02 End of program

-> Must be programmed in a single block

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

4-258 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 4 4
03.96 Turning cycles
4.4 Undercut cycle – CYCLE94

4.4 Undercut cycle – CYCLE94

Programming
CYCLE94 (SPD, SPL, FORM, _VARI)

Parameters

SPD real Starting point in the facing axis (enter without sign)
SPL real Starting point of the contour in the longitudinal axis
(enter without sign)
FORM char Definition of the form
Values: E (for form E)
F (for form F)
_VARI int Specification of undercut position
(from SW Values: 0 according to tool point direction
6.2 or 1...4 Define position
higher)

Function
With this cycle you can machine undercuts of form E Form F
and F in accordance with DIN509 with the usual load on
a finished part diameter of >3mm.

Another cycle CYCLE96 exists for producing thread

undercuts (see Section 4.6).

Form E

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 4-259
 4 4
Turning cycles 03.96
4.4 Undercut cycle – CYCLE94

Sequence of operations
Position reached prior to cycle start:
The starting position can be any position from which
the undercut can be approached without collision.

The cycle implements the following motion

sequence:
• Approach to the starting point calculated in the
cycle with G0
• Selection of tool nose radius compensation
according to active tool point direction and
traversal of undercut contour at feedrate
programmed prior to cycle call
• Retraction to the starting point with G0 and
deselection of the tool nose radius compensation
with G40

Description of parameters
X
SPD and SPL (starting point)
The finished part diameter for the undercut is SPL

entered in parameter SPD. With parameter SPL you

define the finished part dimensions in the
longitudinal axis.
If the value programmed for SPD results in a final
diameter that is <3mm, the cycle is aborted with the
SPD
alarm
61601 "Finished part diameter too small".
is output.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

4-260 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 4 4
03.96 Turning cycles
4.4 Undercut cycle – CYCLE94

FORM (definition) +X
FORM E
Form E and Form F are defined in DIN509 and
determined by this parameter.
SL3
If the parameter is assigned a value other than E or For workpieces with
F, the cycle is aborted and alarm one machined surface

61609 "Form incorrectly defined" is output.

FORM F +Z

For workpieces with two SL2

machined surfaces at
right angles to each other

_VARI (undercut position)

+X
The position of the undercut can be either specified
directly or derived from the tool point direction with SL 4 SL 3
parameter _VARI.
VARI=0: According to tool point direction
The cycle automatically determines the tool point
direction from the active tool offset. The cycle can then
only work with tool point directions 1 to 4. +Z
If the cycle recognizes a tool point direction 5 ... 9,
alarm
61608 "Wrong tool point direction programmed"
is output and the cycle is aborted.
SL 1 SL 2
_VARI=1...4: Definition of undercut position
The cycle determines the starting point automatically.
This lies 2mm from the final diameter and
10mm from the final dimension in the longitudinal axis.
The position of this starting point in relation to the
programmed coordinate values is determined by the
tool point direction of the active tool.
The cycle monitors the clearance angle of the active
tool if a value has been assigned to the relevant
parameter of the tool offset. If the cycle ascertains that
the undercut form cannot be machined with the
selected tool because the clearance angle is too small,
the message
"Altered undercut form" appears on the control, but
machining is continued.

When _VARI<>0 the following applies:

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 4-261
 4 4
Turning cycles 03.96
09.01
4.4 Undercut cycle – CYCLE94

• The actual tool point direction is not checked, i.e. all

directions can be used if this is meaningful
technologically,
• No special consideration is given to functions such
as adapter transformation, orientatable toolholder in
the cycle. It is assumed that the user is familiar with
the conditions on the machine and has specified the
position correctly;
• Similarly, mirroring is not specially treated either,
the user must be responsible for making the correct
settings.

Further notes
You must activate a tool offset before you call the
cycles. Otherwise alarm
61000 "No tool offset active"
is output and the cycle is aborted.

Programming example
X
Undercut_form_E
You can machine an undercut of form E with this
program.

FORM E

20

60 Z

N10 T25 D3 S300 M3 G95 F0.3 Specification of technology values

N20 G0 G90 Z100 X50 Selection of starting position
N30 CYCLE94 (20, 60, "E") Cycle call
N40 G90 G0 Z100 X50 Approach next position
N50 M02 End of program

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

4-262 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 4 4
03.96
09.01 Turning cycles
4.5 Stock removal cycle – CYCLE95

4.5 Stock removal cycle – CYCLE95

Programming
CYCLE95 (NPP, MID, FALZ, FALX, FAL, FF1, FF2, FF3, VARI, DT, DAM, _VRT)

Parameters

NPP string Name of the contour subroutine

MID real Infeed depth (enter without sign)
FALZ real Final machining allowance in the longitudinal axis (enter without sign)
FALX real Final machining allowance in the facing axis (enter without sign)
FAL real Final machining allowance along contour (enter without sign)
FF1 real Feedrate for roughing without relief cut
FF2 real Feedrate for insertion into relief cut elements
FF3 real Feedrate for finishing
VARI int Type of machining
Value range: 1 ... 12
HUNDREDS DIGIT (from SW 6.2 or higher):
Values: 0... with rounding at the contour
No residual corners will remain, the contour is
rounded overlapping. meaning that the contours are rounded
over several points of intersection.
2... without rounding at the contour
The machine always rounds to the previous roughing
intersection and then retracts. Depending on the ratio of tool
radius to infeed depth (MID), residual corners might be left.
DT real Dwell time for chip breaking during roughing
DAM real Path length after which each roughing cut is interrupted for chip
breaking
_VRT real Retraction distance from contour for roughing, incremental
With SW (enter without sign)
4.4 and
higher

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 4-263
 4 4
Turning cycles 03.96
4.5 Stock removal cycle – CYCLE95

Function
With this stock removal cycle you can machine a
contour programmed in a subroutine from a blank with
paraxial stock removal. Relief cut elements can be
included in the contour. With this cycle, contours can be
machined in the longitudinal and facing directions,
inside and outside. The technology is freely selectable
(roughing, finishing, complete machining). During
roughing, paraxial cuts are generated from the
maximum programmed infeed depth and when a point
of intersection with the contour is reached, the residual
corners are immediately removed cutting parallel to the
contour. Roughing is performed to the programmed
final machining allowance.
Finishing is performed in the same direction as
roughing. The tool radius compensation is automatically
selected and deselected by the cycle.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

4-264 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 4 4
03.96
12.98 Turning cycles
4.5 Stock removal cycle – CYCLE95

Sequence of operations
Position reached prior to cycle start:
The starting position can be any position from which
the starting point of the contour can be approached
without collision.

The cycle implements the following motion

sequence:
• The cycle starting point is calculated in the cycle
and then approached in both axes simultaneously
with G0.

Roughing without relief cut elements:

• Paraxial infeed to the actual depth is calculated
X
internally and then approached with G0.
• Approach roughing point paraxially with G1 and
feedrate FF1.
• Machine parallel to the contour at contour + final
machining allowance to the last roughing
intersection point with G1/G2/G3 and FF1.
• Lift off contour by the amount programmed in
_VRT in every axis and retraction with G0.
• This procedure is repeated until the total depth of the
section to the machining step has been reached.
• When roughing without relief cut elements, retraction
Z
to the cycle starting point is effected axis by axis.
Roughing the relief cut elements:
X
• Approach the starting point for the next relief cut
axis by axis with G0. An additional safety
distance is calculated internally.
• Infeed parallel to the contour + final machining
allowance with G1/G2/G3 and FF2.
• Approach roughing point paraxially with G1 and
feedrate FF1.
• Machine to the last roughing point. Lift and retract
as in the first machining section.
• If further relief cut elements are to be machined, Z
Roughing without relief cut
repeat the above procedure for each relief cut Roughing of the first relief cut
element. Roughing of the second relief cut

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 4-265
 4 4
Turning cycles 03.96
10.00
4.5 Stock removal cycle – CYCLE95

Finishing:
• The calculated cycle starting point is approached in both
axes simultaneously with G0 and tool nose radius
compensation is selected.
• Both axes then continue to move; with G0 up to an amount
final machining allowance + tool nose radius +
1mm safety distance ahead of the contour starting point,
and from there with G1 to the contour starting point.
• Finish cutting along the contour with G1/G2/G3 and
FF3.
• Retraction to starting point with both axes and G0.

Description of parameters
X
NPP (name)
Enter the name of the contour subroutine under this FALX
NPP
parameter. This contour subroutine must not be a
subroutine with a parameter list.
Please use the name conventions described in the
Programming Guide when naming the contour
subroutine.
FALZ
In SW 5.2 and later, the machining contour can also be
a section of the calling routine or from any other
program. The section is identified by start or end labels
or by block numbers. In this case, the program name
and labels/block number are identified by an ":". Z
Examples:
NPP="CONTOUR_1" The machining contour is the complete
program "Contour_1".
NPP="START:END" The machining contour is defined as the
section starting from the block labeled
START to the block labeled END in the
calling routine.
NPP="/_N_SPF_DIR/_N_CONTOUR_1_SPF:N130:N2 The machining contour is defined in blocks
10" N130 to N210 in program CONTOUR_1.
Write the full program name together with
path and extension, refer to CALL
description in the References: /PGA/
Programming Guide Advanced.
If the section is defined by block numbers, it must be
noted that these block numbers for the section in NPP
must be correspondingly adjusted if the program is
modified and subsequently renumbered.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

4-266 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 4 4
03.96
08.97 Turning cycles
4.5 Stock removal cycle – CYCLE95

MID (infeed depth)

Under parameter MID you define the maximum possible
infeed depth for the roughing operation.
The interpretation of this parameter depends on the
cycle setting data for software release 4 and higher
_ZSD[0] (see Section 4.2).
The cycle automatically calculates the actual infeed
depth for roughing.
Where contours with relief cut elements are to be
machined, the cycle divides up the roughing operation
into single roughing steps. The cycle recalculates the
actual infeed depth for every roughing step. This actual
infeed depth always lies between the programmed
infeed depth and half its value. The number of required
roughing cuts is derived from the total depth of a
roughing section and the programmed maximum infeed
depth. The total depth to be machined is then divided
equally amongst these roughing cuts. This method
ensures optimum cutting conditions. The machining
steps shown in the figure above are used for roughing
this contour.

Example for the calculation of the actual infeed

depths:
X
Machining section 1 has a total depth of 39mm. If
the maximum infeed depth is 5mm, 8 roughing cuts
are required. These are performed with an infeed of
4.875mm.
In machining section 2, 8 roughing cuts, each with
8x4,875mm

an infeed of 4.5mm are also executed (total

39.

difference 36mm).
36
8x4,5mm
7
2x3,5mm

Machining section 3 is roughed twice with an actual

infeed of 3.5 (total difference 7mm).
Z

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 4-267
 4 4
Turning cycles 03.96
10.00
4.5 Stock removal cycle – CYCLE95

FAL, FALZ and FALX (final machining allowance)

The final machining allowance for the roughing operation
is either defined in parameters FALZ and FALX if you
wish to enter different final machining allowances for
each axis or in parameter FAL if you wish to enter a final
machining allowance that follows a contour. In this case,
this value is used for the final machining allowance in
both axes.
The programmed values are not subjected to a
plausibility check. If all three parameters are assigned
values, all the final machining allowances are calculated
by the cycle. It is, however, advisable to decide on one or
the other form of final machining allowance definition.
Roughing is always performed to these final machining
allowances. After each paraxial roughing operation the
resulting residual corners are immediately cut parallel to
the contour so that these do not have to be removed after
the roughing operation is completed. If no final machining
allowances have been programmed, roughing is
performed to the final contour.
The finish cut machining mode does not consider
programmed values. Turning always takes place down
to finishing dimension.
FF1, FF2 and FF3 (feedrate) G1/G2/G3
You can define different feedrates for the different X G0
Roughing
machining steps as is shown in the figure on the FF1

right.

FF2

FF1

X
Finishing

FF3

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

4-268 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 4 4
03.96
09.01 Turning cycles
4.5 Stock removal cycle – CYCLE95

VARI (machining types) Longitudinal, outside

X VARI=1/5/9
You can call the machining types as follows:
Machining Roughing
(Roughing/finishing/complete)
Selection longitudinal
(longitudinal/transverse) Longitudinal, inside
VARI=3/7/11
Selection outside
Z
(outside/inside)
The machining types are shown in the table below. X

Value Machining Selection Selection or after

1 Roughing long. outside rechucking

2 Roughing transv. outside

3 Roughing long. inside Longitudinal, inside
VARI=3/7/11
4 Roughing transv. inside Z
Transverse, inside
5 Finishing long. outside VARI=4/8/12

6 Finishing transv. outside X

7 Finishing long. inside Transverse,

outside
8 Finishing transv. inside VARI=2/6/10
9 Complete machining long. outside
10 Complete machining transv. outside
11 Complete machining long. inside
Z
12 Complete machining transv. inside
X
Infeed is always performed in the facing axis with
longitudinal machining and in the longitudinal axis
or after
with face machining. rechucking
Outside machining means that infeed is performed in
Transverse, inside
the direction of the negative axis. In inside VARI=4/8/12
machining, infeed is performed in the direction of the Z
positive axis.
When roughing in CYCLE95, you can choose between
"with rounding" or "without rounding" at the contour from
SW 6.2 or higher. For doing so, the HUNDREDS DIGIT
is implemented in parameter VARI.

A plausibility check is performed on parameter VARI. If

you select an invalid value, the cycle is aborted and
alarm 61002 "Wrong machining type defined" is put out.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 4-269
 4 4
Turning cycles 03.96
09.01
4.5 Stock removal cycle – CYCLE95

DT and DAM (dwell time and path length)

With these two parameters you can program an Interrupted paraxial cut
interruption in the individual roughing cuts after a
X
defined path for the purposes of chip breaking. DAM
Infeed G1
These parameters only apply to roughing. In movement

parameter DAM you define the maximum path after

which chip breaking is to be performed. In DT you G4 G4 G4 G4
can also program a dwell time to be included at each
of the interruption points. If no path has been
specified for cut interruption (DAM = 0), then
uninterrupted roughing cuts without dwell times are
Z
generated.

_VRT (lift)
With SW 4.4. or higher, the amount by which the tool
is lifted off the contour in both axes during roughing
operations can be programmed in parameter _VRT.
If _VRT=0 (parameter not programmed), liftoff is 1mm.
The retraction distance is always measured in inches or
metric depending on the programmed system, i.e.
_VRT=1 for inch àprogramming produces a tool retract
of 1 inch.

Further notes
Contour definition
The contour is programmed in a subroutine whose
name is defined as a parameter.
The contour subroutine must contain at least 3 blocks
with movements in both axes of the machining plane.
The machining plane (G17, G18, G19) is set in the main
program before the cycle is called or applied according
to the basic setting of this
G group on the machine. It cannot be altered in the
contour subroutine.
If the contour subroutine is shorter, alarms 10933 "The
contour subroutine contains too few contour blocks" and
61606 "Error in preprocessing contour"
and the cycle is aborted.

Relief cut elements can be programmed

consecutively.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

4-270 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 4 4
03.96
12.98 Turning cycles
4.5 Stock removal cycle – CYCLE95

Blocks without movement in the plane are not

subject to any limitations.

All the traversing blocks for the first two axes in the
current plane are preprocessed in the cycle as only
these axes are involved in the machining operation.
Movements for other axes can be included in the
contour subroutine but their travel paths are
suppressed during the cycle run.

The only geometry permitted in the contour are

straight line and circular programming with G0, G1,
G2 and G3. Commands for fillets and chamfers can
also be programmed. If any other motion commands
are programmed in the contour, it is aborted with
alarm
10930 "Illegal interpolation type in the machining
contour".

The first block containing a traversing movement in

the current machining plane must contain a travel
command G0, G1, G2 or G3, otherwise the cycle is
aborted with the alarm
15800 "Wrong starting conditions for CONTPRON".
This alarm is also activated when G41/G42 is active.
The starting point of the contour is the first position
on the machining plane programmed in the contour
subroutine.

The maximum possible number of blocks for the

contour containing travel commands for the current
plane depends on the type of contour. In principle,
there is no limit to the possible number of relief cuts.

If a contour contains more contour elements than

the cycle memory can hold, the cycle is aborted with
the alarm
10934 "Overflow contour table".

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 4-271
 4 4
Turning cycles 03.96
12.98
4.5 Stock removal cycle – CYCLE95

Machining must then be divided into several

machining sections each of which is represented by
its own contour subroutine and each cycle called
separately.
If the maximum diameter in one contour subroutine
is not within the programmed end point or starting X
point of the contour, the cycle automatically extends
a paraxial straight line to the maximum point of the Extended
contour at the end of the machining operation and straight line

this part of the contour is then removed as a relief

cut.
End point
If any of the following are programmed in the contour
subroutine:
• Radius compensation plane with G17/G18/G19 Starting
point
• Frames
• An axis of the plane in which machining is
performed is traversed as a positioning axis Z

• Selection of tool radius compensation with

G41/G42
Alarm
10931 "Incorrect machining contour" is activated
and aborts the cycle.

Contour direction
With SW 4.4 and later, the direction in which the
stock removal contour can be programmed is freely
selectable. The machining direction is automatically
defined in the cycle. With complete machining
operations, the contour is finished in the same
direction in which rough cutting took place.
If only finishing is selected, the contour is always
traversed in the programmed direction.
The first and last programmed contour points are the
criteria for selecting the machining direction. For this
reason, both coordinates must always be
programmed in the first block of the contour
subroutine.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

4-272 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 4 4
03.96
12.98 Turning cycles
4.5 Stock removal cycle – CYCLE95

Contour monitoring
The cycle performs contour monitoring of the
following:
• Clearance angles of the active tool
• Programming of arcs with an aperture angle of >
180 degrees
In the case of relief cut elements, the cycle checks
whether machining is possible with the active tool. If
the cycle detects that this machining operation will
lead to a contour violation, it is aborted after alarm
61604 "Active program violates programmed
contour" is output.

Contour monitoring is not performed if the clearance

angle has been defined as zero in the tool offset.

If the arcs in the offset are too large, alarm

10931 "Incorrect machining contour" is output.

Starting point
The cycle determines the starting point of the X
machining operation automatically. The starting point
is positioned on the axis in which infeed is performed
Sum of the final machining
at a distance from the contour corresponding to final allowance in X+_VRT START POINT
machining allowance + liftoff distance (parameter of the cycle

_VRT). In the other axis, it is positioned at a distance Sum of final mach.

corresponding to final machining allowance + _VRT allow. in Z+_VRT

in front of the contour starting point.

The tool noise radius compensation is selected
internally in the cycle when the starting point is
approached.
The last point before the cycle is called must therefore
Z
be selected such that it can be approached without risk
of collision and adequate space is available for the
compensating movement.
Approach strategy of the cycle
The starting point calculated by the cycle is always
approached in the two axes simultaneously for
roughing and one axis at a time for finishing. In
finishing, the infeed axis is the first to travel.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 4-273
 4 4
Turning cycles 03.96
12.98
4.5 Stock removal cycle – CYCLE95

Programming example 1
Stock removal cycle X
The contour illustrated in the figure explaining the
assignment parameters must be machined
completely (longitudinal, outside). Axis-specific final P6 (35,76)
machining allowances have been defined. No P2 (87,65)
interruption between cuts has been programmed.
The maximum infeed is 5mm. P4 (52,44)

R5
The contour is stored in a separate program. P1 (120,37)
P5 (41,37)
P3 (77,29)

DEF STRING[8] UPNAME Definition of a variable for the contour name

N10 T1 D1 G0 G95 S500 M3 Z125 X81 Approach position before cycle call
UPNAME="CONTOUR_1" Assignment of subroutine name
N20 CYCLE95 (UPNAME, 5, 1.2, 0.6, , -> Cycle call
-> 0 .2, 0.1, 0.2, 9, , , 0.5)
N30 G0 G90 X81 Reapproach to starting position
N40 Z125 Traverse in each axis separately
N50 M30 End of program
PROC CONTOUR_1 Beginning of contour subroutine
N100 G1 Z120 X37 Traverse in each axis separately
N110 Z117 X40
N120 Z112 RND=5 Rounding with radius 5
N130 G1 Z95 X65 Traverse in each axis separately
N140 Z87
N150 Z77 X29
N160 Z62
N170 Z58 X44
N180 Z52
N190 Z41 X37
N200 Z35
N210 G1 X76
N220 M17 End of subroutine

-> Must be programmed in a single block

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

4-274 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 4 4
03.96
08.99 Turning cycles
4.5 Stock removal cycle – CYCLE95

Programming example 2
Stock removal cycle X
The machining contour is defined in the calling
program and traversed directly after the finishing
cycle call. P5 (50,50)

P4 (50,41.547)

P3 (70,21.547)

P2 (90,10)
P1 (100,10)

N110 G18 DIAMOF G90 G96 F0.8

N120 S500 M3
N130 T11 D1
N140 G0 X70
N150 Z60
N160 CYCLE95 ("START:END",2.5,0.8, -> Cycle call
0.8,0,0.8,0.75,0.6,1)
START:
N180 G1 X10 Z100 F0.6
N190 Z90
N200 Z=AC(70) ANG=150
N210 Z=AC(50) ANG=135
N220 Z=AC(50) X=AC(50)
END:
N230 M02

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 4-275
 4 4
Turning cycles 03.96
09.01
4.6 Thread undercut – CYCLE96

4.6 Thread undercut – CYCLE96

Programming
CYCLE96 (DIATH, SPL, FORM, _VARI)

Parameters

DIATH Real Nominal diameter of the thread

SPL Real Starting point on the contour of the longitudinal axis
FORM Char Definition of the form
Values: A (for Form A)
B (for Form B)
C (for Form C)
D (for Form D)
_VARI Int Specification of undercut position
(from SW Values: 0 according to tool point direction
6.2 or 1...4 Define position
higher)

Function
This cycle is for machining thread undercuts in
accordance with DIN 76 on parts with a metric ISO
thread.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

4-276 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 4 4
03.96 Turning cycles
4.6 Thread undercut – CYCLE96

Sequence of operations
Position reached prior to cycle start:
The starting position can be any position from which
any thread undercut can be approached without
collision.

The cycle implements the following motion

sequence:
• Approach to the starting point calculated in the
cycle with G0
• Selection of the tool radius compensation for the
active tool point direction. Retraction along the
undercut contour at the feedrate programmed
before cycle call.
• Retraction to the starting point with G0 and
deselection of tool radius compensation with
G40.

Description of parameters
X
DIATH (nominal diameter)
With this cycle you can machine thread undercuts
SPL
for metrical ISO threads from M3 to M68.
If the value programmed in DIATH results in a final
diameter of <3mm, the cycle is aborted and alarm
DIATH
61601 "Finished part diameter too small" is output.
If the parameter is assigned a value other than that
defined by DIN76 Part 1, again the cycle is aborted Z
and the alarm
61001 "Thread pitch incorrectly defined" is output.

SPL (starting point)

With parameter SPL you define the final dimension
in the longitudinal axis.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 4-277
 4 4
Turning cycles 03.96
09.01
4.6 Thread undercut – CYCLE96

FORM (definition)
Thread undercuts of forms A and B are defined for FORM A and B

external threads, form A for normal thread run-outs, SPL

30°

R
form B for short thread run-outs.

R
DIATH
Thread undercuts of forms C and D for used for
internal threads, form C for normal thread runouts,
form D for short thread run-outs.
If the parameter is assigned a value other than
A ... D, the cycle is aborted and alarm
61609 "Form incorrectly defined" is output.
The tool radius compensation is automatically
selected by the cycle.

_VARI (undercut position)

The position of the undercut can be either specified
directly or derived from the tool point direction with
FORM C and D
parameter _VARI.
See _VARI with CYCLE94 SPL

The cycle automatically determines the starting point

DIATH
that is defined by the tool point direction of the active
R

tool and the thread diameter. The position of this

starting point in relation to the programmed
coordinate values is determined by the tool point
30°
R

position of the active tool.

The cycle monitors the clearance angle of the active
tool if forms A and B are being machined. If the cycle
detects that the undercut form cannot be machined
with the selected tool, the message
"Changed undercut form"
is output by the control but machining is continued.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

4-278 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 4 4
03.96 Turning cycles
4.6 Thread undercut – CYCLE96

Further notes
You must activate a tool offset before the cycle is
called. Otherwise error message
61000 "No tool offset active"
is output and the cycle is aborted.

Programming example
Thread undercut_Form_A
You can machine a thread undercut of form A with X
this program.

60

40
Z

N10 D3 T1 S300 M3 G95 F0.3 Specification of technology values

N20 G0 G90 Z100 X50 Selection of starting position
N30 CYCLE96 (40, 60, "A") Cycle call
N40 G90 G0 X30 Z100 Approach next position
N50 M30 End of program

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 4-279
 4 4
Turning cycles 03.96
09.01
4.7 Thread cutting – CYCLE97

4.7 Thread cutting – CYCLE97

Programming
CYCLE97 (PIT, MPIT, SPL, FPL, DM1, DM2, APP, ROP, TDEP, FAL, IANG, NSP,
NRC, NID, VARI, NUMT, _VRT)

Parameters

PIT Real Thread pitch as value (enter without sign)

MPIT Real Thread pitch as thread size
Value range 3 (for M3) ... 60 (for M60)
SPL Real Starting point of the thread in the longitudinal axis
FPL Real End point of the thread in the longitudinal axis
DM1 Real Diameter of the thread at the starting point
DM2 Real Diameter of the thread at the end point
APP Real Arc-in section (enter without sign)
ROP Real Arc-out section (enter without sign)
TDEP Real Thread depth (enter without sign)
FAL Real Final machining allowance (enter without sign)
IANG Real Infeed angle
Value range "+" (for flank infeed on flank)
"–" (for alternating flank infeed)
NSP Real Starting point offset for the first thread (enter without sign)
NRC Int Number of rough cuts (enter without sign)
NID Int Number of noncuts (enter without sign)
VARI Int Definition of the machining type for the thread
Value range: 1 ... 4
NUMT Int Number of threads (enter without sign)
_VRT Real Variable retraction distance based on initial diameter, incremental
from SW (enter without sign)
6.2 or
higher

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

4-280 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 4 4
03.96 Turning cycles
4.7 Thread cutting – CYCLE97

Function
With this cycle you can machine cylindrical and
tapered outside and inside threads with constant
lead in longitudinal or face machining. Both single
threads and multiple threads can be cut. In multiple
thread cutting, the threads are cut one after the
other.
Infeed is automatic. You can select either constant
infeed per cut or constant cross-section of cut.
A right-hand or left-hand thread is determined by the
direction of rotation of the spindle programmed
before the cycle call.
Feedrate and spindle override both have no effect in
thread travel blocks.

A speed-controlled spindle with a position measuring

system is required to operate this cycle.

Sequence of operations
Position reached prior to cycle start:
The starting position is any position from which the
programmed thread starting point + arc-in section
can be approached without collision.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 4-281
 4 4
Turning cycles 03.96
4.7 Thread cutting – CYCLE97

The cycle implements the following motion

sequence:
• Approach to the starting point determined by the
cycle at the beginning of the arc-in section for the
first thread with G0.
• Infeed for roughing according to the infeed type
defined under VARI.
• Thread cutting is repeated according to the
number of roughing cuts programmed.
• In the next cut with G33 the final machining
allowance is removed.
• This cut is repeated according to the number of
programmed noncuts.
• The total motion sequence is repeated for each
additional thread.

Description of parameters
X
PIT and MPIT (value and thread size)
FPL PIT SPL
The thread pitch is a paraxial value and entered
ROP APP
without a sign. If metric cylindrical threads are being

TDEP
machined it is also possible to define the thread FAL

pitch in parameter MPIT as a thread size (M3 to

M60). These two parameters should be used as
alternatives. If they contain conflicting values, the DM1=DM2

cycle generates alarm

61001 "Thread pitch wrong"
and is aborted.

DM1 and DM2 (diameter) Z

This parameter is set to program the thread

diameter of the start and end points of the thread.
With an inside thread, this corresponds to the tap
hole diameter.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

4-282 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 4 4
03.96
08.97 Turning cycles
4.7 Thread cutting – CYCLE97

Connection between SPL, FPL, APP and ROP

(starting point, end point, arc-in section and arc-
out section)
The programmed starting point (SPL) and end point
(FPL) are the basis of the thread. However, the
starting point used in the cycle is the starting point
brought forward by the arc-in section APP and, in the
same way, the end point is the programmed end
point brought back by the arc-out section ROP. The
starting point defined by the cycle always lies
1mm outside the programmed thread diameter in the
facing axis. This retraction plane is automatically
generated by the control.

Connection between TDEP, FAL, NRC and NID

(thread depth, final machining allowance,
number of cuts)
The programmed final machining allowance has an
effect parallel to the axis and is subtracted from the
preset thread depth TDEP and the remainder is
divided into roughing cuts.
The cycle automatically calculates the individual
actual infeed depths depending on the parameter
VARI.
The thread depth to be machined is divided into
infeeds with the same cross-section of cut so that
the cutting pressure remains constant for all rough
cuts. Infeed is then performed with differing values
for the infeed depth.
In a second method, the total thread depth is divided
into constant infeed depths. The cross-section of cut
gets larger from cut to cut. However, if the values for
the thread depth are small, this method can create
better cutting conditions.
The final machining allowance FAL is removed in
one cut after roughing. After this, the noncuts
programmed under parameter NID are executed.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 4-283
 4 4
Turning cycles 03.96
10.00
4.7 Thread cutting – CYCLE97

IANG (infeed angle)

With parameter IANG you define the infeed angle. If
infeed is to be performed at right angles to the
cutting direction in the thread this parameter must be
assigned the value zero. I.e., this parameter can
also be omitted from the parameter list as it is then
automatically assigned the default value zero. If
infeed is to be performed along the flank, the ε
absolute value of this parameter must be no more
than half the flank angle of the tool.
The sign entered for this parameter defines how this IAN
G
infeed is performed. If a positive value is entered, ε
infeed is always performed on the same flank, if a
IANG<= ε
negative value is entered, infeed is performed 2
alternately on both flanks. The infeed type on both
flanks alternately can only be used for cylindrical
threads. However, if a negative value is assigned to
parameter IANG for a tapered thread, the cycle
automatically performs a flank infeed along one
flank.

Infeed along Infeed along

one flank alternate flanks

NSP (starting point offset)

Under this parameter you can program the angular
value that defines the point of the first cut for the first
thread turn on the circumference on the turned part.
This value is a starting point offset. The parameter
can be assigned any value between 0.0001 and
+359.9999 degrees. If no starting point offset has
been entered or the parameter has been omitted
from the parameter list, the first thread automatically
starts at the zero degrees mark.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

4-284 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 4 4
03.96 Turning cycles
4.7 Thread cutting – CYCLE97

VARI (machining type)

With parameter VARI, you define if machining is to
be internal or external and with which technology the
infeed will be machined during roughing. The
parameter VARI can be one of the values between 1
and 4 with the following meaning: Infeed with constant
infeed depth

Infeed with constant

cross-section of cut

Value Outside/inside Const. infeed/const. cross-section of cut

1 Outside Constant infeed

2 Inside Constant infeed
3 Outside Constant cross-section of cut
4 Inside Constant cross-section of cut

If another value has been programmed for

parameter VARI, the cycle is aborted after alarm 0 degree mark
61002 "Machining type incorrectly defined" is output. Start Start
1st thread 4th thread
NUMT (number of thread starts) NSP
With parameter NUMT you specify the number of
thread starts for a multiple thread. If you require a single
thread, either assign the value zero to the parameter or
omit it from the parameter list.
The thread starts are distributed uniformly around the Start Start
2nd thread 3rd thread
circumference of the turned part, the first thread is
defined in parameter NSP. NUMTH = 4
If a multiple-start thread with a non-uniform distribution
of threads around the circumference is to be machined,
the cycle must be called for every thread start and the
corresponding starting point offset must be
programmed.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 4-285
 4 4
Turning cycles 03.96
09.01
4.7 Thread cutting – CYCLE97

_VRT (variable retraction path)

From SW 6. onward, the retraction path can be
programmed on the basis of the initial thread diameter
in parameter _VRT.
When _VRT = 0 (parameter not programmed), the
retraction path is 1mm. The retraction path is always
measured in the programmed system of units inch or
metric.

Further notes
Difference between a longitudinal thread and a
X X
face thread
The cycle automatically calculates whether a
longitudinal or face thread is to be machined. This
depends on the angle of the taper on which the Angle < 45° Angle > 45°

thread is to be machined. If the angle at the taper

≤45 degrees, the longitudinal axis thread is
machined, otherwise it will be the face thread.

Z Z
Longitudinal thread Transverse thread

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

4-286 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 4 4
03.96 Turning cycles
4.7 Thread cutting – CYCLE97

Programming example
X
Thread cutting
With this program you can cut a metric outside
thread M42x2 with flank infeed. The infeed is
performed with a constant cross-section of cut.
5 roughing cuts are made to a thread depth of
1.23mm without final machining allowance. After
machining has been completed, 2 noncuts are
performed. M42x2

35 Z

DEF REAL MPIT=42, SPL=0, FPL=-35, Definition of parameters with value

DM1=42, DM2=42, APP=10, ROP=3, assignments
TDEP=1.23, FAL=0, IANG=30, NSP=0
DEF INT NRC=5, NID=2, VARI=3, NUMT=1
N10 G0 G90 Z100 X60 Selection of starting position
N20 G95 D1 T1 S1000 M4 Specification of technology values
N30 CYCLE97 ( , MPIT, SPL, FPL, DM1, -> Cycle call
-> DM2, APP, ROP, TDEP, FAL, IANG, ->
-> NSP, NRC, NID, VARI, NUMT)
N40 G90 G0 X100 Z100 Approach next position
N50 M30 End of program

-> Must be programmed in a single block

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 4-287
 4 4
Turning cycles 03.96
09.01
4.8 Thread chaining – CYCLE98

4.8 Thread chaining – CYCLE98

Programming
CYCLE98 (PO1, DM1, PO2, DM2, PO3, DM3, PO4, DM4, APP, ROP, TDEP, FAL,
IANG, NSP, NRC, NID, PP1, PP2, PP3, VARI, NUMT, _VRT)

Parameters

PO1 real Starting point of the thread in the longitudinal axis

DM1 real Diameter of the thread at the starting point
PO2 real First intermediate point in the longitudinal axis
DM2 real Diameter at the first intermediate point
PO3 real Second intermediate point
DM3 real Diameter at the second intermediate point
PO4 real End point of the thread in the longitudinal axis
DM4 real Diameter at the end point
APP real Arc-in section (enter without sign)
ROP real Arc-out section (enter without sign)
TDEP real Thread depth (enter without sign)
FAL real Final machining allowance (enter without sign)
IANG real Infeed angle
Value range "+" (for flank infeed on flank)
"–" (for alternating flank infeed)
NSP real Starting point offset for the first thread (enter without sign)
NRC int Number of rough cuts (enter without sign)
NID int Number of noncuts (enter without sign)
PP1 real Thread pitch 1 as value (enter without sign)
PP2 real Thread pitch 2 as value (enter without sign)
PP3 real Thread pitch 3 as value (enter without sign)
VARI int Definition of the machining type for the thread
Value range 1 ... 4
NUMT int Number of threads (enter without sign)
_VRT real Variable retraction distance based on initial diameter, incremental
from SW (enter without sign)
6.2 or
higher

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

4-288 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 4 4
03.96 Turning cycles
4.8 Thread chaining – CYCLE98

Function
With this cycle you can produce several
concatenated cylindrical or tapered threads with a
constant lead in longitudinal or face machining, all of
which can have different thread leads.

Sequence of operations
Position reached prior to cycle start:
The starting position is any position from which the
programmed thread starting point + arc-in section
can be approached without collision.

The cycle implements the following motion

sequence:
• Approach to the starting point determined by the
cycle at the beginning of the arc-in section for the
first thread with G0.
• Infeed to commence roughing according to the
infeed type defined under VARI.
• Thread cutting is repeated according to the
number of roughing cuts programmed.
• In the next cut with G33 the final machining
allowance is cut.
• This cut is repeated according to the number of
programmed noncuts.
• The total motion sequence is repeated for each
additional thread.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 4-289
 4 4
Turning cycles 03.96
4.8 Thread chaining – CYCLE98

Description of parameters
X
PO1 and DM1 (starting point and diameter)
With these parameters you define the original starting P04 P03 P02 P01
point of the thread chain. The starting point calculated ROP
PP3 PP2 PP1
DM3=DM4
by the cycle that is approached at the beginning with G0
DM2
is the length of the arc-in section in front of the DM1
programmed starting point (starting point A). APP

PO2, DM2 and PO3, DM3 (intermediate point and

diameter)
With these parameters you define two intermediate
points in the thread.
Z
PO4 and DM4 (endpoint and diameter)
The original end point of the thread is programmed
under parameters PO4 and DM4.

With an inside thread, DM1...DM4 corresponds to the

tap hole diameter.

Connection between APP and ROP (arc-in, arc-out

sections)
The starting point used in the cycle is the starting point
brought forward by the arc-in section APP and, in the
same way, the end point is the programmed end point
brought back by the arc-out section ROP.
The starting point defined by the cycle always lies
1mm outside the programmed thread diameter in the
facing axis. This retraction plane is automatically
generated by the control.

Connection between TDEP, FAL, NRC and NID

(thread depth, final machining allowance, number
of rough cuts and noncuts)
The programmed final machining allowance is
subtracted from the defined thread depth TDEP and the
remainder divided into rough cuts. The cycle
automatically calculates the individual actual infeed
depths depending on the parameter VARI. The thread
depth to be machined is divided into infeeds with the
same cross-section of cut so that the cutting pressure
remains constant for all rough cuts. Infeed is then
performed with differing values for the infeed depth.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

4-290 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 4 4
03.96
08.97 Turning cycles
4.8 Thread chaining – CYCLE98

In a second method, the total thread depth is divided

into constant infeed depths. The cross-section of cut
gets larger from cut to cut. However, if the values for
the thread depth are small, this method can create
better cutting conditions.
The final machining allowance FAL is removed in
one cut after roughing. After this, the noncuts
programmed under parameter NID are executed.

IANG (infeed angle)

With parameter IANG you define the infeed angle. If
infeed is to be performed at right angles to the
cutting direction in the thread this parameter must be
assigned the value zero. I.e., this parameter can
also be omitted from the parameter list as it is then
automatically assigned the default value zero. If
infeed is to be performed along the flank, the ε
absolute value of this parameter must be no more
than half the flank angle of the tool.
The sign entered for this parameter defines how this IAN
G
infeed is performed. If a positive value is entered, ε
infeed is always performed on the same flank, if a
IANG<=
ε
negative value is entered, infeed is performed 2
alternately on both flanks. The infeed type on both
flanks alternately can only be used for cylindrical
threads. However, if a negative value is assigned to
parameter IANG for a tapered thread, the cycle
automatically performs a flank infeed along one
flank.

Infeed along Infeed on

one flank alternate flanks

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 4-291
 4 4
Turning cycles 03.96
4.8 Thread chaining – CYCLE98

NSP (starting point offset)

Under this parameter you can program the angular
value that defines the point of the first cut for the first
thread turn on the circumference on the turned part.
This value is a starting point offset. The parameter
can be assigned any value between 0.0001 and
+359.9999 degrees. If no starting point offset has
been entered or the parameter has been omitted
from the parameter list, the first thread automatically
starts at the zero degrees mark.

PP1, PP2 and PP3 (thread pitch)

With these parameters you determine the thread
pitch from the three sections of the thread chain.
The pitch value must be entered as a paraxial value
without a sign.

VARI (machining type)

With parameter VARI, you define if machining is to
be internal or external and with which technology the
infeed will be machined during roughing. The
parameter VARI can be one of the values between 1
and 4 with the following meaning:
Infeed with constant
infeed depth

Infeed with constant

cross-section of cut

Value Outside/inside Const. infeed/const. cross-section of cut

1 Outside Constant infeed

2 Inside Constant infeed
3 Outside Constant cross-section of cut
4 Inside Constant cross-section of cut

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

4-292 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 4 4
03.96
09.01 Turning cycles
4.8 Thread chaining – CYCLE98

If another value is assigned to parameter VARI, the

cycle is aborted and alarm
61002 "Machining type incorrectly programmed"
is output.

NUMT (number of thread starts)

With parameter NUMT you specify the number of 0 degree mark
thread starts for a multiple thread. If you require a Start Start
single thread, either assign the value zero to the 1st thread 4th thread
parameter or omit it from the parameter list. NSP
The thread starts are distributed uniformly around
the circumference of the turned part, the first thread
is defined in parameter NSP.
If a multiple-start thread with a non-uniform
Start Start
distribution of threads around the circumference is to
2nd thread 3rd thread
be machined, the cycle must be called for every
thread start and the corresponding starting point NUMTH = 4
offset must be programmed.

_VRT (variable retraction path)

From SW 6. onward, the retraction path can be
programmed on the basis of the initial thread
diameter in parameter _VRT.
When _VRT = 0 (parameter not programmed), the
retraction path is 1mm. The retraction path is always
measured in the programmed system of units inch or
metric.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 4-293
 4 4
Turning cycles 03.96
4.8 Thread chaining – CYCLE98

Programming example
Thread chain X
0/
With this program you can produce a chain of
threads starting with a cylindrical thread. Infeed is
perpendicular to the thread. Neither a final
machining allowance nor a starting point offset have
been programmed. 5 roughing cuts and one noncut
are performed. 50
The machining type defined is longitudinal, outside, 36
with constant cross-section of cut. 30

Z
-80 -60 -30

N10 G95 T5 D1 S1000 M4 Specification of technology values

N20 G0 X40 Z10 Approach starting position
N30 CYCLE98 (0, 30, -30, 30, -60, -> Cycle call
-> 36, -80, 50, 10, 10, 0.92, , , , ->
-> 5, 1, 1.5, 2, 2, 3, 1)
N40 G0 X55 Traverse in each axis separately
N50 Z10
N60 X40
N70 M30 End of program

-> Must be programmed in a single block

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

4-294 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 4 4
03.96
04.00 Turning cycles
4.9 Thread recutting (SW 5.3 and later)

4.9 Thread recutting (SW 5.3 and later)

SW version 5.3 contains thread cutting cycles
CYCLE97 and CYCLE98 which allow threads to be
recut.

Function
The angular offset of a thread start resulting from
tool breakage or remeasurement is taken into
account and compensated for by the "Thread recut"
function.
This function can be executed in JOG mode in the
Machine operating area.

The cycles calculate an additional offset angle for

each thread, which is applied in addition to the
programmed starting point offset, from the data
stored in the thread start during synchronization.

Preconditions
The channel in which the thread recutting program must
be executed is already selected; the relevant axes must
already be referenced. The channel is in the Reset
state, the spindle is stationary.

Sequence of operations
• Select JOG in "Machine" operating area.
• Press softkey "Finish thread"
è Open screen form for this function.

• Thread into thread start using the threading tool.

• Select softkey "Sync Point" when the cutting tool is
positioned exactly in the thread start.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 4-295
 4 4
Turning cycles 03.96
04.00
4.9 Thread recutting (SW 5.3 and later)

• Press softkey "Cancel" to return to the next-higher

softkey menu without activating the function (no
data are then stored in the NC).
• Select softkey "OK" to transfer all values to the
GUD in the NC.
• Then retract the tool and move it to its starting
position.
• Select "Automatic" and position the program pointer
using block search in front of the thread cycle call.
• Start the program with NC start.

Special functions
You can delete values stored earlier by selecting
another softkey labeled "Delete".

If several spindles are operating in the channel, another

box is displayed in the screenform in which you can
select a spindle to machine the thread.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

4-296 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 4 4
03.96
04.00 Turning cycles
4.10 Extended stock removal cycle – CYCLE950 (SW 5.3 and later)

4.10 Extended stock removal cycle – CYCLE950 (SW 5.3 and later)
The extended stock removal cycle is an option.
It requires SW 5.3 in the NCK and MMC.

Programming
CYCLE950 (_NP1, _NP2, _NP3, _NP4, _VARI, _MID, _FALZ, _FALX, _FF1, _FF2,
_FF3, _FF4, _VRT, _ANGB, _SDIS, _NP5, _NP6, _NP7, _NP8, _APZ, _APZA, _APX,
_APXA, _TOL1)

Parameters

_NP1 String Name of the contour subroutine for the finished part contour
_NP2 String Label / block number start of finished part contour, optional
(this can be used to define contour sections)
_NP3 String Label / block number end of finished part contour, optional
(this can be used to define contour sections)
_NP4 String Name of the stock removal program to be generated
_VARI Int Type of machining : (enter without sign)
ONES DIGIT:
Values: 1...Longitudinal
2...Face
3...Parallel to contour
TENS DIGIT:
Values: 1...Programmed infeed direction X-
2...Programmed infeed direction X+
3...Programmed infeed direction Z-
4...Programmed infeed direction Z+
HUNDREDS DIGIT:
Values: 1...Roughing
2...Finishing
3...Complete
THOUSANDS DIGIT:
Values: 1...With rounding
2...Without rounding (liftoff)
TEN THOUSANDS DIGIT:
Values: 1...Machine relief cuts
2...Do not machine relief cuts
HUNDRED THOUSANDS DIGIT:
Values: 1...Programmed machining direction X-
2...Programmed machining direction X+
3...Programmed machining direction Z-
4...Programmed machining direction Z+
_MID Real Infeed depth (enter without sign)
_FALZ Real Final machining allowance in the longitudinal axis (enter without sign)
_FALX Real Final machining allowance in the facing axis (enter without sign)
_FF1 Real Feedrate for longitudinal roughing

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 4-297
 4 4
Turning cycles 03.96
04.00
4.10 Extended stock removal cycle – CYCLE950 (SW 5.3 and later)

_FF2 Real Feedrate for face roughing

_FF3 Real Feedrate for finishing
_FF4 Real Feedrate at contour transition elements (radius, chamfer)
_VRT Real Liftoff distance for roughing, incremental (enter without sign)
_ANGB Real Liftoff angle for roughing
_SDIS Real Safety distance for avoiding obstacles, incremental
_NP5 String Name of contour program for blank contour
_NP6 String Label / block number start of blank contour, optional
(this can be used to define contour sections)
_NP7 String Label / block number end of blank contour, optional
(this can be used to define contour sections)
_NP8 String Name of contour program for updated blank contour
_APZ Real Axial value for defining blank for longitudinal axis
_APZA Int Absolute or incremental evaluation of parameter _APZ
90=absolute, 91=incremental
_APX Real Axial value for defining blank for facing axis
_APXA Int Absolute or incremental evaluation of parameter _APX
90=absolute, 91=incremental
_TOL1 Real Blank tolerance

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

4-298 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 4 4
03.96
04.00 Turning cycles
4.10 Extended stock removal cycle – CYCLE950 (SW 5.3 and later)

Function
With the extended stock removal cycle CYCLE950 you
can machine a contour programmed with paraxial or
parallel-contour stock removal. Any blank can be
defined and is considered during stock removal. The
finished part contour must be continuous and may
contain any number of relief cut elements. You can
specify a blank as a contour or by means of axial
values.

Contours can be machined in the longitudinal and

facing directions with this cycle. You can freely select a
technology (roughing, finishing, complete machining,
machining and infeed directions). It is possible to
update a blank.

For roughing, the programmed infeed depth is observed

precisely; the last two roughing steps are divided
equally. Roughing is performed to the programmed final
machining allowance.

Finishing is performed in the same direction as

roughing.

The tool radius compensation is automatically selected

and deselected by the cycle.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 4-299
 4 4
Turning cycles 03.96
04.00
4.10 Extended stock removal cycle – CYCLE950 (SW 5.3 and later)

New functions compared to CYCLE95:

without blank definition
• You can define a blank either by programming a X
finished part contour
contour, specifying an allowance on the finished-
part contour or entering a blank cylinder (or
hollow cylinder in the case of internal machining)
from which stock must be removed.
• It is possible to detect residual material that
cannot be machined with the current tool. The
Z
cycle can generate an updated blank, which is
blank definition as contour
stored as a program in the part program memory.
X
• You can specify the contours for stock removal: finished part contour
- in a separate program, blank definition as contour
- in the calling main program or
- as section of any given program.
• During roughing, it is possible to choose between
paraxial and contour-parallel machining.
• During roughing, you have the option of Z

machining along the contour so that no corners blank definition via offset value
X
are left over, or removing stock immediately at
finished part contour
the roughing intersection.
• The angle for stock removal at the contour during
roughing is programmable.
• Optionally, relief cuts can be machined or
skipped during roughing.
Z

Sequence of operations
Position reached prior to cycle start:
The initial position can be any position from which the
blank contour can be approached collision-free. The
cycle calculates collision-free approach movements to
the starting point for machining but does not consider
the tool holder data.

Movement for paraxial roughing:

• The starting point for roughing is calculated
internally in the cycle and approached with G0.
• The infeed to the next depth, calculated in
accordance with the specifications in parameter
_MID, is carried out with G1, and paraxial

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

4-300 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 4 4
03.96
04.00 Turning cycles
4.10 Extended stock removal cycle – CYCLE950 (SW 5.3 and later)

roughing then performed with G1. The feedrate

during roughing is calculated internally in the
cycle according to the path as the feedrate that
results from the values specified for longitudinal
and face feed (_FF1 and _FF2).
• For "Rounding along contour", the previous
intersection is approached parallel to the contour.
• When the previous intersection is reached or for
machining "Without rounding along contour", the
tool is lifted off at the angle programmed in
_ANGB and then retracted to the starting point for
the next infeed with G0. If the angle is 45
degrees, the programmed liftoff path _VRT is
also followed precisely; it is not exceeded for
other angles.
• This procedure is repeated until the full depth of the
machining section has been reached.

Sequence of motions for roughing in parallel with

contour:
• The starting point for roughing and the individual
infeed depths are calculated as for paraxial
roughing and approached with G0 or G1.
• Roughing is carried out in contour-parallel paths.
• Liftoff and retraction is carried out in the same
way as for paraxial roughing.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 4-301
 4 4
Turning cycles 03.96
10.00
4.10 Extended stock removal cycle – CYCLE950 (SW 5.3 and later)

Description of parameters
_NP1, _NP2, _NP3 (contour programming finished part)
The finished part contour can be programmed optionally in a
separate program or in the current main program that calls
the routine. The data are transferred to the cycle via
parameters _NP1 – Name of the program or _NP2, _NP3 –
ID of program section from ... to using block numbers or
labels.

So there are three options for contour programming:

• The contour is defined in a separate program in which
case only _NP1 need be programmed;
(see programming example 1)
• The contour is defined in the calling program in which
case only _NP2 and _NP3 have to be programmed;
(see programming example 2)
• The stock removal contour is part of a program but not
part of the program that calls the cycle in which case all
three parameters must be programmed.

When the contour is programmed as a program section, the

last contour element (block with label or block number end of
blank contour) must not contain a radius or chamfer.
Write the program name in _NP1 with path name and
program type.
Example:
_NP1="/_N_SPF_DIR/_N_PART1_SPF"

_NP4 (name of the stock removal program)

The stock removal cycle generates a program for the travel
blocks that are required for stock removal between the blank
and the finished part. This program is stored in the same
directory as the calling program in the part program memory
if no other path is specified when it is generated. If a path is
entered, it is stored accordingly in the file system. The
program is a main program (type MPF) if no other type is
specified.
Parameter _NP4 defines the name of this program.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

4-302 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 4 4
03.96
04.00 Turning cycles
4.10 Extended stock removal cycle – CYCLE950 (SW 5.3 and later)

_VARI (machining type) axis-parallel stock removal

X
Parameter _VARI defines the type of machining. finished part with rounding at the contour
contour
Possible values are: _MID
6
_FALX 5 1
Units digit: 4
2
3
1=Longitudinal
2=Face _SDIS
3=Parallel to the contour
Tens digit:
_FALZ
1=Programmed infeed direction X-
2=Programmed infeed direction X+
3=Programmed infeed direction Z- Z
4=Programmed infeed direction Z+ 1 Infeed 4 Stock removal of residual corners
2 Approach (rounding)
Hundreds digit: 3 Roughing 5 Retraction
1=Roughing 6 Returning

2=Finishing without rounding, residual corner remains

X
3=Complete
finished part contour
Thousands digit:
1=With rounding 4 5
1
2=Without rounding (liftoff) 3
2
The selection with or without rounding along the
contour determines whether or stock removal
starts at the roughing intersection immediately or
whether machining is performed along the
contour up to the previous intersection
so that there are no residual corners.
Z
Ten thousands digit : 1 Infeed 4 Retraction
1=Machine relief cuts 2 Approach 5 Returning
3 Roughing
2=Do not machine relief cuts
Hundred thousands digit: Contour-parallel stock removal
X
1=Programmed machining direction X- finished part contour
2=Programmed machining direction X+ 5
4 4 1
3=Programmed machining direction Z- 21
3
4=Programmed machining direction Z+ 2

Example:
_VARI=312311 means machining:
longitudinal,
infeed direction X- (i.e. external),
complete;
the workpiece is not rounded along the contour,
Z
relief cuts are machined,
1 Infeed 4 Retraction
machining direction Z-.
2 Approach 5 Returning
3 Roughing

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 4-303
 4 4
Turning cycles 03.96
10.00
4.10 Extended stock removal cycle – CYCLE950 (SW 5.3 and later)

_MID (infeed depth for roughing)

The infeed depth for roughing is programmed with the parameter
_MID. Roughing steps are generated with this infeed until the
remaining depth is less than twice the infeed depth. Then two steps
are performed each at half of the remaining depth.
_MID is interpreted as a radius or diameter depending on the value
of cycle setting data _ZSD[0] if the facing axis is involved in the
infeed for roughing.
_ZSD[0]=0: _MID is interpreted according to the G group for
radius/diameter programming, as a radius with DIAMOF, otherwise
as a diameter.
_ZSD[0]=1: _MID is a radius value
_ZSD[0]=2: _MID is a diameter value
When rough cutting parallel to contour, the infeed depth does not act
in relation to the specified infeed axis but vertically to the contour.
This always results in more cuts than in paraxial rough-cutting with
the same value for infeed depth.
_FALZ, _FALX (machining allowance)
The default for a final machining allowance for roughing
is provided by the parameters FALZ (for Z axis) and FALX (for X
axis). Roughing always takes place down to theses final machining
allowances. If no machining allowances are programmed, stock
removal is performed up to the end contour during roughing.
If final machining allowances are programmed, these are applied
correspondingly.
_FF1, _FF2, _FF3 and FF4 (feedrate) G1/G2/G3

Separate feedrates can be specified for roughing and G0

roughing
finishing, as shown in the figure opposite.
X
Separate feedrates apply for longitudinal (_FF1) and _FF2 _FF1
face (_FF2) during roughing. If inclined or circular path
sections are traversed when machining the contour, the
appropriate feedrate is calculated automatically inside resulting feed
the cycle. from_FF1 and
_FF2
The feedrates programmed at the contour are active
during finishing. If none are programmed there, the
finishing feedrate in _FF3 and the feedrates at radii and Z

chamfers in _FF4 apply to these contour transition _FF3 finishing

X
_FF4 (chamfer)
elements.
(see sample program 1 for programming of the parts in
the figure below)
_FF3

_FF3
_FF4 (radius)

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

4-304 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 4 4
03.96
04.00 Turning cycles
4.10 Extended stock removal cycle – CYCLE950 (SW 5.3 and later)

_VRT (liftoff) and _ANGB (lift angle)

The parameter _VRT can be used to program the
amount of liftoff during roughing in both axes.
If _VRT=0 (parameter not programmed),
liftoff is 1mm.
It is also possible to program the angle at which the axis
is retracted from the contour in parameter _ANGB. If
nothing is programmed, the angle is 45°.

_SDIS (safety distance)

Parameter _SDIS determines the amount of clearance
for obstructions. This clearance is active for retraction
from a relief cut and approach to the next relief cut, for
example.
If no value is programmed, the clearance is 1mm.

_NP5, _NP6, _NP7 (contour programming blank)

If a blank is programmed as a contour, it can be
programmed as a program name using parameter
_NP5 or as a program section with parameters
_NP6 and _NP7.
Otherwise, programming is carried out as for
finished parts (see _NP1, _NP2, _NP3).

_NP8 (name of contour program for updated

blank contour)
Cycle CYCLE950 can detect residual material that
cannot be removed with the active tool.
To continue this machining with a different tool, it is
possible to generate an updated blank contour
automatically. This is stored as a program in the part
program memory. You can specify the program name in
parameter _NP8 with or without path details (see
sample program 3).
An updated blank contour is always generated when a
travel program is generated.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 4-305
 4 4
Turning cycles 03.96
04.00
4.10 Extended stock removal cycle – CYCLE950 (SW 5.3 and later)

_APZ, _APZA, _APX, _APXA (blank definition)

X Blank definition via offset value
You can also define a blank by entering the dimensions
of a blank cylinder (or hollow cylinder) or as an
Finished part contour
allowance on the finished-part contour in parameters
_APZ and _APX.
_APX
You can enter the cylinder dimensions as either _APZ
absolute or incremental values, although an allowance
on the finished-part contour is always interpreted
incrementally.
Absolute or incremental values are selected via
parameters _APZA and _APXA
(_APZA, _APXA: 90 - absolute 91 - incremental).

X Cylinder with absolute dimensions

_APZ

_APX
NP1

X Cylinder with incremental dimensions

_APX

NP1 _APZ

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

4-306 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 4 4
03.96
09.01 Turning cycles
4.10 Extended stock removal cycle – CYCLE950 (SW 5.3 and later)

_TOL1 (blank tolerance)

Since a blank does not always correspond exactly to the
blank definition when it is cast or forged for example, it
makes sense not to travel to the blank contour with G0
for roughing and for the infeed but to activate G1 shortly
beforehand to compensate for any tolerances.
Parameter _TOL1 defines the distance from the blank
at which G1 becomes active.
Traversing is started with G1 at this incremental amount
before the blank. If the parameter is not programmed, it
has the value 1mm.
Further notes X Blank definition
with closed contour
Contour definition
Unlike CYCLE95, one block that contains a link to Finished part contour
the current plane is sufficient for contour Blank contour
programming. Starting point
=blank end point

For further details of contour definition, see

CYCLE95.

Blank contour definition

A blank contour must either be a closed contour Z

(starting point=end point) which encompasses the X Blank contour as contour section between
finished-part contour either partially or fully, or a starting and end point of fin. part contour

contour section between the starting and end points Blank and fin.
Finished part contour
part end point
of the finished-part contour. The programmed Blank contour

direction is irrelevant.

Blank and fin. part starting point Z

Blank contours always must be described in a way X Blank contour and finished
that they are not partly identical with the finished-part part contour are identical

contours, i.e. the machined materials are not

combined.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 4-307
 4 4
Turning cycles 03.96
10.00
4.10 Extended stock removal cycle – CYCLE950 (SW 5.3 and later)

Explanation of the cycle structure

CYCLE950 is used to solve very complex problems
during stock removal, which require high processing
power in the control. For best timing, the calculation
is carried out in the MMC.
The calculation is started in the cycle and a program
with traversing blocks for stock removal generated in its
result and stored in the file system of the control, where
it is called and executed immediately.
This structure means that it is only necessary to
perform the calculation the first time a program is
executed with CYCLE950 call. When called a second
time, the traversing program is available and can be
called by the cycle.

Recalculation is performed when:

• A finished contour has been modified;
• A transfer parameter of the cycle has changed;
• A tool with different tool offset data has been
activated before the cycle call.

Program storage in the file system

If the contours for CYCLE950 are programmed outside
the program that makes the call, the following applies
for the search in the file system of the control:
• If the calling program is stored in a workpiece
directory, then the programs which define the
finished-part or blank contour must also be stored
in the same workpiece directory, or at least
programmed with path information.
• If the invoked program is located in the "Part
Program" directory (MPF.DIR), a search is also
made there for the programs is no path is specified.
The cycle creates a program that contains the
traversing blocks for stock removal and, optionally,
an updated blank contour.
These are either stored in the same directory as the
cycle-calling program or in accordance with the
specified path.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

4-308 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 4 4
03.96
10.00 Turning cycles
4.10 Extended stock removal cycle – CYCLE950 (SW 5.3 and later)

Note on simulation
In the simulation of the extended stock removal cycle
CYCLE950, the generated programs are saved to the
NCU file system. Therefore, only the "NC Active Data"
setting is practical since tool offset data are included in
program calculation.

Blank updating
The extended stock removal cycle CYCLE950 X
detects residual material during roughing and is able
to generate an updated blank contour outside the Machining direction
machining process, which can be used in a further
machining step. Finished-part contour
Blank contour
α

Residual contour Z
Finishing allowance for relief cutting
α = Relief cut angle of turning tool

To do this, the cycle internally considers the angle at the

Tool point direction 3
tool point.
The relief cut angle of the tool must be entered in the
tool offset data (parameter 24).
The cycle defines the main cutting edge angle Main
automatically according to the tool point position. cutting
Tool clearance angle
edge angle 90° α
For tool point positions 1 to 4, the blank update is
calculated with a main cutting edge angle of 90°. For Tool point direction 8
tool point positions 5 to 9, the main cutting angle is
assumed to be identical to the relief cut angle.
If CYCLE950 is called more than once, each time with
blank update, in the same program, different names for Main
the generated blank contours must be assigned; it is not cutting
Tool clearance angle
edge angle α α
permissible to use the program name (parameter
_NP8) more than once.

Extended stock removal cannot be performed in m:n

configurations.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 4-309
 4 4
Turning cycles 03.96
04.00
4.10 Extended stock removal cycle – CYCLE950 (SW 5.3 and later)

Programming example 1 X

From a preshaped blank, the contour saved in program

PART1.MPF is to be machined. Finished-part contour
The type of machining for the stock removal process
is Blank definition as contour

• only roughing,
• longitudinal,
• outside,
• with rounding (so that no corners are left over),
• relief cuts are to be machined.
The blank contour is specified in program
BLANK1.MPF.
A turning steel with tool point position 3 and a radius of Z
0.8mm is used.
Machining program:
%_N_EXAMPLE_1_MPF
;$PATH=/_N_WKS_DIR/_N_STOCK_REMOVAL_NEW_W
PD
; Example 1: Stock removal with blank
; Sca, 01.04.99
;
; Tool offset data
N10 $TC_DP1[3,1]=500 $TC_DP2[3,1]=3
$TC_DP6[3,1]=0.8 $TC_DP24[3,1]=60
N15 G18 G0 G90 DIAMON
N20 T3 D1
N25 X300
N30 Z150
N35 G96 S500 M3 F2
N45 CYCLE950("Part1",,,"Machine_Part1",
311111,1.25,1,1,0.8,0.7,0.6,0.3,0.5,45,2,
"Blank1",,,,,,,,1)
N45 G0 X300
N50 Z150
N60 M2

Finished part contour:

%_N_PART1_MPF
;$PATH=/_N_WKS_DIR/_N_STOCK_REMOVAL_NEW_W
PD
; Finished part contour Example 1
;

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

4-310 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 4 4
03.96 Turning cycles
4.10 Extended stock removal cycle – CYCLE950 (SW 5.3 and later)

N100 G18 DIAMON F1000

N110 G1 X0 Z90
N120 X20 RND=4
N130 X30 Z80
N140 Z72
N150 X34
N160 Z58
N170 X28 Z55 F300
N180 Z50 F1000
N190 X40
N200 X60 Z46
N210 Z30
N220 X76 CHF=3
N230 Z0
N240 M17

Blank contour:
%_N_BLANK1_MPF
;$PATH=/_N_WKS_DIR/_N_STOCK_REMOVAL_NEW_W
PD
; Blank contour Example 1
;
N100 G18 DIAMON F1000
N110 G0 X0 Z93
N120 G1 X37
N130 Z55
N140 X66
N150 Z35
N160 X80
N170 Z0
N180 X0
N190 Z93 End point=Starting point
Blank contour must be closed
N200 M17
After machining, a new program called
MACHINING_PART1.MPF is present in the workpiece
STOCK_REMOVAL_NEW.WPD.
BEARBEITE_TEIL1.MPF. This program is created
during the first program call and contains the traversing
motions for machining the contour in accordance with
the blank.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 4-311
 4 4
Turning cycles 03.96
04.00
4.10 Extended stock removal cycle – CYCLE950 (SW 5.3 and later)

Programming example 2 X

A simple inside contour is to be machined on the same

part as in sample program 1.
A center bore is made first using a diameter-10 drill.
NP5
Then, the inside contour is roughed parallel to the
contour, since the hole roughly corresponds to the end
contour. _NP6, _NP7
This is done by defining a blank contour again for inside _NP2, _NP3
machining.
The stock removal contour is located in the same
program as the cycle call in the blocks N400 to N420,
the blank contour in blocks N430 to N490.
Z

Machining program:
%_N_EXAMPLE_2_MPF
;$PATH=/_N_WKS_DIR/_N_STOCK_REMOVAL_NEW_W
PD
; Example 1: inside stock removal,
parallel to contour
; Sca, 01.04.99
;
; Tool offset data for turning tool,
inside
N100 $TC_DP1[2,1]=500 $TC_DP2[2,1]=6
$TC_DP6[2,1]=0.5 $TC_DP24[2,1]=60
N105 $TC_DP1[1,1]=200 $TC_DP3[1,1]=100
$TC_DP6[1,1]=5
N110 G18 G0 G90 DIAMON
N120 X300
N130 Z150
N140 T1 D1 Change drill with diameter 10
N150 X0 Center drilling in three steps
N160 Z100
N170 F500 S400 M3
N175 G1 Z75
N180 Z76
N190 Z60
N200 Z61
N210 Z45
N220 G0 Z100
N230 X300 Approach tool change point
N240 Z150
N250 T2 D1 Insert turning tool for inside machining
N260 G96 F0.5 S500 M3

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

4-312 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 4 4
03.96
04.00 Turning cycles
4.10 Extended stock removal cycle – CYCLE950 (SW 5.3 and later)

N275 CYCLE950("","N400","N420",
"Machine_Part1_Inside",311123,1.25,0,0,
0.8,0.5,0.4,0.3,0.5,45,1,"","N430","N490"
,,,,,,,,1)
N280 G0 X300
N290 Z150
N300 GOTOF _END Skip contour definition
N400 G0 X14 Z90 N400 to N420 finished part contour
N410 G1 Z52
N420 X0 Z45
N430 G0 X10 Z9 N430 to N490 blank contour
N440 X16
N450 Z40
N460 X0
N470 Z47
N480 X10 Z59
N490 Z90
N500 _END:M2

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 4-313
 4 4
Turning cycles 03.96
04.00
4.10 Extended stock removal cycle – CYCLE950 (SW 5.3 and later)

Programming example 3
The same part as in sample program 1 should now be
machined in two steps.

In the first machining step (N45), roughing is carried out

using a tool with tool point position 9 and a large radius
with deep infeed depth and no blank specified. The
result to be generated is an updated blank with the
name blank3.MPF.
The type of machining for this step is:
only roughing,
longitudinal,
outside,
with rounding,
relief cuts are not be machined.

In the second machining step (N70), the residual

material on this blank is machined with a different tool
and then finished.
The type of machining for this step is:
complete machining (roughing and finishing)
longitudinal,
outside,
with rounding (so that there are no
residual corners),
relief cuts are to be machined.

Machining program:
%_N_EXAMPLE_3_MPF
;$PATH=/_N_WKS_DIR/_N_STOCK_REMOVAL_NEW_W
PD
; Example 3: stock removal in two steps
with blank update
; Sca, 09.04.99
;
; Tool offset data
; T3: Roughing steel for rough machining,
tool point position 9, radius 5
N05 $TC_DP1[3,1]=500 $TC_DP2[3,1]=9
$TC_DP6[3,1]=5 $TC_DP24[3,1]=80
; T4: Turning steel for residual material
and finishing
; Tool point position 3, radius 0.4

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

4-314 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 4 4
03.96
04.00 Turning cycles
4.10 Extended stock removal cycle – CYCLE950 (SW 5.3 and later)

N10 $TC_DP1[4,1]=500 $TC_DP2[4,1]=3

$TC_DP6[4,1]=0.4 $TC_DP24[4,1]=80
N15 G18 G0 G90 DIAMON
N20 T3 D1 Tool for roughing
N25 X300
N30 Z150
N35 G96 S500 M3 F2
N45 CYCLE950("Part1",,,"Machine_Part3",
321111,8,1,1,0.8,0.7,0.6,0.5,1,45,6,
"DEFAULT",,,"Blank3",0,91,0,91,1)
N50 G0 X300
N55 Z150
N60 T4 D1 Tool for roughing residual material and
finishing
N65 G96 S500 M3 F2
N75
CYCLE950("Part1",,,"Finish_Part3",311311,
0.5,0.25,0.25,0.8,0.7,0.6,0.5,1,45,6,"Bla
nk3",,,,,,,,1)
N160 M2

Finished part contour:

as for sample program 1 X
Finished-part contour
Updated blank contour after
first machining step

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 4-315
 4 4
Turning cycles 03.96
04.00
4.10 Extended stock removal cycle – CYCLE950 (SW 5.3 and later)

Explanation
Alarm source CYCLE950

Alarm number Alarm text Explanation, remedy

61701 "Error in contour description of finished Either none of parameters _NP1, _NP2 or
part" _NP3 is assigned or error in programming
of finished-part contour
61702 "Error in contour description of blank" Either none of parameters _NP5, _NP6
or _NP7 is assigned or error in
programming of blank contour
61703 "Internal cycle error while deleting file"
61704 "Internal cycle error while writing file"
61705 "Internal cycle error while reading file"
61706 "Internal cycle error during checksum
formation"
61707 "Internal cycle error during ACTIVATE
at MMC"
61708 "Internal cycle error during
READYPROG at MMC"
61709 "Timeout for contour calculation"
61720 "Illegal input"
61721 "Error: unable to determine contour
direction"
61722 "System error"
61723 "Unable to perform machining" Use a tool with a larger clearance angle
61724 "No material available"
61725 "Out of memory, error in contour
generation"
61726 "Internal error: Out of memory
_FILECTRL_INTERNAL_ERROR"
61727 "Internal error: Out of memory
_FILECTRL_EXTERNAL_ERROR"
61728 "Internal error: Out of memory
_ALLOC_P_INTERNAL_ERROR"

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

4-316 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 4 4
03.96
04.00 Turning cycles
4.10 Extended stock removal cycle – CYCLE950 (SW 5.3 and later)

Alarm number Alarm text Source Explanation, remedy

61729 "Internal error: Out of memory

_ALLOC_P_EXTERNAL_ERROR"
61730 "Internal error: Invalid Memory"
61731 "Internal error: Floating-point exception"
61732 "Internal error: Invalid instruction"
61733 "Internal error: Floating_Point_Error"
61734 "Tool point position not compatible with
cutting direction"
61735 "Finished part lies outside blank Check definition of blank contour
contour"
61736 "Tool insert length <
machining depth"
61737 "Machining_Depth_Of_Cut >
Max._Tool_Cutting_Depth"
61738 "Machining_Cutting _Depth <
Min._Tool_Cutting_Depth"
61739 "Incorrect position of tool for this type of
machining"
61740 "Blank must be a closed contour" Blank contour must be closed, starting
point = end point
61741 "Out of memory"
61742 "Collision during approach, offset not
possible"

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 4-317
 4 4
Turning cycles 03.96
4.10 Extended stock removal cycle – CYCLE950 (SW 5.3 and later)

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

4-318 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 5 5
03.96 Error Messages and Error Handling

Error Messages and Error Handling

5.1 General information .......................................................................................................5-320

5.2 Troubleshooting in the cycles ........................................................................................5-320

5.3 Overview of cycle alarms...............................................................................................5-321

5.4 Messages in the cycles..................................................................................................5-327

© Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 5-319
 5 5
Error Messages and Error Handling 03.96
5.1 General information

5.1 General information

If error conditions are detected in the cycles, an
alarm is output and execution of the cycle is aborted.
The cycles also output messages in the dialog line of
the control. These messages do not interrupt
processing.

For more information on errors and required

responses as well as messages output in the
control's dialog line, please refer to the section for
the relevant cycle.

5.2 Troubleshooting in the cycles

If error conditions are detected in the cycles, an
alarm is output and processing is aborted.
Alarms with numbers between 61000 and 62999 are
output in the cycles. This range is again subdivided
according to alarm responses and acknowledgment
criteria.
The text displayed with the number provides an
explanation of the cause of the error.

Alarm number Cancel criterion Alarm reaction

61000 ... 61999 NC_RESET Block preprocessing in the NC is aborted

62000 ... 62999 Cancel key Block preprocessing is interrupted, the
cycle can be continued with NC Start
once the alarm has been cancelled

© Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

5-320 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 5 5
03.96
04.00 Error Messages and Error Handling
5.3 Overview of cycle alarms

5.3 Overview of cycle alarms

The alarm numbers are classified as follows:

6 _ X _ _

• X=0 General cycle alarms

• X=1 Drilling, drilling pattern and milling cycle
alarms
• X=6 Turning cycle alarms

The table below lists the errors that occur in the

cycles, when they occur and how to eliminate them.

Alarm number Alarm text Source Explanation, remedy

61000 "No tool offset LONGHOLE D offset must be programmed before the
active" SLOT1 cycle is called
SLOT2
POCKET1 to
POCKET4
CYCLE71
CYCLE72
CYCLE90
CYCLE93
to
CYCLE96
61001 "Thread lead CYCLE84 Check parameters for thread size and
incorrect" CYCLE840 check pitch information (contradict each
CYCLE96 other)
CYCLE97
61002 "Machining type SLOT1 The value assigned to parameter VARI
incorrectly defined" SLOT2 for the machining type is incorrect and
POCKET1 must be altered
to POCKET4
CYCLE71
CYCLE72
CYCLE76
CYCLE77
CYCLE93
CYCLE95
CYCLE97
CYCLE98

© Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 5-321
 5 5
Error Messages and Error Handling 03.96
09.01
5.3 Overview of cycle alarms

Alarm number Alarm text Source Explanation, remedy

61003 "No feedrate CYCLE71 The parameter for feedrate has been
programmed in the CYCLE72 incorrectly set and must be altered.
cycle"
61005 "3rd geometry axis not CYCLE86 When used on turning machines
available" without Y axis in G18 plane.
61009 "Active tool number CYCLE71 No tool (T) is programmed prior to the
= 0" CYCLE72 cycle call.
61010 "Final machining CYCLE72 The final machining allowance on the
allowance too great" base is greater than the total depth and
must be reduced.
61011 "Scaling not CYCLE71 A scale factor is currently active that is
allowed" CYCLE72 not permissible for this cycle.
61012 "Scaling in the plane CYCLE76
different" CYCLE77
61101 "Reference plane CYCLE71 Either different values must be entered
incorrectly defined" CYCLE72 for the reference plane and the
CYCLE81 retraction plane if they are relative
to values or an absolute value must be
CYCLE90 entered for the depth
CYCLE840
SLOT1
SLOT2
POCKET1 to
POCKET4
LONGHOLE
61102 "No spindle direction CYCLE86 Parameter SDIR (or SDR in
programmed" CYCLE87 CYCLE840) must be programmed
CYCLE88
CYCLE840
POCKET3
POCKET4
61103 "Number of holes HOLES1 No value has been programmed for the
equals zero" HOLES2 number of holes
61104 "Contour violation of the SLOT1 Incorrect parameterization of the milling
slots/elongated holes" SLOT2 pattern in the parameters that define the
LONGHOLE position of the slots/elongated holes in the
cycle and their shape

© Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

5-322 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 5 5
03.96
04.00 Error Messages and Error Handling
5.3 Overview of cycle alarms

Alarm number Alarm text Source Explanation, remedy

61105 "Cutter radius too large"SLOT1 The diameter of the milling cutter being
SLOT2 used is too large for the figure that is to
POCKET1 be machined; either a tool with a
to smaller radius must be used or the
POCKET4 contour must be changed
LONGHOLE
CYCLE90
61106 "Number of or distance HOLES2 Incorrect parameterization of NUM or
between circular LONGHOLE INDA, the circular elements cannot be
elements" SLOT1 arranged in a full circle
SLOT2
61107 "First drilling depth CYCLE83 First drilling depth is incompatible with
incorrectly defined" final drilling depth
61108 "No admissible POCKET3 Parameters _RAD1 and _DP which
values for POCKET4 define the path for depth infeed have
parameters _RAD1 been incorrectly set.
and _DP1"
61109 "Parameter _CDIR POCKET3 The value of the parameter for milling
incorrectly defined" POCKET4 direction _CDIR has been incorrectly
set and must be altered.
61110 "Final machining POCKET3 The final machining allowance on the
allowance on the base POCKET4 base has been set to a higher value
> depth infeed" than the maximum depth infeed; either
reduce final machining allowance or
increase depth infeed.
61111 "Infeed width > tool CYCLE71 The programmed infeed width is
diameter" POCKET3 greater than the diameter of the active
POCKET4 tool and must be reduced.
61112 "Negative tool CYCLE72 The radius of the active tool is negative,
radius" CYCLE76 the setting must be changed to a
CYCLE77 positive value.
CYCLE90
61113 "Parameter _CRAD POCKET3 The parameter for corner radius
for corner radius too _CRAD has been set too high and must
high" be reduced.
61114 "Machining direction CYCLE72 The machining direction of the cutter
G41/G42 incorrectly radius compensation G41/G42 has
defined" been incorrectly set.

© Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 5-323
 5 5
Error Messages and Error Handling 03.96
09.01
5.3 Overview of cycle alarms

Alarm number Alarm text Source Explanation, remedy

61115 "Contour approach or CYCLE72 The contour approach or return mode

return mode (straight has been incorrectly programmed;
line/circle/plane/space) check parameter _AS1 or AS2.
incorrectly defined"
61116 "Approach or return CYCLE72 The approach or return travel is set to
travel=0" zero and must be increased; check
parameter _LP1 or _LP2.
61117 "Active tool radius <= 0" CYCLE71 The radius of the active tool is negative
POCKET3 or zero and must be altered.
POCKET4
61118 "Length or width = 0" CYCLE71 The length or width of the milling
surface is not permissible; check
parameters _LENG and _WID.
61124 "Infeed width has not CYCLE71 A value for the infeed width _MIDA
been programmed" must always be programmed for active
simulation without a tool.
61125 "Technology selection in CYCLE84 Check parameter _TECHNO.
parameter _TECHNO CYCLE840
incorrectly defined"
61126 "Thread length too short" CYCLE840 Program lower spindle speed/raise
reference plane
61127 "Gear ratio of tapping CYCLE84 Check machine data 31050 and 31060 in
axis incorrectly defined CYCLE840 the appropriate gear stage of the tapping
(machine data)" axis
61200 "Too many elements in CYCLE76
machining block" CYCLE77
61211 "No absolute reference" CYCLE76
CYCLE77
61213 "Circle radius too small" CYCLE77
61215 "Blank dimension CYCLE76
incorrectly programmed" CYCLE77
61601 "Finished part CYCLE94 A finished part diameter has been
diameter too small" CYCLE96 programmed
61602 "Tool width incorrectly CYCLE93 Parting tool is larger than programmed
defined" groove width
61603 "Groove shape CYCLE93 • Radii/chamfers on the groove base
incorrectly defined" are not suitable for the groove width
• Face groove of a contour element
parallel to the longitudinal axis is not
possible

© Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

5-324 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 5 5
03.96
09.01 Error Messages and Error Handling
5.3 Overview of cycle alarms

Alarm number Alarm text Source Explanation, remedy

61604 "Active tool violates CYCLE95 Contour violation in relief cut elements as a
programmed contour" result of the clearance angle of the tool
being used, i.e. use a different tool or
check the contour subroutine
61605 "Contour incorrectly CYCLE76 Illegal relief cut element detected
programmed" CYCLE77
CYCLE95
61606 "Error on contour CYCLE95 An error was detected during contour
preparation" preparation, this alarm is always output
with NCK alarm 10930 ... 10934, 15800 or
15810
61607 "Starting point CYCLE95 The starting point reached before the cycle
incorrectly was called does not lie outside the
programmed" rectangle described by the contour
subroutine
61608 "Wrong tool point CYCLE94 A tool point direction between 1 ... 4
direction CYCLE96 that matches the undercut form must
programmed" be programmed
61609 "Form incorrectly CYCLE94 Check parameters for the undercut
programmed" CYCLE96 form
61610 "No infeed depth CYCLE76
programmed" CYCLE77
CYCLE96
61611 "No intersection CYCLE95 The system cannot calculate an
found" intersection with the contour.
Check contour programming or change
infeed depth
61612 "Thread cannot be recut" CYCLE97
CYCLE98
61613 "Undercut position CYCLE94 Check value in parameter _VARI
incorrectly defined" CYCLE96
61807 "Incorrect spindle CYCLE840 Check parameters SDR and SDAC
direction programmed
(active)"
62100 "No drilling cycle HOLES1 No drilling cycle was called modally
active" HOLES2 before the drilling pattern cycle was
called
62105 "Number of columns CYCLE801
or rows is zero"

© Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 5-325
 5 5
Error Messages and Error Handling 03.96
09.01
5.3 Overview of cycle alarms

Alarm number Alarm text Source Explanation, remedy

62180 "No name assigned to CYCLE800

swivel data record even
though machine data
$MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_
CARRIER > 1"
62181 "NCK software version CYCLE800
too old (no
TOOLCARRIER
functionality)"
62183 "Retraction mode GUD7 CYCLE800
_TC_FR outside value
range 0..2"
62184 "No solution can be CYCLE800
found with current angle
inputs"
62185 "No travel limits declared CYCLE800 Check start-up of swivel cycle
for rotary axes " CYCLE800
62186 "Invalid rotary axis CYCLE800 Check start-up of swivel cycle
vectors" CYCLE800
62187 "Name of swivel data CYCLE800
record unknown"

© Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

5-326 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 5 5
03.96
12.98 Error Messages and Error Handling
5.4 Messages in the cycles

5.4 Messages in the cycles

The cycles output messages in the dialog line of the
control. These messages do not interrupt
processing.
They provide information about specific cycle
behavior and how machining is progressing and are
usually displayed for the duration of the machining
operation or until the end of the cycle. The following
messages can be displayed:

Message text Source

"Depth: According to value for relative depth" CYCLE81 ... CYCLE89, CYCLE840
"Machining elongated hole" LONGHOLE
"Machining slot" SLOT1
"Machining circumferential slot" SLOT2
"Wrong milling direction, G3 will be generated" SLOT1, SLOT2, POCKET1, POCKET2,
CYCLE90
"Changed form of the undercut" CYCLE94, CYCLE96
"First drilling depth according to FDPR" CYCLE83
"Caution final machining allowance ≥ tool diameter" POCKET1, POCKET2
"Thread start <Nr.> - longitudinal thread machining" CYCLE97, CYCLE98
"Thread start <Nr.> - face thread machining" CYCLE97, CYCLE98
"Simulation active, no tool programmed, final POCKET1...POCKET4,
contour being traversed" SLOT1, SLOT2, CYCLE93,
CYCLE72
"Simulation active, no tool programmed, final CYCLE72, POCKET1, ... POCKET4,
contour being traversed" SLOT1, SLOT2, CYCLE93
"Simulation active, no tool programmed" CYCLE71, CYCLE90, CYCLE94, CYCLE96

In each case <Nr.> stands for the number of the

figure that is currently being machined.

© Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition 5-327
 5 5
Error Messages and Error Handling 03.96
5.4 Messages in the cycles

Notes

© Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

5-328 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 A A
09.01 Appendix

Appendix

A Abbreviations ....................................................................................................................... A-330

B Terms................................................................................................................................... A-339
C References .......................................................................................................................... A-347
D Index .................................................................................................................................... A-361
E Identifiers ............................................................................................................................. A-365

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition A-329
 A A
Appendix 09.01
Abbreviations

A Abbreviations

AS Automation system

ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange

ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit: User switching circuit

ASUB Asynchronous Subroutine

AV Production planning

BA Operating mode

BAG Mode group

BB Ready

BCD Binary Coded Decimals: Decimals number coded in binary format

BCS Basic Coordinate System

BIN Binary Files

BIOS Basic Input Output System

BOT Boot Files: Boot files for SIMODRIVE 611D

C Bus Communications bus

C1 .. C4 Channel 1 to channel 4

CAD Computer-aided design

CAM Computer-aided manufacturing

CNC Computerized Numerical Control

COM Communication

CP Communication processor

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

A-330 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 A A
09.01 Appendix
Abbreviations

CPU Central Processing Unit

CR Carriage Return

CRT Cathode Ray Tube: Teletube

CSB Central Service Board: PLC module

CTS Clear To Send: Clear To Send for serial interfaces

CUTOM Cutter radius compensation: Tool radius compensation

DAC Digital analog converter

DB Data block on the PLC

DBB Data block byte on the PLC

DBW Data block word on the PLC

DBX Data block bit on the PLC

DC Direct Control: Movement of the rotary axis across the shortest

path to the absolute position within one revolution

DCD Carrier Detect

DCE Data communication equipment

DDE Dynamic Data Exchange

DIN German Industrial Standard

DIO Data Input/Output Data transfer display

DIR Directory

DLL Dynamic Link Library

DOS Disk Operating System

DPM Dual Port Memory

DPR Dual port RAM

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition A-331
 A A
Appendix 09.01
Abbreviations

DRAM Dynamic random access memory

DRF Differential Resolver Function (handwheel)

DRY Dry Run: Dry run feedrate

DSB Decoding Single Block

DTE Data terminal equipment

DW Data word

EIA Code Special punch tape code: number of punched holes per character
is always odd

ENC Encoder

EPROM Erasable programmable read only memory

ERROR Error from printer

FB Function block

FBS Slimline screen

FC Function Call: Function block on the PLC

FDB Product database

FDD Floppy Disk Drive

FDD Feed drive

FEPROM Flash EPROM: Readable and writable memory

FIFO First in first out: Memory that operates without addresses where the
data are always read out in the same order in which they were
stored.

FIPO Fine interpolator

FM Function module

FM-NC Function module numerical control

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

A-332 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 A A
09.01 Appendix
Abbreviations

FPU Floating Point Unit

FRA Frame block

FRAME Data block (frame)

FRK Tool radius compensation

FST Feed Stop

FUP Control system flowchart (programming method for PLC)

GP Basic program

GRC Grinding wheel radius compensation

GUD Global User Data

HD Hard Disk

HEX Hexadecimal number

HHU Hand-held unit

HiFu Auxiliary Function

HMI Operator control and monitoring

HMS High resolution measuring system

HW Hardware

I Input

I/O Input/output

I/RF Power feed/return converter unit on the

SIMODRIVE 611(D)

IBN Installation and start-up

IF Pulse enable for drive module

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition A-333
 A A
Appendix 09.01
Abbreviations

IK (GD) Implicit communication (global data)

IKA Interpolative compensation

IM Interface module

IMR Interface module receive: Interface module for receiving data

IMS Interface module send: Interface module for transmitting data

INC Increment: Incremental dimension

INI Initializing data

IPO Interpolator

IS Interface signal

ISA International standard architecture

ISO International standard organization

ISO Code Special punch tape code: number of punched holes per character
is always even

JOG Jogging: Jog mode

KD Coordinate rotation

KÜ Transmission ratio

Kv Servo gain factor

LAD Ladder logic (programming method for PLC)

LCD Liquid crystal display

LEC Leadscrew error compensation

LED Light emitting diode

LF Line Feed

LMS Position measuring system

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

A-334 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 A A
09.01 Appendix
Abbreviations

LR Position controller

LUD Local User Data

MB Megabyte(s)

MCP Machine control panel

MCS Machine coordinate system

MD Machine data

MDA Manual data automatic: Manual input

MK Measuring circuit

MLFB Machine-readable product designation

MMC Man Machine Communication: User interface on numerical control

systems for operator control, programming and simulation

MPF Main program file: NC part program (main program)

MPI Multiport interface

MS Microsoft (software manufacturer)

MSD Main spindle drive

NC Numerical control

NCK Numerical control kernel: Numerical kernel with block preparation,

positioning range etc.

NCU Numerical control unit: NCK hardware unit

NRK Name of NCK operating system

NURBS Non uniform rational B spline

O Output

OB Organization block on PLC

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition A-335
 A A
Appendix 09.01
Abbreviations

OEM Original equipment manufacturer

OI Operator interface

OP Operator panel

OPI Operator panel interface: operator panel interface module

OPT Options

OSI Open systems interconnection: Standardization for computer

communication

P Bus Peripheral bus

PC Personal Computer

PCIN Name of SW for data exchange with the control

PCMCIA Personal computer memory card international association: Memory

plug-in board normalization

PG Programming device

PLC Programmable logic control

POS Positioning

RAM Random access memory: in which data can be read and written

REF Reference point approach function

REPOS Repositioning function

RISC Reduced instruction set computer: type of processor with small

instruction set and ability to process instructions at high speed
ROV Rapid override: Input adjustment

RPA R parameter active: memory area on the NCK for

R parameter numbers

RPY Roll Pitch Yaw: type of rotation of a coordinate system

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

A-336 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 A A
09.01 Appendix
Abbreviations

RS-232-C Serial interface (definition of interchange circuit between DTE and

DCE)

RTS Request to send: control signal on serial data interfaces

SBL Single block

SD Setting data

SDB System data block

SEA Setting data active: Identifier (file type) for setting data

SFB System function block

SFC System function call

SK Softkey

SKP Skip: skip block

SM Stepper motor

SPF Subprogram file: subroutine

SR Subroutine

SRAM Static RAM

SSI Serial synchronous interface

STL Statement list

SW Software

SYF System files

T Tool

TC Tool change

TEA Testing data active: refers to machine data

TLC Tool length compensation

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition A-337
 A A
Appendix 09.01
Abbreviations

TO Tool offset

TOA Tool offset active: identifier (file type) for tool offsets

TRANSMIT Transform milling into turning: coordinate conversion on turning

machine for milling operations

TRC Tool radius compensation

UFR User frame: zero offset

WCS Work piece coordinate system

WDP Workpiece directory

WOP Workshop-oriented programming

ZO Zero offset

ZOA Zero offset active: identifier (file type) for zero offset data

µC Microcontroller

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

A-338 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 A A
09.01 Appendix
Terms

B Terms

Important terms are listed in alphabetical order. The symbol "->"

precedes terms which are explained under a separate entry in this list
A
Alarms All -> messages and alarms are displayed on the operator panel in
plain text with date and time as well as the appropriate symbol for the
reset criterion. Alarms and messages are displayed separately.
Alarms and messages in the part program
Alarms and messages can be displayed directly from the part program
in plain text.
Alarms and messages from PLC
Alarms and messages relating to the machine can be displayed
directly from
the PLC program in plain text. No additional function block packages
are required for this purpose.
Cycle alarms lie in the number range 60000 to 69999.

B
Blank The part used to start machining a workpiece.

Block A section of a -> part program terminated with a line feed. A distinction
is made between -> main blocks and -> subblocks.

Block search The block search function allows selection of any point in the part
program at which machining must start or be continued. The function
is provided for the purpose of testing part programs or continuing
machining after an interruption.

Booting Loading the system program after Power ON.

C
CNC è NC

CNC high-level language The high-level language offers: -> User variables, -> Predefined user
variables, -> System variables, -> Indirect programming,
-> arithmetic and trigonometric functions, -> Comparison operations
and logic operations, -> Program branches and jumps,
-> Program coordination (SINUMERIK 840D), -> Macros.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition A-339
 A A
Appendix 09.01
Terms

COM Component of the NC control for the implementation and coordination

of communication.

Contour Outline of a -> workpiece.

Coordinate system See -> machine coordinate system, -> workpiece coordinate system

CPU Central Processor Unit, -> PLC

Cycle Protected subroutine for executing a machining process that is

repeated on the -> workpiece

Cycle setting data Using these special setting data the cycle parameter calculation can
be varied.

Cycle support The available cycles are listed in menu "Cycle support" in the
"Program" operating area. Once the desired machining cycle has been
selected, the parameters required for assigning values are displayed
in plain text.

D
Data module A data unit on the -> PLC which can be accessed by -> HIGHSTEP
programs.
A data unit on the -> NC: Data modules contain data definitions for
global user data. These data can be initialized directly when they are
defined.

Data transfer program PCIN is an auxiliary program for transmitting and receiving CNC user
PCIN data, e.g. part programs, tool offsets, etc. via the serial interface. The
PCIN program can run under MS-DOS on standard industrial PCs.

Diagnosis Operating area of the control.

The control has both a self-diagnosis program as well as test functions
for servicing purposes: status, alarm and service displays.

Dimensions Position and lead values can be programmed in inches in the

specification, metric and machining program. The control is set to a basic system regardless of
inches the programmable dimensional specification (G70/G71).
The cycle are programmed independent of the measuring system.

E
Editor The editor makes it possible to create, modify, extend, join and import
programs/texts/program blocks.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

A-340 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 A A
09.01 Appendix
Terms

F
Finished-part contour Contour of the finished workpiece. See also -> Blank.

Frame A frame is a calculation rule that translates one Cartesian coordinate

system into another Cartesian coordinate system. A frame contains
the components -> zero offset, -> rotation, -> scaling, -> mirroring.
Inside the cycle, additive frames programed, which have an effect on
the actual-value display during the cycle.
After the cycle, the same workpiece coordinate system is active as
before the call.

G
Geometry axis Geometry axes are used to describe a 2 or 3-dimensional area in the
workpiece coordinate system.

Global main Each global main program/subroutine may appear only once under its
program/subroutine name in the directory. It is not possible to use the same program
name in different directories with different contents as a global
program.

I
Identifier Words in compliance with DIN 66025 are supplemented by identifiers
(names) for variables (arithmetic variables, system variables, user
variables), for subroutines, for keywords and for words with several
address letters. These supplements have the same meaning as the
words with respect to block format. Identifiers must be unambiguous.
It is not permissible to use the same identifier for different objects.

Imperial measurement Measurement system which defines distances in "inches" and

system fractions of inches.

J
Jog Control operating mode (setup operation): The machine can be set up
in the Jog mode. Individual axes and spindle can be traversed in jog
mode by means of the direction keys. Other functions which are
executed in jog mode are
-> reference point approach, -> repos and -> preset (set actual value).

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition A-341
 A A
Appendix 09.01
Terms

L
Languages The operator-prompt display texts, system messages and system
alarms are available (on diskette) in five system languages:
English, French, German, Italian and Spanish.
The user can select two of the listed languages at a time in the
control.

M
Macros A collections of instructions under a common identifier. The identifier
in the program refers to the collected sequence of instructions.

Machine Operating area of the control.

Machine coordinate A coordinate system which is related to the axes of the machine tool.
system

Machine origin A fixed point on the machine tool which can be referenced by all
(derived) measurements systems.

Main program -> Part program identified by a number or name in which further main
programs, subroutines or -> cycles may be called.

MDA A mode in the control: Manual Data Automatic: In the MDA mode,
individual program blocks or block sequences with no reference to a
main program or subroutine can be input and executed immediately
afterwards through actuation of the NC start key.

Messages All messages programmed in the part program and -> alarms detected
by the system are displayed on the operator panel in plain text with
date and time as well as the appropriate symbol for the reset criterion.
Alarms and messages are displayed separately.

Metric measurement Standardized system of units: for lengths in millimeters (mm),

system meters (m), etc.

Mirroring Mirroring exchanges the leading signs of the coordinate values of a

contour in relation to an axis. Mirroring can be performed
simultaneously in relation to several axes.

Module "Module" is the term given to any files required for creating and
processing programs.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

A-342 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 A A
09.01 Appendix
Terms

N
NC Numerical control It incorporates all the components of the of the
machine tool control system: -> NCK, -> PLC, -> MMC, -> COM.
Note CNC (computerized numerical control) would be a more
appropriate description for the SINUMERIK 810D or 840D.

NCK Numeric Control Kernel: Components of the NC control which

executes
-> part programs and essentially coordinates the movements on the
machine tool.

O
Oriented spindle stop Stops the workpiece spindle with a specified orientation angle, e.g. to
perform an additional machining operation at a specific position.
This function is used in several drilling cycles.

P
Parameter 840D/FM-NC:
- Operating area of the control unit
- Computation parameter, can be set or scanned in the
program at the discretion of the programmer for any
purposes he may deem meaningful.

Part program A sequence of instructions to the NC control which combine to

produce a specific -> workpiece by performing certain machining
operation on a given -> blank .

Part program The part program management function can be organized according
management to -> workpieces. The number of programs and data to be managed
determine the size of the user memory. Each file (programs and data)
can be given a name consisting of a maximum of 24 alphanumeric
characters.

PG Programming device

PLC Programmable logic control: -> Programmable logic control.

Component of the -> NC control: A control which can be programmed
to control the logic on a machine tool.

Polar coordinates A coordinate system which defines the position of a point on a plane in
terms of its distance from the origin and the angle formed by the
radius vector with a defined axis.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition A-343
 A A
Appendix 09.01
Terms

Power ON Control is switched off and then switched on again.

After loading the cycles it is always necessary to carry out a Power
ON.

Program Operating area of the control.

Sequence of instructions to the control.

R
Rapid traverse The highest traversing speed of an axis. It is used to move the tool
from rest to the -> workpiece contour or retract the tool from the
contour.

Rigid tapping Rigid tapping can be drilled with the help of this function. When the
rigid tapping function is used, interpolation of the spindle acting as a
rotary axis and the drilling axis ensures that threads are cut exactly to
the end of the drilling depth, e.g. tapped blind hole (precondition:
spindle is operating in axis mode). -> CYCLE84

Rotation Component of a -> frame which defines a rotation of the coordinate

system through a specific angle.

R-Parameter Calculation parameter. The programmer of the -> part program can
assign or request the values of the R parameter as required.

S
Scaling Component of a -> frame which causes axis-specific alterations in the
scale.

Serial RS-232 interface For the purpose of data input and output,
one serial RS-232 interface (similar to European Standard V.24)
(RS232) is provided on the MMC module MMC 100 and two RS-232
interfaces on the MMC modules MMC 101 and MMC 102. It is
possible to load and save machining programs, cycles as well as
manufacturer and user data via these interfaces.

Services Operating area of the control.

Setting data Data which provide the NC control with information on properties of
the machine tool in a way defined by the system software.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

A-344 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 A A
09.01 Appendix
Terms

Standard cycles Standard cycles are provided for machining operations which are
frequently repeated:
Cycles for drilling/milling applications
Cycles for turning applications (SINUMERIK FM-NC)
The available cycles are listed in menu "Cycle support" in the
"Program" operating area. Once the desired machining cycle has been
selected, the parameters required for assigning values are displayed
in plain text.

Subroutine A sequence of instructions of a -> part program which can be called

repetitively with various defining parameters. The subroutine is called
from a main program. Every subroutine can be protected against
unauthorized read-out and display. -> Cycles are a type of subroutine.

T
Tapping with Tapping is carried out without spindle encoder (G33 or G63) ->
compensating chuck CYCLE840

Text editor è Editor

Tool A part used on the machine tool for machining. Examples of tools
include cutting tools, mills, drills, laser beams, etc.

Tool edge radius When a contour is programmed, it is assumed that a pointed tool is
compensation used. Since this is not always possible, the control makes allowance
for the curvature radius of the tool being used. The curvature centre
point displaced by the curvature radius is guided equidistantly to the
contour.
Turning and milling cycles select and deselect the cutting radius offset
internally.

Tool offset A tool is selected through the programming of a T function (5

decades, integer) in the block. Up to nine cutting edges (D addresses)
can be assigned to each T number. The number of tools to be
managed in the control is set at the configuration stage.

Tool radius In order to program a desired -> workpiece contour directly, the control
compensation must traverse a path equidistant to the programmed contour with
allowance for the radius (G41/G42).

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition A-345
 A A
Appendix 09.01
Terms

U
User-defined variables Users can define variables in the -> part program or data block (global
user data) for their own use. A definition contains a data type
specification and the variable name. See also -> System variable.
Cycles work internally with user-defined variables.

V
Variable definition A variable definition includes the specification of a data type and a
variable name. The variable name can be used to address the value of
the variable.

W
Workpiece Part to be created/machined by the machine tool.

Workpiece contour Setpoint contour of the -> workpiece to be created/machined.

Workpiece coordinate The starting position of the workpiece coordinate system is the ->
system workpiece origin. When programming in the workpiece coordinate
system, the dimensions and directions refer to this system.

Workpiece origin The workpiece origin is the starting point for the -> workpiece
coordinate system. It is defined by the distance to the machine origin.

Z
Zero offset Specification of a new reference point for a coordinate system through
reference to an existing origin and a -> frame settable.
SINUMERIK FM-NC: Four independent zero offsets can be selected
for each CNC axis.
SINUMERIK 840D: A configurable number of settable zero offsets are
available for each CNC axis. The offsets - which are selected by
means of G functions - take effect alternately.
External
In addition to all the offsets which define the position of the workpiece
zero, it is possible to superimpose an external zero offset
- by means of a handwheel (DRF offset) or
- from the PLC.
Programmable
It is possible to program zero offsets for all path and positioning axes
by means of the TRANS statement.

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

A-346 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 A A
09.01 Appendix
References

C References

General Documentation

/BU/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D/802S, C, D

Ordering information
Catalog NC 60.1
Order number: E86060-K4460-A101-A8-7600

/ST7/ SIMATIC
SIMATIC S7 PLC
Catalog ST 70
Order number: E86060-K4670-A111-A3

/Z/ SINUMERIK, SIROTEC, SIMODRIVE

Accessories and Equipment for Special-Purpose Machines
Catalog NC Z
Order number: E86060-K4490-A001-A7-7600

Electronic documentation

/CD7/ The SINUMERIK System (09.01 Edition)

DOC ON CD
(includes all SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D and SIMODRIVE publications)
Order number: 6FC5 298-6CA00-0AG1

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition A-347
 A A
Appendix 09.01
References

User Documentation

/AUK/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

AutoTurn Short Operating Guide (09.01 Edition)
Order number: 6FC5 298-4AA30-0BP3

/AUP/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

AutoTurn Graphic Programming System (09.01 Edition)
Operator's Guide
Programming / Setup
Order number: 6FC5 298-4AA40-0BP3

/BA/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

MMC Operator's Guide (10.00 Edition)
Order number: 6FC5 298-6AA00-0BP0

/BAD/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

Operator's Guide: HMI Advanced (09.01 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AF00-0BP1

/BEM/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

HMI Embedded Operator's Guide (09.01 Edition)
Order number: 6FC5 298-6AC00-0BP1

/BAE/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

Unit Operator Panel Operator's Guide (04.96 Edition)
Order number: 6FC5 298-3AA60-0BP1

/BAH/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

HAT 6 (HPU new) Operator's Guide (09.01 Edition)
Order number: 6FC5 298-0AD60-0BP2

/BAK/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

Short Operating Guide (02.01 Edition)
Order number: 6FC5 298-6AA10-0BP0

/BAM/ SINUMERIK 810D/840D

ManualTurn Operator's Guide (10.01 Edition)
Order number: 6FC5 298-6AD00-0BP0

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

A-348 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 A A
09.01 Appendix
References

/BAS/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

ShopMill Operator's Guide (10.01 Edition)
Order number: 6FC5 298-6AD10-0BP0

/BAT/ SINUMERIK 810D/840D

ShopTurn Operator's Guide (03.01 Edition)
Order number: 6FC5 298-6AD50-0BP0

/BAP/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

Handheld Programming Unit (04.00 Edition)
Order number: 6FC5 298-5AD20-0BP1

/BNM/ SINUMERIK 840D840Di//810D

Measuring Cycles User's Guide (09.01 Edition)
Order number: 6FC5 298-6AA70-0BP1

/DA/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

Diagnostics Guide (09.01 Edition)
Order number: 6FC5 298-6AA20-0BP1

/KAM/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

ManualTurn Short Guide (04.01 Edition)
Order number: 6FC5 298-5AD40-0BP0

/KAS/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

ShopMill Short Guide (04.01 Edition)
Order number: 6FC5 298-5AD30-0BP0

/PG/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

Programming Guide Fundamentals (09.01 Edition)
Order number: 6FC5 298-6AB00-0BP1

/PGA/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

Programming Guide Advanced (09.01 Edition)
Order number: 6FC5 298-6AB10-0BP1

/PGK/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

Short Programming Guide (02.01 Edition)
Order number: 6FC5 298-6AB30-0BP1

/PGM/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

Programming Guide ISO Milling (10.01 Edition)
Order number: 6FC5 298-6AC20-0BP1

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition A-349
 A A
Appendix 09.01
References

/PGT/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

Programming Guide ISO Turning (10.01 Edition)
Order number: 6FC5 298-6AC10-0BP1

/PGZ/ SINUMERIK 840D840Di//810D

Cycles Programming Guide (09.01 Edition)
Order number: 6FC5 298-6AB40-0BP1

/PI/ PCIN 4.4

Software for Data Transfer to/from MMC Module
Order number: 6FX2 060-4AA00-4XB0 (GE, EN, FR)
Order from: WK Fürth

/SYI/ SINUMERIK 840Di

System Overview (02.01 Edition)
Order number: 6FC5 298-6AE40-0BP0

Manufacturer/Service Documentation

a) Lists
/LIS/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D/
SIMODRIVE 611D
Lists (09.01 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AB70-0BP1

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

A-350 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 A A
09.01 Appendix
References

b) Hardware
/BH/ SINUMERIK 840D840Di//810D
Operator Components Manual (HW) (09.01 Edition)
Order number: 6FC5 297-6AA50-0BP1

/BHA/ SIMODRIVE Sensor

Absolute Position Sensor with Profibus-DP
User's Guide (HW) (02.99 Edition)
Order number: 6SN1 197-0AB10-0YP1

/EMC/ SINUMERIK, SIROTEC, SIMODRIVE

EMC Installation Guideline (06.99 Edition)
Planning Guide (HW)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-0AD30-0BP1

/PHC/ SINUMERIK 810D

Configuring Manual (HW) (12.01 Edition)
Order number: 6FC5 297-4AD10-0BP1

/PHD/ SINUMERIK 840D

Configuring Manual NCU 561.2-573.2 (HW) (09.01 Edition)
Order number: 6FC5 297-6AC10-0BP1

/PHF/ SINUMERIK FM-NC

Configuring Manual NCU 570 (HW) (04.96 Edition)
Order number: 6FC5 297-3AC00-0BP0

/PMH/ SIMODRIVE Sensor

Measuring System for Main Spindle Drives
Configuring/Installation Guide, SIMAG-H (HW) (05.99 Edition)
Order number: 6SN1197-0AB30-0BP0

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition A-351
 A A
Appendix 09.01
References

c) Software
/FB1/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D
Description of Functions Basic Machine (Part 1) (09.01 Edition)
(the individual sections are listed below)
Order number: 6FC5 297-6AC20-0BP1

A2 Various Interface Signals

A3 Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones
B1 Continuous-Path Mode, Exact Stop and Look Ahead
B2 Acceleration
D1 Diagnostic Aids
D2 Interactive Programming
F1 Travel to Fixed Stop
G2 Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control
H2 Auxiliary Function Output to PLC
K1 Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation
K2 Axes, Coordinate Systems, Frames
Actual-Value System for Workpiece, External Zero Offset
K4 Communication
N2 EMERGENCY STOP
P1 Transverse Axes
P3 Basic PLC Program
R1 Reference Point Approach
S1 Spindles
V1 Feedrates
W1 Tool Offset

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

A-352 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 A A
09.01 Appendix
References

/FB2/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D(CCU2)

Description of Functions Extended Functions (Part 2) (09.01 Edition)
including FM-NC: Turning, Stepper Motor
(the individual sections are listed below)
Order number: 6FC5 297-6AC30-0BP1

A4 Digital and Analog NCK I/Os

B3 Several Operator Panels and NCUs
B4 Operation via PG/PC
F3 Remote Diagnosis
H1 Manual Travel and Handwheel Travel
K3 Compensations
K5 Mode Groups, Channels, Axis Replacement
L1 FM-NC Local Bus
M1 Kinematic Transformation
M5 Measurement
N3 Software Cams, Limit Signals
N4 Punching and Nibbling
P2 Positioning Axes
P5 Oscillation
R2 Rotary Axes
S3 Synchronous Spindle
S5 Synchronized Actions (SW 3 and earlier / then /FBSY/)
S6 Stepper Motor Control
S7 Memory Configuration
T1 Indexing Axes
W3 Tool Changes
W4 Grinding

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition A-353
 A A
Appendix 09.01
References

/FB3/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D(CCU2)

Description of Functions Special Functions (Part 3) (09.01 Edition)
(the individual sections are listed below)
Order number: 6FC5 297-6AC80-0BP1

F2 3-Axis to 5-Axis Transformation

G1 Gantry Axes
G3 Cycle Times
K6 Contour Tunnel Monitoring
M3 Coupled Axes and ESR
S8 Constant Workpiece Speed for Centerless Grinding
T3 Tangential Control
TE1 Clearance Control
TE2 Analog Axis
TE3 Speed/Torque Coupling Master-Slave
TE4 Handling Transformation Package
TE5 Setpoint Exchange
TE6 MCS Coupling
TE7 Retrace Support
TE8 Unclocked Path-Synchronized Switching Signal Output
V2 Preprocessing
W5 3D Tool Radius Compensation

/FBA/ SIMODRIVE 611D/SINUMERIK 840D/810D

Description of Functions Drive Functions (09.01 Edition)
(the individual sections are listed below)
Order number: 6SN1 197-0AA80-0BP7

DB1 Operational Messages/Alarm Reactions

DD1 Diagnostic Functions
DD2 Speed Control Loop
DE1 Extended Drive Functions
DF1 Enables
DG1 Encoder Parameterization
DM1 Calculating Motor/Power Section Parameters and Controller Data
DS1 Current Control Loop
DÜ1 Monitoring/Limitations

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

A-354 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 A A
09.01 Appendix
References

/FBAN/ SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611 DIGITAL

Description of Functions ANA MODULE (02.00 Edition)
Order number: 6SN1 197-0AB80-0BP0

/FBD/ SINUMERIK 840D

Description of Functions Digitizing (07.99 Edition)
Order number: 6FC5 297-4AC50-0BP0

DI1 Start-Up
DI2 Scan with Tactile Sensor (scancad scan)
DI3 Scan with Laser (scancad laser)
DI4 Writing Milling Programs (scancad mill)

/FBDN/ CAM Integration DNC NT-2000

Description of Functions (05.00 Edition)
System for NC Data Management and Data Distribution
Order number: 6FC5 297-5AE50-0BP1

/FBFA/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

Description of Functions (09.01 Edition)
ISO Dialects for SINUMERIK
Order number: 6FC5 297-6AE10-0BP1

/FBFE/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

Description of Functions Remote Diagnosis (09.01 Edition)
Order number: 6FC5 297-0AF00-0BP1

FE1 Remote Diagnosis

FE2 Interrupt-Controlled Email Messaging: @Event

/FBHLA/ SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611 digital

Description of Functions
HLA Module (04.00 Edition)
Order number: 6SN1 197-0AB60-0BP2

/FBMA/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

Description of Functions ManualTurn (10.01 Edition)
Order number: 6FC5 297-6AD50-0BP1

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition A-355
 A A
Appendix 09.01
References

/FBO/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

Description of Functions
Configuring OP 030 User Interface (09.01 Edition)
(the individual sections are listed below)
Order number: 6FC5 297-6AC40-0BP0

BA Operator's Guide
EU Development Environment (Configuring Package)
PSE Introduction to Configuring of User Interface
IK Screen Kit: Software Update and Configuration

PS Online only: Configuration Syntax (configuration package)

/FBP/ SINUMERIK 840D

Description of Functions C-PLC Programming (03.96 Edition)
Order number: 6FC5 297-3AB60-0BP0

/FBR/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

Description of Functions
SINCOM Computer Link (02.00 Edition)
Order number: 6FC5 297-5AD60-0BP0

NFL Interface to Central Production Computer

NPL Interface to PLC/NCK

/FBSI/ SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE

Description of Functions (03.01 Edition)
SINUMERIK Safety Integrated
Order number: 6FC5 297-6AB80-0BP0

/FBSP/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

Description of Functions ShopMill (10.01 Edition)
Order number: 6FC5 297-6AD80-0BP1

/FBST/ SIMATIC
FM STEPDRIVE/SIMOSTEP
Description of Functions (11.98 Edition)
Order number: 6SN1 197-0AA70-0YP3

/FBSY/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

Description of Functions Synchronized Actions (09.01 Edition)
for Wood, Glass, Ceramics, Presses
Order number: 6FC5 297-6AD40-0BP1

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

A-356 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 A A
09.01 Appendix
References

/FBT / SINUMERIK 840D/810D

Description of Functions ShopTurn (03.01 Edition)
Order number: 6FC5 297-6AD70-0BP0

/FBTD/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

Description of Functions
SINTDI Tool Data Information Systemwith Online Help (03.01 Edition)
Order number: 6FC5 297-6AE00-0BP0

/FBU/ SIMODRIVE 611 universal

Description of Functions (05.00 Edition)
Closed-Loop Control Component for Speed
Control and Positioning
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AB20-0BP3

/FBW/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

Description of Functions Tool Management (10.01 Edition)
Order number: 6FC5 297-6AC60-0BP1

/HBI/ SINUMERIK 840Di

Manual (07.01 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AE60-0BP0

/KBU/ SIMODRIVE 611 universal

Short Guide (05.00 Edition)
Closed-Loop Control Component for Speed Control
Order number: 6SN1 197-0AB40-0BP3

/PJE/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D

HMI Embedded Configuring Package (08.01 Edition)
Description of Functions: Software Update, Configuration,
Installation
Order number: 6FC5 297-6EA10-0BP0
(the document CS Configuring Syntax is supplied with
the software and available as a pdf file)

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition A-357
 A A
Appendix 09.01
References

/PJFE/ SIMODRIVE
Planning Guide (08.01 Edition)
Built-In Synchronous Motors 1FE1
Three-Phase AC Motors for Main Spindle Drives
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AC00-0BP1

/PJLM/ SIMODRIVE
Planning Guide Linear Motors (06.01 Edition)
(on request)
ALL General Information about Linear Motors
1FN1 1FN1 Three-Phase AC Linear Motor
1FN3 1FN3 Three-Phase AC Linear Motor
CON Connections
Order number: 6SN1 197-0AB70-0BP2

/PJM/ SIMODRIVE
Planning Guide Motors (09.00 Edition)
Three-Phase AC Motors for Feed and
Main Spindle Drives
Order number: 6SN1 197-0AA20-0BP4

/PJU/ SIMODRIVE 611

Planning Guide Converters (05.01 Edition)
Order number: 6SN1 197-0AA00-0BP5

/POS1/ SIMODRIVE POSMO A

User's Guide (04.01 Edition)
Distributed Positioning Motor on PROFIBUS DP
Order number: 6SN2 197-0AA00-0BP2

/POS2/ SIMODRIVE POSMO A

Installation Guide (supplied with every POSMO A) (12.98 Edition)
Order number: 462 008 0815 00

/POS3/ SIMODRIVE POSMO SI/CD/CA

Distributed Servo Drive Systems, User's Guide (01.01 Edition)
Order number: 6SN2 197-0AA20-0BP0

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

A-358 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 A A
09.01 Appendix
References

/S7H/ SIMATIC S7-300

Manual: Assembly, CPU Data (HW) (10.93 Edition)
Reference Manual: Module Data
Order number: 6ES7 398-8AA03-8AA0

/S7HT/ SIMATIC S7-300

STEP 7 Manual, Fundamentals, V. 3.1 (03.97 Edition)
Order number: 6ES7 810-4CA02-8AA0

/S7HR/ SIMATIC S7-300

Manual (03.97 Edition)
STEP 7, Reference Manuals, V. 3.1
Order number: 6ES7 810-4CA02-8AR0

/S7S/ SIMATIC S7-300

FM 353 Positioning Module for Stepper Drive (04.97 Edition)
Order together with Configuring Package

/S7L/ SIMATIC S7-300

FM 354 Positioning Module for Servo Drive (04.97 Edition)
Order together with Configuring Package

/S7M/ SIMATIC S7-300

FM 357 Multimodule for Servo or (10.99 Edition)
Stepper Drive
Order together with Configuring Package

/SHM/ SIMODRIVE 611

Manual (01.98 Edition)
Single-Axis Positioning Control for MCU 172A
Order number: 6SN 1197-4MA00-0BP0

/SP/ SIMODRIVE 611-A/611-D

SimoPro 3.1
Program for Configuring Machine Tool Drives
Order number: 6SC6 111-6PC00-0AA❏,
Order from: WK Fürth

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition A-359
 A A
Appendix 09.01
References

d) Installation and
Start-up

/IAA/ SIMODRIVE 611A

Installation & Start-up Guide (10.00 Edition)
(including description of start-up software for
SIMODRIVE 611D)
Order number: 6SN 1197-0AA60-0BP6

/IAC/ SIMODRIVE 810D

Installation & Start-up Guide (12.01 Edition)
(including description of start-up software for
SIMODRIVE 611D)
Order number: 6FC5 297-4AD20-0BP1

/IAD/ SIMODRIVE 840D/SIMODRIVE 611D

Installation & Start-up Guide (09.01 Edition)
(including description of start-up software for
SIMODRIVE 611D)
Order number: 6FC5 297-6AB10-0BP1

/IAF/ SINUMERIK FM-NC

Installation & Start-up Guide (07.00 Edition)
Order number: 6FC5 297-3AB00-0BP1

/IAM/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

Installation & Start-Up Guide HMI/MMC (09.01 Edition)
Order number: 6FC5 297-6AE20-0BP1

AE1 Updates/Options
BE1 Extend the Operator Interface
HE1 Online Help
IM2 Start-Up HMI Embedded
IM4 Start-Up HMI Advanced (PCU 50)
TX1 Creating Texts in Foreign Languages

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

A-360 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 A A
09.01 Appendix
Index

D Index
Cycle parameterization 1-30
Cycle setting data, milling 3-110
A Cycle setting data, Turning 4-246
Absolute drilling depth 2-53, 3-120, 3-126, 3-138, Cycle support in program editor 1-26
3-163, 3-201 CYCLE71 3-160
Axis assignment 1-19 CYCLE72 3-166
CYCLE73 3-185, 3-192
CYCLE74 3-185, 3-186
B CYCLE75 3-185, 3-188
Behavior when quantity parameter is zero 2-96 CYCLE76 3-176
Blank 4-300 CYCLE77 3-181
Blank updating 4-309 CYCLE800 3-215
Blueprint programming 1-42 CYCLE801 2-104
Boring 2-49 CYCLE81 2-52
Boring 1 2-79 CYCLE82 2-55
Boring 2 2-82 CYCLE83 2-57
Boring 3 2-86 CYCLE84 2-65
Boring 4 2-89 CYCLE840 2-71
Boring 5 2-91 CYCLE85 2-79
Boring cycle 2-49 CYCLE86 2-82
CYCLE87 2-86
CYCLE88 2-89
C
CYCLE89 2-91
Call 1-19, 2-50
CYCLE90 3-111
Call conditions 1-19
CYCLE93 4-249
Centering 2-52
CYCLE94 4-259
Circumferential slot – SLOT2 3-131
CYCLE95 4-263
Configuring cycle selection 1-28
CYCLE950 4-297
Configuring help displays 1-33
CYCLE96 4-276
Configuring input screen forms 1-30
CYCLE97 4-280
Configuring tools 1-34
CYCLE98 4-288
Contour 1-line 1-42
Contour 2-line 1-42
Contour 3-line 1-42 D
Contour definition 4-270, 4-307 Deep hole drilling with chip breaking 2-60
Contour monitoring 4-247, 4-273 Deep hole drilling with swarf removal 2-59
Contour programming 4-302 Deep-hole drilling 2-57
CONTPRON 4-271 Dot matrix 2-104
Cycle alarms 5-321 Drill pattern cycles 1-17, 2-96
Cycle auxiliary subroutines 1-18 Drilling 2-52
Cycle call 1-22 Drilling cycles 1-17, 2-48

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition A-361
 A A
Appendix 09.01
Index

Drilling pattern cycles without drilling cycle call M

2-96 Machine data 1-20
Drilling, counterboring 2-55 Machining parameters 2-50
Machining plane 1-19
MCALL 2-93
E Messages 1-21, 5-327
Elongated holes on a circle – LONGHOLE 3-117 Milling circular pockets – POCKET2 3-140
Error Messages and Error Handling 5-319 Milling circular pockets – POCKET4 3-154
Extended stock removal cycle – CYCLE950 Milling circular spigots – CYCLE77 3-181
4-297 Milling cycles 1-17
Milling Cycles 3-107
Milling rectangular pockets – POCKET1 3-136
F
Milling rectangular pockets – POCKET3 3-144
Face milling 3-160
Milling rectangular spigots – CYCLE76 3-176
face thread 4-286
Modal call 2-93
FGROUP 3-111
Free contour programming 1-42
O
Operating the cycles support function 1-37
G
Outside threads 3-112
Geometrical parameters 2-50
Overview cycle files 1-27
Grooving cycle – CYCLE93 4-249
Overview of cycle alarms 5-321
Overview of cycles 1-16
H
Hole circle 2-101
P
HOLES1 2-97
Parallel-contour 4-299
HOLES2 2-101
Parameter list 1-22
Path milling 3-166
I Plausibility checks 2-96
Pocket milling with islands 3-185
Independence of language 1-36
Pocket milling with islands – CYCLE73 3-192
Inside threads 3-113
POCKET1 3-136
Integrating user cycles into the MMC 103
POCKET2 3-140
simulation function 1-38
POCKET3 3-144
POCKET4 3-154
L
Level definition 1-19
R
Loading to the control 1-35
Reference plane 2-53, 3-201
LONGHOLE 3-117
Relative drilling depth 2-53, 3-120, 3-126, 3-138,
Longitudinal thread 4-286
3-163, 3-201
Residual material 4-300
Retraction plane 2-53, 3-201

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

A-362 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 A A
09.01 Appendix
Index

Return conditions 1-19 T

Rigid tapping 2-65 Tapping with compensating chuck 2-71
Row of holes 2-97 Tapping with compensating chuck with encoder
2-73
Tapping with compensating chuck without
S encoder 2-73
Safety distance 2-53, 3-201 Thread chaining – CYCLE98 4-288
SETMS 3-110 Thread cutting 3-111
Simulation of cycles 1-25 Thread cutting – CYCLE97 4-280
Simulation without tool 1-25 Thread recutting (SW 5.3 and later) 4-295
SLOT1 3-123 Thread undercut – CYCLE96 4-276
SLOT2 3-131 Tool clearance angle 4-247
Slots on a circle – SLOT1 3-123 Transfer island contour – CYCLE75 3-188
Spindle handling 4-245 Transfer pocket edge contour – CYCLE74 3-186
SPOS 2-67, 2-68 Turning cycles 1-18, 4-243
Starting point 4-273
Stock removal cycle – CYCLE95 4-263
Swiveling– CYCLE800 3-215 U
Undercut cycle – CYCLE94 4-259

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition A-363
 A A
Appendix 09.01
Index

Space for Notes

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

A-364 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 A A
09.01 Appendix
Identifiers

840 D 840 D 810 D 840Di

NCU 571 NCU 572
NCU 573

E Identifiers

List of input/output variables for measuring cycles

Name Meaning in English Meaning in German

AD Allowance depth Basic pocket depth from reference plane
AFSL Angle for slot length Winkel für die Nutlänge
ANG1, ANG2 Flank angle Flankenwinkel
ANGB Liftoff angle for roughing Abhebwinkel beim Schruppen
AP1 Unfinished dimension in plane Rohmaß Taschenlänge/Taschenradius
AP2 Unfinished dimension in plane Basic size pocket width
APP Approach path Einlaufweg
APX Axial value for defining blank for achsweiser Wert zur Rohteildefinition für
facing axis Planachse
APXA Absolute or incremental evaluation Bewertung des Parameters _APX
of parameter APX absolut oder inkrementell
APZ Axial value for defining blank for achsweiser Wert zur Rohteildefinition für
longitudinal axis Längsachse
APZA Absolute or incremental evaluation Bewertung des Parameters _APZ
of parameter APZ absolut oder inkrementell
AS1, AS2 Direction of approach/approach path Spezifikation der Anfahrrichtung/-bahn
AXN Tool axis Werkzeugachse
BNAME Name for program of drill positions Name für Programm der Bohrpositionen
CDIR Circle direction Drehrichtung, Fräsrichtung
CPA Center point, abscissa Mittelpunkt des Lochkreises, Abszisse
(absolut)
CPO Center point,ordinate Mittelpunkt des Lochkreises, Ordinate
(absolut)
CRAD Corner radius Eckenradius
DAM Degression value, Path for roughing Degressionsfaktor / Weglänge
interrupt
DBH Distance between holes Abstand zwischen den Bohrungen
DIAG Groove depth Einstichtiefe
DIATH Diameter of thread Nenndurchmesser, Außendurchmesser
des Gewindes
DIS1 Distance programmierbarer Vorhalteabstand
DIS1 Distance between columns Abstand der Spalten
DIS2 Number of lines, Distance between Abstand der Zeilen
rows

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition A-365
 A A
Appendix 09.01
Identifiers

840 D 840 D 810 D 840Di

NCU 571 NCU 572
NCU 573

DM1 ... DM4 Diameter Durchmesser des Gewindes am

Anfangspunkt
DP Depth Tiefe (absolut)
DP1 First depth Eintauchtiefe
DPR Depth, relative Tiefe relativ zur Referenzebene
DT Dwell time Verweilzeit zum Spänebrechen beim
Schruppen
DTB Dwell time at bottom Verweilzeit auf Endbohrtiefe/am
Einstichgrund
DTD Dwell time at depth Verweilzeit auf Endbohrtiefe
DTS Dwell time at starting point Verweilzeit am Anfangspunkt
ENC Tapping with/without encoder Gewindebohren mit/ohne Geber
FAL Finish allowance konturgerechtes Schlichtaufmaß am
Nutrand/Taschenrand
FAL1 Finish allowance on groove base Schlichtaufmaß am Einstichgrund
FAL2 Finish allowance on flanks Schlichtaufmaß an den Flanken
FALD Finish allowance depth Schlichtaufmaß am Grund
FALZ Finish allowance, z axis Schlichtaufmaß in der Längsachse
FALX Finish allowance, x axis Schlichtaufmaß in der Planachse
FDEP First depth erste Bohrtiefe (absolut)
FDIS First distance Abstand der ersten Bohrung vom
Bezugspunkt
FDP1 Overrun path in direction to plane Überlaufweg in Richtung der
Ebenenzustellung
FDPR First depth, relative erste Bohrtiefe relativ zur Referenzebene
FF1 Feedrate for roughing Vorschub für Schruppen
FF2 Feedrate for insertion Vorschub zum Eintauchen
FF3 Feedrate for finishing Vorschub für Schlichten
FF4 Feedrate for contour transition Vorschub an Konturübergangselementen
elements
FFD Feedrate for depth Vorschub für Tiefenzustellung
FFP1 Feedrate surface Vorschub für Flächenbearbeitung
FFP2 Feedrate for finishing Vorschub für Schlichtbearbeitung
FFR Feedrate Vorschub
FORM Definition of form Definition der Form
FPL Final point along longitudinal axis Endpunkt in der Längsachse
FRF Feedrate factor Vorschubfaktor
IANG Infeed angle Zustellwinkel
INDA Incremental angle Fortschaltwinkel
IDEP Infeed depth Zustelltiefe
KNAME Name of the contour subroutine Name des Konturunterprogramms

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

A-366 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 A A
09.01 Appendix
Identifiers

840 D 840 D 810 D 840Di

NCU 571 NCU 572
NCU 573

LSANF Block number/label identifying start Satznummer/Label des Beginns der

of contour definition Konturbeschreibung
LSEND Block number/label identifying end of Satznummer/Label des Endes der
contour definition Konturbeschreibung
LP1 Length of approach travel, radius Länge des Anfahrwegs, Radius
LP2 Length of return travel, radius Länge des Abfahrwegs, Radius
KDIAM Internal diameter of thread Kerndurchmesser, Innendurchmesser
des Gewindes
LENG Elongated hole length, pocket length Langlochlänge, Taschenlänge
MDEP Minimum depth Mindestbohrtiefe
MID Maximum infeed depth maximale Zustelltiefe für eine Zustellung
MIDA Maximum infeed width maximale Zustellbreite
MIDF Maximum infeed depth for finishing maximale Zustelltiefe für
Schlichtbearbeitung
MPIT Thread lead as thread size Gewindesteigung als Gewindegröße
NID Number of noncuts Anzahl der Leerschnitte
NP1 ... NP8 Name/Label ... Name des Konturunterprogramms der
Fertigteilkontur/Label
NPP Name of part program Name des Konturunterprogramms
NRC Number of roughing cuts Anzahl der Schruppschnitte
NSP Start point offset first thread Startpunktversatz für den ersten
Gewindegang
NUM Number of holes Anzahl der Bohrungen
NUM1 Number of columns Anzahl der Spalten
NUM2 Number of lines Anzahl der Zeilen
NUMT Number of threads Anzahl der Gewindegänge
PA Reference point, abscissa Bezugspunkt Tasche
PO Reference point, ordinate Bezugspunkt Tasche
PO1 ... PO4 Point in longitudinal axis Anfangspunkt/Zwischenpunkt/Endpunkt
des Gewindes in der Längsachse
PIT Thread lead Gewindesteigung als Wert
PNAME Name for pocket milling machining Name für Taschenfräsen
program Bearbeitungsprogramm
POSS Position for oriented spindle stop Spindelposition
PP1 ... PP3 Thread pitch 1...3 as value Gewindesteigung 1...3 als Wert
PRAD Pocket radius Taschenradius
RAD Radius Radius des Kreises
RAD1 Radius Radius der Helixbahn beim Eintauchen
RCO1, RCO2 Radius/chamfer outside Radius/Fase, außen
RCI1, RCI2 Radius/chamfer inside Radius/Fase, innen
RFF Retract feed Rückzugsvorschub

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition A-367
 A A
Appendix 09.01
Identifiers

840 D 840 D 810 D 840Di

NCU 571 NCU 572
NCU 573

RFP Reference plane Referenzebene (absolut)

ROP Run out path Auslaufweg
RPA Retract path, abscissa Rückzugsweg in der Abszisse
RPAP Retract path, applicate Rückzugsweg in der Applikate
RPO Retract path, ordinate Rückzugsweg in der Ordinate
RL Bypass contour Umfahren der Kontur mittig
RTP Retract plane Rückzugsebene (absolut)
SDAC Spindle direction after cyle Drehrichtung nach Zyklusende
SDIR Spindle direction Spindelrichtung
SDIS Safety distance Sicherheitsabstand
SDR Spindle direction for retraction Drehrichtung für Rückzug
SPCA Reference point, abscissa Abszisse eines Bezugspunktes auf der
Geraden (absolut)
SPCO Reference point, ordinate Ordinate dieses Bezugspunktes (absolut)
SPD Starting point in the facing axis Anfangspunkt in der Planachse
SPL Starting point along longitudinal axis Anfangspunkt in der Längsachse
SSF Speed for finishing Drehzahl bei Schlichtbearbeitung
SST Speed for tapping Drehzahl für Gewindebohren
SST1 Speed for retraction Drehzahl für Rückzug
STA, STA1 Angle Winkel
STA2 Insertion angle Maximaler Eintauchwinkel für
Pendelbewegung
TDEP Thread depth Gewindetiefe
TN Name of stock removal tool Name des Ausräumwerkzeuges
TOL1 Blank tolerance Rohteiltoleranz
TYPTH Typ of thread Gewindetyp
VARI Machining mode Bearbeitungsart
VRT Variable return path variabler Rückzugsbetrag / Rückzugsweg
WID (Pocket) width Taschenbreite
WIDG Groove width Einstichbreite

ã Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved

A-368 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles – 09.01 Edition
 To Suggestions

SIEMENS AG
Corrections
A&D MC BMS for Publication/Manual:

P.O. Box 3180

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D
Germany-91050 Erlangen
(Phone: ++ 49-180-5050-222 [Hotline] Cycles
Fax: ++ 49-9131-98-2176
User Documentation
email: [email protected])
From Programming Guide

Name: Order No.: 6FC5298-6AB40-0BP1

Edition: 09.01
Company/Department:
If you come across any printing errors in this
Address: document, please let us know using form
provided. We would also appreciate and new
Zip Code: ideas and/or suggestion for improvements.

Phone: /
Fax: /

Suggestions and/or corrections

 Overview of SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Documentation (08.01)
General Documentation User Documentation

SINUMERIK
SIROTEC
SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SIMODRIVE SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK
840D/810D 840D/840Di/ Accessories 840D/810D/ 840D/810D 840D/840Di/ 840D/840Di/
810D FM-NC 810D 810D

Brochure Catalog Catalog AutoTurn Operator’s Guide Diagnostics Operator’s Guide *)

Ordering Info Accessories NC-Z -- Short Guide -- HT 6 (+ 840Di) Guide *) -- Short Guide
NC 60 *) -- Programming (1) -- HPU -- MMC 103
-- Setup (2) -- Unit Operator -- HMI Embedded
Panel -- HMI Advanced

User Documentation Manufacturer/Service Documentation

SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK

840D/840Di/ 840D/810D 840Di 840D/810D 840D/840Di/ 840D/810D
810D 810D

Program. Guide Operator’s Guide System Overview Description of Description of Descr. of Functions Configuring
-- Short Guide -- ManualTurn Functions Functions -- Computer Link (HW) *)
-- Fundamentals *) -- Short Guide ManualTurn -- ManualTurn Synchronized -- Tool Data -- FM-NC
-- Advanced *) -- ShopMill -- ShopMill Actions Information -- 810D
-- Cycles -- Short Guide ShopMill System -- 840D
-- Measuring Cycles
-- ISO Turning/Milling
Manufacturer/Service Documentation

SINUMERIK
SINUMERIK SIMODRIVE SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK
840D/840Di/ 611D 840D/840Di/ 840D/810D 840D/810D 840D/840Di/ 840D/810D
810D 840D/810D 810D 810D

Operator Description of Description of Configuring Kit Screen Kit Description of Description of

Components Functions Functions MMC 100/101 MMC 100/101 Functions Functions
(HW) *) Drive Functions *) -- Basic Machine *) -- Configuring SW Update and Tool Operator Interface
-- Extended Functions Syntax Configuration Management OP 030
-- Special Functions -- Development Kit

Manufacturer/Service Documentation

SINUMERIK
SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SIMODRIVE
SIMODRIVE SINUMERIK SIMODRIVE SIMODRIVE SIMODRIVE SIMODRIVE SIROTEC
840D 840D/840Di/ 840D 840D
810D 611D 611D
611D

Description of Description of Installation & Lists *) Description of Description of EMC

Functions Functions Start-up Guide *) Functions Functions Guidelines
SINUMERIK Digitizing -- FM-NC Linear Motor - Hydraulics
Safety Integrated -- 810D Module
-- 840D/611D - Analog Module
-- MMC/HMI

Electronic Documentation Manufacturer/Service Documentation

SINUMERIK
SIMODRIVE
SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK
840D/840Di/
810D/ 840D/840Di/ 840Di 840D/810D
611, Motors 810D

DOC ON CD *)
The SINUMERIK System
Descr. of Functions Descr. of Functions Manual Descr. of Functions
ISO Dialects for CAM Integration (HW + Installation Remote Diagnosis
SINUMERIK DNC NT-2000 and Start-up)
*) These documents are a minimum requirement for the control